Syntagma Grammaticvm, Or An eaſie, and methodicall explanation of Lillies Grammar, whereby the miſterie of this Art is more plainely ſet forth, both for the better helpe of all Schoole-maiſters, in the true order of teaching, and the Schollers farre more eaſie attainement of the Latine tongue

Document TypeSemi-diplomatic
CodeGranger
PrinterThomas Dawson
Typeprint
Year1616
PlaceLondon
Other editions:
  • modernised

SYNTAGMA GRAMMATICVM,

OR

An eaſie, and methodicall explanation of Lillies Grammar, whereby the miſterie of this Art is more plainely ſet forth, both for the better helpe of all Schoole-maiſters, in the true order of teaching, and the Schollers farre more eaſie attainement of the Latine tongue.

 

By Thomas Granger maiſter of Arts. Pet. Coll. Cant.

 

Scientiarum janitrix Grammatica.

 

LONDON

Printed by Thomas Dawſon.

1616.

{n. p.}

 

EPISTOLA DEDICATORIA.

Ornatiſsimo viro, bonis omnibus & literatis amiciſsimo, ac Mæcenati meo benigniſsimo, Iohanni Leuenthorpe Equiti Aurato perpetuam fælicitatem.

COgitanti mihi tantillùm (vir Magnanime) cui primitias agri mei vtcumque frugiferi ſincero corde, non blandulis manibus offerrem, derepentè tu occurrebas eo munere digniſſimus. Primùm, quia vt ipſe non ſolùm es genio, & ingenio ſingulari; ſed etiam ω̅ολυγράμματος (licet modeſtè ſolitus es dicere te non σοφον, ſed φιλὀν φιλοσοφῶν eſſe, quod ego veram ὲξοχ? veram ὀυγενείαν ſemper duxi: ita & beneuolo, propenſoque es animo in omnes literatos, eoſque præcipuè, qui, quod tribuit Muſa ſagax, non inuidé apud ſe detinent, ſed θεομιμ? μενοι in Commune conferunt. Deinde officij mei ratio poſtulat, in ruſticorum more beneficia tua in me immeritò ſæpè collata deglutirem, vt aliquod animi grati teſtimonium exhiberem. Prætereà, quod cerno jam animo, quàm tutus mihi ſub nominis tui patrocinio futurus ſit tranſitus. Ac ſpero me hoc tuæ inſignitum Clientelæ Σημείῳ peramicè hoſpitio exceptum iri, præſertim à ſacræ quolibet cultore Mineruæ. Quo Conſilio haud immaturo quidem leuidenſe munuſculum hoc ex ingenioli {A 2} mei cornucopiola depromptum, meritiſſimè, lubentiſſimè que tibi do, dedicoque, obnixè petens, vt illud fauente, ac benigno animo accipias, quemadmodum à me animo tui obſeruantiſſimo exhibetur: hac in re Perſarum regem Artaxerxem imitatus, qui, cùm pauper quidam ſinæta nomine, aquam ei vtraque vola è flumine Cyro exhauſtam obtuliſſet, (Nam ex lege omnes pro ſuis facultatibus Δῶϱα, i, munera regi præterequitãti offerentes coràm apponebant) grato inquit, animo munus tuum accipio, et in pretioſiſſimis numero iuſſis inſuper Eunuchis, vt in auream phialam de manibus aquã exciperent: ita ſi tu (clariſſime vir) pro ſũma tua humanitate, ingenuoq́Ȝ candore Δῶϱον τ?το qualecunque non in auream phialam, ſed in fictilem acceptationis tuæ vrnulam excipere dignatus fueris, totius vóti me compotem feceris. Vale (vir Generoſiſſime) quem Deus opt. Max. protegat, & Conſeruet æternùm. Gal. Iun. 1615.

 

Dignitati tuæ ſervus

addictiſſimus.

Thomas Granger.

{n. p.}

 

The Epiſtle to the Reader, containing the generall Theorike, or true groundes of teaching.

 

THERE be two maine errours (Gentle Reader) both in teaching, and learning, and not ſo great, as common, Doubtfullnes, and Confuſion, doubtfullnes ſometime in the Maſter, and alwayes in the Scholar. Firſt in the Maſter it is a great errour to thinke that the Scholar can p𝔯ofite any thinge at all by that, which he himſelfe not well vnderſtanding teacheth doubtfullie. Againe it is an errour not much leſſe, that when he perfectly vnderſtanding what he teacheth, regardeth not much, whether, and how the Scholar vnderſtandeth, and conceiueth the ſame.

Fo𝔯 the refo𝔯mation of the fo𝔯mer, the Maſter muſt vſe time, and diligence, yea and meditation alſo, if need ſo require, that it being firſt made his owne, he may freely, and confidently p𝔯opund it to the Schollar, which p𝔯oceeding not rawly, but ripe lie from him, the Schollar may app𝔯ehend, conceiue and digeſt the ſame the better. Mo𝔯eouer when it p𝔯oceedeth indiſtinctly, and harſhly (hiulcè) from the maiſter, the Schollar conceiues a greater difficultie thereof, whereby he is diſcouraged at the firſt entrie, and beginning of his labour grudging alſo in his mind at the Maiſters rigour, and vniuſt dealing, that he ſhould propound, and require perfectnes of that in him, which ſeemeth difficult enough to himſelfe.

Fo𝔯 the amendment of the ſeconde the Maſter {A 3} muſt imagine that thoſe things which are eaſieſt to his vnderſtanding are moſt hard, and difficult to the Schollars. Therefo𝔯e it requires good skill, and art to condiſcend from the ſtrength of his mans vnderſtanding, reaſon, and imagination, and to apply, and intermingle them to and with the Scholars, gently and ſoftly drawing him after him: knowing this, that the Schollar hath the ſame faculties of the Soule, perfect, but weake, and therefo𝔯e hath naturallie a deſire, and reioycing in that, whereby he receiueth increaſe of ſtrength to perfection, as contrarily he hath no pleaſure in that which is to ſtrong fo𝔯 him, no mo𝔯e than the ſucking childe hath of ſtrong meates. This appeares euidently in their plaies, and ſpo𝔯ts, wherein they do ſort, and gather themſelues acco𝔯ding to their agreable o𝔯 differing natures, and witts which thing is naturall, and common to them with trees, plants, beaſts, 𝔈c. which reioice in the fellowſhippe of their owne kind (but being mixt with others, are ſolitary, euen in companie) and in their owne kind, delight moſt in them, that come neereſt to their indiuiduall natures, and p𝔯operties. Hominum quoque mos eſt, as Gnatho knowes well enough. And if the Maſter in his diſcreſion and iudgement can ſo play the Pantemime, applying himſelfe to the Schollar, and ſtealinge him as it were by guile, he ſhall eaſily perceiue the Schollar to be much mo𝔯e willing, and toward, and in ſho𝔯t time finde fruictfull ſucceſſe of his labours.

But if the parents (which moſt commonly come in like Lo𝔯ds of miſrule diſturbinge, and confounding both Maiſter and Scholar) wold diſſemble, and reſtraine, a little their naturall affections with the bridle of reaſon taking vpon them the perſon {n. p.} and nature of a maiſter, as they ſhould: againe if the maiſter would be anſwereable to them, taking vpon him the perſon and affection of a father, as he ought; the Scholer knowing the reſolution of his parents, wold buckle himſelfe to pleaſe his maiſter, and to follow his booke with diligence, being d𝔯iuen thereto on the one ſide with the ſtrangenes of his parents, and aſſured on the otherſide with the kindnes and familiaritie of the Maſter, Neither can the ſtrangenes of the Parents, be ſuch, but their naturall loue and affection will eaſily appeare to the child: nor yet can the familiaritie of the maiſter be ſuch, but that his fremdnes (as we ſay) and therefo𝔯e matter of feare and awe will appeare: otherwiſe Nimia familiaritas parit contemptum.

The child that is thus conteined in his duty by this mixt loue, and feare, ſhal follow his booke with willingnes, ioy, and delight and ſhall p𝔯ofite maruelouſly in a ſho𝔯t ſpace, being but of indifferent capacitie. And if the Parents ſhall manifeſt their loue to their child𝔯en eſpecially vpon their Maſters commendations fo𝔯 their learning, and dutifullnes (ſometimes counterfeting the ſame, as occaſion ſhall require) it ſhall encourage them to delight, and glo𝔯y in the performance thereof. But where the caſe ſtands contrary to this that I haue ſaid, it hath alſo a contrarie effect. There was yet neuer any that by loue and faire meanes onely attayned to learning, nether that by meere compulſion, if they attained to ſome, long retained the ſame; at leaſtwiſe did and good there with, and in neither of them came it to any p𝔯oofe.

Furthermo𝔯e, Doubtfullnes in the Schollar is a maine errour in learning, ſeeing that hee which {A 4} doubteth knoweth nothinge, and therefore learneth nothinge, (fo𝔯 learning is knowledge) vnleſſe it be to talke he cannot tell of what. And this is too common a fault. For in moſt Schooles where as a Schollar hath repeated his leſſon perfectlie, and vnderſtandinglie to the iudgement of a ſtranger, if hee ſhalbe well examined in the ſame, he will either giue many anſwers (I meane geſſes) o𝔯 elſe will his lipps go faſt, but he dars ſay nothing (a foolish kind of lip labour) leaſt he ſhould ſpeake a miſſe, not knowing the right from the w𝔯onge. Where vpon he is thought to be defectiue in vnderſtanding, o𝔯 memo𝔯ie and is counted a dullard, whereas it is but his doubtfull learning. Fo𝔯 other wiſe, if he were ſure of that, which he would ſpeake o𝔯 had a mo𝔯e diſtinct knowledge thereof, he would giue a bold, and wittie anſwere, yea and take pleaſure in being oppoſed.

The greateſt reaſon of this vncertainty, and doubtfullnes, is becauſe that child𝔯en are phantaſticall, and full of imaginations, their vnderſtandings weake, their app𝔯ehenſions confuſed, and reaſon vnperfect, and becauſe their blood is hote, and boilinge, they are fickle, and reſtleſſe, minding nothing, but varieties, 𝔈 nouelties, being moued to and fro with euery light obiect, noting, and telling what they heare, and ſee, imitating that they ſee done of others, and are ſoone wearied with ſho𝔯t continuance euen in that they moſt deſired, in ſo much that euen their play, if they were held to it by rule, would be as weariſome to them, as learning: o𝔯 if their maiſter ſhould appoint them their play, though otherwiſe they themſelues would happily haue choſen the ſame befo𝔯e any other game, yet will it ſoone be tedious to them. {n. p.}

Upon this conſideration (to avoyd doubtfull learning) the maiſter muſt ſtirre them vp to attention in their lecture giuing, vſing often to demand (as he ſhall ſee them Careles) what he laſt ſpake? what be the wo𝔯ds following? what point is at ſuch a wo𝔯d 𝔈c. giuing reaſons why he conſtrueth thus, 𝔈 not thus, expounding their leſſon to them in plaine wo𝔯ds, and in ſuch ſtile, and manner, as is familiar to them, illuſtrating the meaning by ſuch vulgar examples, and compariſons, as are known to them, o𝔯 may be eaſily app𝔯ehended of them: other wiſe it were to teach them other things and to put new fancies into them, which will make them mo𝔯e igno𝔯ant, and fo𝔯getfull of that, which is then taught them. Fo𝔯 child𝔯ens witts (note well) are confounded with varieties at once, being contrary to the courſe of nature, as ſhall hereafter appeare. After lecture giuen, let him heare ſome one, o𝔯 other verbatim as it was giuen and ſo remaining euer in the Schoole with them, cauſe them to doe his appointments diligently, and that by themſelues ſeuerallie without helpe one of another making them bold to aſke him, what they doubt of. Neither let him immediately tell them, but by many interrogations, and bouts (as wee ſay) b𝔯inge them to tell themſelues of it. This will cauſe the child to doe his wo𝔯ke with vnderſtanding and diſcourſe, and make him mo𝔯e carefull to remember what he hath learned, and what his maſter telles him, whereas this immediate telling, p𝔯omping: and looking in dictionaries makes them doe all things by rote, and like Parrates, quite beſides Grammar.

Alſo let him neuer ſuffer them to haue any toyes about them, o𝔯 neere them, eyther b𝔯ought from {n. p.} home, o𝔯 deuiſed there: fo𝔯 if ſuch things be p𝔯eſent, they will haue them alwayes in their hands, o𝔯 in their mindes, So that by meanes of ſuch cowling imaginations, nothing that they doe, much leſſe than is told them, can make any faſt imp𝔯eſsion in them, but b𝔯okenly, and confuſedly floateth in their heads Whereby it commeth to paſſe, that that, which they haue alreadie learned, is no p𝔯eſident, o𝔯 furtherance to them in that which followeth after, euery leſſon after many weekes, moneths, and yeares being as ſtrange to them as the firſt was, fo𝔯 any certaine knowledge, o𝔯 vnderſtanding they haue of what they ſay.

And to ſpeake as the thing is, this is the cauſe, why that many, which are fit fo𝔯 the Uniuerſitie (falſely ſo ſuppoſed) and ſome which are at the Uniuerſitie, (I will not ſay ſome Graduates) ſtand as much neede of a Grammar in their ſtudies as of any other booke. Fo𝔯 camming to publike exerciſes there, o𝔯 but in their Tuto𝔯s Chambers, and therefo𝔯e carefull to doe well, and fearefull to amiſſe, they begin but then to feele their wants, and moſt of them to complaine of their owne in learning.

Now if any one aſke me, why they can make Epiſtles, Themes, and ſpeake Latine in the country, and come ſo to be plunged afterward. I anſwere it is becauſe they ſeemed to doe well by geſſe, hauing gotten by long continuance a certaine habite of geſſinge, that is, parſing, and conſtruing, and giuing rules by certaine notes, and markes (as the art doth play his feates by obſeruing his maiſte𝔯s geſtures, ſtaffe, becks, o𝔯 looks) I meane by their maiſters wo𝔯ds, and certaine fo𝔯mes of ſpeaking in his queſtions, and demaunds, rather {n. p.} then by any vnderſtanding of the o𝔯der of Grammar, o𝔯 true meaning of the rule.

And ſo by much teaching and long continuance (their app𝔯ehenſion, and diſcourſe of reaſon waxing riper as they waxe elder) they can begin to conſture alone, but by very ſmall direction of Grammer. And comming to make Schole-excerciſes can partly ſteale vnreaſonablie: and partly immitats their autours making little o𝔯 no vſe of Grammar o𝔯 any part thereof but doing all by apiſh imitation, and groſe theft, being ſure of this onely, that their Autour w𝔯ites true Latine, and good matter and So by geſsing what he ſpeakes, tye it to ſome other ſuch like matter, ſtollen out of ſome other place, whereby it comes in the end to be a great miſhapen body, with neuer a ſound ioynt in it, knit together with ſinewes of ſand. This is the ſpoile of their inuention, reaſon and vnderſtanding, that few recouer till by reaſon of age, ſtudy, and meditation (vnleſſe they be very p𝔯egnant witted) they come to ripenes of iudgement. But ſome feele the diſcommodity of this co𝔯ruption, as long as they liue.

The ſecond maine errour is Confuſion. The p𝔯inciples of all Arts, and Sciences, are naturall to the Soule, infuſed into it in the creation, which comming to a well diſpoſed, and rightly o𝔯ganiʒed body (as the good muſitian comes to a good inſtrument) retaineth the ſame pure, and vndefiled (which is called the light of nature) not being diſo𝔯dered, and darkned with the vnaptneſſe, and contagion thereof. Therefo𝔯e of the diuerſe diſpoſition, and habitude of the bodie, ariſe thoſe infinite varieties, and differences of wits, one being eſpecially apt to one thing, another to another thing, ſome (as we ſay) to all things, others to nothing. Now the gathering {n. p.} of ſequels, and concluſions from thoſe lights, o𝔯 p𝔯inciples, by the diſcourſe of reaſon th𝔯ough obſeruation and experience, is generally called wiſedome, o𝔯 art, which it effecteth by the two p𝔯operties thereof, Diſtinction, and Methode. By diſtinction it ſeparateth, and diuideth confuſed, and differing things, as all thinges in the beginning were ſeparated out of the confuſed maſſe o𝔯 Chaos (wherin they were vnifo𝔯mally contained) one from another. And by methode it o𝔯derly diſpoſeth, and placeth all thinges of the ſame nature and kinde in o𝔯der, euen as in the frame of the wo𝔯lde, wee ſee howe euery thing is diſpoſed in wonderfull o𝔯der. Whereupon art is rightly defined to be the comp𝔯ehenſion of certaine rules, o𝔯 p𝔯ecepts, of the ſame kinde, to ſome p𝔯ofitable end. And as it is after this manner obtained, ſo is it alſo taught another by the ſame.

Firſt, there muſt be p𝔯inciples, o𝔯 light of nature in the Scholler, otherwiſe light is not comp𝔯ehended of darknes. Then the maiſter muſt apply himſelfe to him by diſtinct, and methodicall teaching. Otherwiſe he ſhall increaſe confuſion, and b𝔯eed in him a kinde of vndiſtinct and confuſed knowledge, o𝔯 rather imaginatiōs, which b𝔯ing fo𝔯th nothing: not mending, but marring the witte, making the Scholler mo𝔯e fooliſh, not th𝔯ough defect of nature in the Scholler, but diſo𝔯derly teaching, which in ſtead of helping, doth hinder it. Which confuſion being made habituall, the Scholler comming by reaſon of age, to ſome maturitie of reaſon 𝔈 iudgement, cannot without much adoe refo𝔯me, though he be of good wit, being like to thoſe, that hauing bin diſo𝔯deredly and rudely b𝔯ought vp in the countrey, and afterward comming to ſome great place, {n. p.} o𝔯 attayning to ſome higher calling, doe feele the diſcommoditie thereof a long time, whereas they that haue beene b𝔯ought vp in hill, as if it were in hall, can with little endeuour fit themſelues to any thing, without any difficultie.

Grammar is therefo𝔯e fo𝔯 moſt iuſt cauſe called, the key of Arts, not onely becauſe it teacheth Languages, without the knowledge whereof, wee can vnderſtand nothing, but that which is w𝔯itten in our mother tongue: and ſo ſhould bee dep𝔯iued of thoſe Arts, which are inuented o𝔯 perfected by men of other Languages: but alſo becauſe it is a liuely patterne and p𝔯eſident to the wit in the ſtudie of other Arts whatſoeuer, though not fo𝔯 the matter, yet fo𝔯 the manner, and methode. And if the Grammar ſhall bee diſtinctly, perfectly, and methodically taught and learned, it is not onely halfe the Languages, but halfe the matter. For euen as he that hath perfectly learned Grammar, hath gotten halfe the Language: ſo he that is perfect in the methode of an Art, O𝔯ation, Epiſtle, 𝔈c. hath halfe the knowledge, and vnderſtanding thereof. Futhermo𝔯e experience teacheth that what we are taught, and as we are taught when we are young, maketh ſuch an imp𝔯eſsiō in our wits, 𝔈 memo𝔯ies, as that it becommeth naturall vnto vs, neither can we wholy relinquiſh, no𝔯 fo𝔯get the ſame. This both common obſeruation, 𝔈 daily experience p𝔯oueth. Fo𝔯 they that haue beene b𝔯ought vp with good ſchoole-maiſters, doe alſo p𝔯oue good Schoole-maiſters. Contrarily, they that haue beene taught confuſedly, and igno𝔯antly, though mo𝔯e by their owne aptneſſe, than by their maiſters good p𝔯eparation, they come to be good Schollers in the Uniuerſitie, yet are they new to begin againe, fo𝔯 matter of Grammar, {n. p.} and teaching, which they finde to bee as troubleſome a peece of wo𝔯ke, as all their Uniuerſities ſtudie and p𝔯actiſe, if euer they make good countrey Scholler. And this is not one of the leaſt, 𝔈 rareſt cauſes, why there are mo𝔯e good Schollers, then good Schoole-maiſters. But to ſpeake of this abuſe of confuſed teaching in particulars, wherein it is commonly offended, would bee too tedious in this place, which together with the refo𝔯mation thereof, I entend to speake of in another treatiſe.

To p𝔯oceed farther. This erro𝔯 of p𝔯epoſterous teaching, is altogether committed in the p𝔯euention of nature. For all doe build vpon the foundation of cuſtome, 𝔈 coniecture, not vpon the rocke. Therefo𝔯e though ſome doe ſeeme to doe very well ſometimes, yet it is mo𝔯e than they perfectly know, and that which a man doth not knowingly (Scienter) it cannot truly be said to be well done: It may be Bonum factum a good deed, yet if it want the ſpirit, 𝔈 life of Benefactum of well done, it hath not a liuely effect, o𝔯 efficacie in the Scholler, except the Scholler be of a riper wit, and quicker imagination than the Maiſter, as ſometimes falleth out: but he that ſpeaketh 𝔈 teacheth knowingly, and maturely, exhibiteth the commentarie of his wo𝔯ds in his countenance, and geſture.

Nature then is the rocke o𝔯 foundation of Art. He therfo𝔯e that teacheth him, to whom nature hath denied abilitie to learne: o𝔯 that teacheth any thing to him that hath abilitie, befo𝔯e that nature ſhew fo𝔯th her powers, doe both build on the ſand, and teach the Parrat to ſpeake. And ſuch learning is fo𝔯gotten, as ſoone as it is gotten. Fo𝔯 the haſting of nature beyond ſetled, and conſtant courſe, is {n. p.} not helping, but hindering. That learning therefo𝔯e that is gotten, o𝔯 rather taught in the outrunning of nature, is a floating imagination, o𝔯 rather wand𝔯ing phantaſme, o𝔯 d𝔯eame, whoſe ground is the maiſters b𝔯eath, and not ſenſible feeling, 𝔈 conceit thereof in the Schollers reaſon. Fo𝔯 it is not in the willer, no𝔯 in the runner, but in nature, that giueth the gift, with the meaſure thereof, and perfecteth the ſame by her owne ſcience, 𝔈 in her owne time. And it is our ſcience to obſerue, and know natures ſcience, and to applie our ſelues vnto it: fo𝔯 as the Philoſopher ſaith Phyſic. 2. cap. 2 ϰ̔ τεχνϰ̓ μιμειτου τ? ϕὺοιν art imitateth nature: therfo𝔯e though phantaſtike people are moſt delighted, and in loue with their owne antikes, o𝔯 groundles buildings: Yet this is the onely true ground, and ſcience. And how far ſoeuer wee differ, and diſagree from it, euen ſo much greater is our errour, ſeeing that Art is the Scholler of nature. Many fo𝔯 want of due conſideration and knowledge hereof, do miſerablie to𝔯ment both their Schollers, and themſelues, the one being the others To𝔯turer whereas it is a great delight to teach, and to learne, if ſo be that the Scholler be not of too froward, and peruerſe will, the maiſter too impatient, and the ignorant parents too much medling.

Fo𝔯 the clearer vnderſtanding hereof, that thou maiſt imitate, and apply thy ſelfe to nature in thy p𝔯actiſe of teaching, obſerue firſt the ſcience, and wo𝔯ke of nature in vegetables. The co𝔯ne of wheat being ſowne in the ground, nature, which is the inviſible ſubſtance, o𝔯 ſeede, firſt wo𝔯keth on the ſperme o𝔯 floo𝔯e thereof, receiuing ſo much perfection, and ſtrength from the ſame, as fitteth it fo𝔯 the wombe of the earth. Then it faſteneth the attractiue {n. p.} mouth, o𝔯 roote in the earth, d𝔯awing nouriſhment there from, as the child doth from the bodie of the mother. Afterward it commeth to birth appearing out of the earth, a ſmall ſpire hardly to diſcerned from any other graine, which ſho𝔯tly groweth into a leafe, after which grow other leaues: then the blade which is ſtrengthened, and defended with the leaues, after that the eare, 𝔈c. Herein, and in all other things obſerue the imagination o𝔯 ſcience of this cunning artificer nature, how diſtinctly, and methodicallie ſhe contriueth, and in time perfiteth the building vp of her ſelfe. The Carpenter, o𝔯 G𝔯auer by his ſcience o𝔯 imagination beginneth, and pe𝔯fecteth his wo𝔯ke without himſelfe, but nature within herſelfe: euen as if the ſcience o𝔯 imagination of the ingrauer ſhould be operatiue within the tree, diſtinctly, and methodically framing, 𝔈 faſhioninge an Image of the pureſt and beſt thereof, but expelling the g𝔯oſſe, and vnp𝔯ofitable, as bowes, barke, knotts, 𝔈c.

And as the art of engrauing is vnifo𝔯mally conteyned in the minde of the Caruer, but when a peece of wood is offered to him to wo𝔯ke on, the vnifo𝔯mall, and inuiſible vertues one after another o𝔯derly, and methodically ſhew themſelues in the framing, faſhioning, and growing of this vnſhapen logge (which is the element of the wo𝔯ke) into a pleaſant image, 𝔈c. Euen ſo in the ſeede of all vegetables, o𝔯 growing things, and of all ſenſibles, that is, of beaſts, foules, fiſhes, 𝔈c. is vnifo𝔯mally conteined the whole naturs, p𝔯operties, qualities, colours, fruites, actions, 𝔈c. of the plant, o𝔯 beaſt whatſoeuer. Which after that it hath a wombe, o𝔯 matrice beginneth to wo𝔯ke out of it a body vpon it ſelfe: The full growth, and perfection of which {n. p.} wo𝔯kes, o𝔯 edifice plainely ſheweth to manns ſences what nature, o𝔯 ſcience, lay hid in the ſeede inviſiblie.

Now fo𝔯 to reflect this light of the macrocoſme, o𝔯 the great wo𝔯ld, vpon the microcoſme, o𝔯 man, that the Schole-Maſter may ground his teaching on nature eſpecially the true foundation, following her euen in her ſtepps, without aberration, o𝔯 extrauagation, and not vpon bare imaginations, vncertaine coniectures, and imitation of others.

Sperma hominis moſt igno𝔯antly called of ſome, excrementum Lumborum, being indeed, the verie p𝔯ime, and quinteſſence of his elementarie bodie, is like the Chaos, o𝔯 firſt matter, whereupon the ſpirit of nature, o𝔯 imagination being moued, is made liuing, containing in it inuiſiblie, and vnifo𝔯mallie, the whole nature of man, his b𝔯utall wiſedome, reaſon, phantaſie, ſence, conditions, complexion, qualities, actions, 𝔈c. I ſpeake not of the immo𝔯tall ſoule, but of her plaſma, o𝔯 veſſell. Which vertues, powers, o𝔯 faculties, one after another ſhew themſelues diſtinctly, and methodically in time and ſeaſon. Firſt the vegetable vertue of the inviſible ſeed, o𝔯 ſpirit of imagination (euen as the wheat co𝔯ne) wo𝔯keth on the ſperme, adapting (fouentè ſolummodò matrice) the firſt degree of the bodies fo𝔯mation therefrom. Then it d𝔯aweth matter from the bodie of the mother (non ſolùm fouente, ſed paſcente matrice) whereon it wo𝔯keth, and frameth the liuer, heart, b𝔯aines, and other members, and is called Embryo. After that the vegetable vertue hath thus far diſtinctly, and methodically b𝔯ought, and w𝔯ought the matter, then mo𝔯eouer the ſenſible vertue, and firſt of feeling, ſheweth it ſelfe. And now hath it made it ſelfe a fit tabernacle, o𝔯 houſe {B} fo𝔯 the ſuperceleſtiall ſubſtance the ſoule, which comes not into it by p𝔯opagation of generation, but by immediate creation, 𝔈 infuſion. And is now called νήπιος an Infant.

After this followeth motion. And hauing ſuch ſtrength and perfection, as the Matrice can affo𝔯de it, it commeth to birth, that is, paſſeth out of the matrice of the little wo𝔯ld, into the wombe of the great wo𝔯ld, wherein it wo𝔯keth, and whereout it d𝔯aweth food vnto the perfection of it ſelfe, as it did in the firſt matrice. And being perfected in this great wombe, there being no other matrice to receiue it fo𝔯 further perfection, it beginneth to decline by little and little, then dyeth, and is diſperſed into this great bodie, out of which it was taken at the firſt: The ſoule alſo returning to God that gaue it.

Now being come into the matrice of the great wo𝔯ld, it receiueth further ſtrength, and perfection from the common ay𝔯e, the mothers milke, 𝔈c. wherby the other ſences are actually perfected. After this the common ſence ſheweth it ſelfe, which app𝔯ehendeth the ſpecies, o𝔯 as I may ſay (the viſions) of the outward ſences, but at the firſt vnifo𝔯mallie. Then the imaginatiue vertue, o𝔯 phantaſie appeareth, which at the firſt receiueth thoſe ſpecies, o𝔯 ſhewes from the common ſence, but as vnifo𝔯mall 𝔈 indiſtinct glances. After it appeareth the memo𝔯atiue facultie, which at the firſt rememb𝔯eth vnifo𝔯mally and indiſtinctly alſo: but afterward ſome one vehement phantaſme, maketh diſtinct imp𝔯eſſion, 𝔈c.

And thus when all the o𝔯ganicall faculties haue obteined conuenient perfection, then the intellectiue vertue, o𝔯 vnderſtanding appeareth fo𝔯th in operation, {n. p.} which is p𝔯oper onely to the reaſonable ſoule, that reflecteth it ſelfe, both vpon it ſelfe, and vpon all things. And this it doth o𝔯derly, and methodically. Firſt by app𝔯ehenſion of ſimple notions, not as they are meere ſhewes in the phantaſie, but as hauing an affection to argue, o𝔯 to be argued. Secondly, then by compoſition, o𝔯 ioyning together things agreeing, by affirmation: and ſeparating 𝔈 diſioyning things diſagreeing, by negation, called p𝔯opoſitions affirmatiue and negatiue. Thirdly, after that, by ſyllogiʒing, o𝔯 reaſoning, hiʒ. confirming, o𝔯 refuting queſtions by this o𝔯 that reaſon, o𝔯 argument. Fourthly, by o𝔯dination, o𝔯 methodicall diſpoſition of things of the ſame kind declared, explicated, amplified, illuſtrated, and alſo confirmed 𝔈c. by arguments, and ſyllogiſticall diſcourſe, placing the moſt generall, 𝔈 ſimpleſt in the firſt place, and ſo by o𝔯derly diſcent comming to the moſt ſpeciall, and compound in the laſt place.

Now after that theſe faculties of the vnderſtanding haue receiued thus much perfection, then the Κοίναι ἐννοι̌αι, that is, the common notions of the knowledge of God, and truth in the mind: and the Syntereſis, the knowledge, and diſcretion of good from euill in the conſcience, begin to appeare, and ſhew fo𝔯th themſelues. This is the o𝔯der, and p𝔯ogreſſe of nature, o𝔯 rather of diuine wiſedome in nature. Wherein obſerue, and ſee how p𝔯eciſely, and conſtantly the ſimple, and generall faculties being the meaneſt, doe firſt appeare: afterward the mo𝔯e ſpeciall, and compound being mo𝔯e excellent, till the whole man be perfected and compleate, in the moſt ſpeciall and moſt compound. And note that this o𝔯der of nature cannot poſſiblie be inuerted: that is to ſay, the ſenſitiue power cannot p𝔯euent the vegetatiue, {B. 2.} and ſo of all the reſt, no mo𝔯e than the Tree can grow downeward into the roote. Note alſo that the coaction, o𝔯 violent compulſion of nature, I meane the haſtning of her beyond her courſe, is the deſtruction of nature, at leaſt the hind𝔯ing of her wo𝔯ke.

Euen ſuch like is the p𝔯ogreſſe of euery art, both in the teaching and learning, 𝔈 therefore of Grammar alſo: For our owne experience may teach vs that a man cannot teache, o𝔯 learne Syntaxis without the knowledge of Etymologie, no mo𝔯e than to read befo𝔯e he know his letters. But put the caſe that he could doe them, with what exceeding great difficultie ſhould it be? (Fo𝔯 at leaſt wiſe he muſt haue the Clarum Lumen, o𝔯 vnderſtanding and knowledge of the firſt inuenters) and to learne both together fo𝔯 haſt, were confuſed, and indiſcreete teaching and learning, and therefo𝔯e as good as no teaching o𝔯 learning at all.

Alſo the violent coaction of the learner, I meane the haſtning of him beyond the ſemblable maturity o𝔯 ripeneſſe of his naturall parts, o𝔯 faculties, is the deſtruction of his wit, 𝔈 learning, at least wiſe the hinderance of both, acco𝔯ding to the p𝔯ouerbe, Feſtinans canis cæcos parit catulos; and the abo𝔯tiue childe eyther dyeth ſoone, o𝔯 as we ſay, th𝔯iues not in his perſon, at laſt wiſe a long time. This conturbing and diſturbing of the childes wittes, makes both him to hate learning, and the Maiſter to hate teaching, being both wearied, and ouermaughted (as wee ſay) about an eaſie peece of wo𝔯ke, and all by taking the w𝔯ong end firſt in hand, as they that would catch weete Eeles by their tales.

Fo𝔯 the refo𝔯mation of this Errour, the maiſter {n. p.} muſt know, that art is the reflexion of the reaſonable ſoule vpon nature i. both vpon all things, and vpon her ſelfe, which is p𝔯oper onely to reaſonable creatures: wherein as euery one excelleth, ſo much the mo𝔯e wiſe is he counted, 𝔈 is ſo indeede but they that are altogeather defectiue herein, are commonly called Naturalls. Now this reflexion and the growth thereof is in all things anſwerable to nature it ſelfe, and the growth thereof, as befo𝔯e I haue plainely ſhewed. He therefo𝔯e that taketh a child to teach, muſt know that he hath the matter Chaos (ἰλ?) o𝔯 ſeede, wherin the art, o𝔯 arts, that he would teach, are vnifo𝔯mally, o𝔯 potentially conteined. And although in regard of the act of teaching he may be called Pater (as Saint Paule calls himſelfe in the wo𝔯ke of regeneration) yet in regard of the learner, that hauing the arts of his Maiſter potentially in himſelfe doth ſucke, and extract matter of art from his Maſter, fo𝔯 the building by, and perfecting of himſelfe, he is alſo called mater, as the ſame Apoſtle termes himſelfe.

Therefo𝔯e the Maiſter muſt firſt frame himſelfe to be as the Sperme, exhibiting the firſt elements to the Schollars witt, which are the moſt ſimple, and generall in art, 𝔈 anſwerable to the vegetatiue facultie in nature. After that muſt p𝔯ooceed further, 𝔈 exhibet himſelfe as the matrice of the microcoſme that the Scholler not lingring longer, then need requireth on the elements (Nam non progredi eſt regredi) may p𝔯oceede fo𝔯ward both in learning, 𝔈 exerciſe, making obſeruing alwayes how nature multiplieth her ſelfe by degrees, and not ſuddainely, o𝔯 haſtily. Fo𝔯 this he muſt know by obſeruation yͭ as he is to yͤ Scholer a matrice (as the ſperme is to the ſeede, the earth to plants, the wombe to the infant, 𝔈 {B. 3.} the great wo𝔯ld to all things) ſo the Scholar muſt receiue nothing from him, but that wherof he hath a facultie, o𝔯 abilitie in himſelfe (& pro modulo facultatis) to be p𝔯oduced into act, and perfected by the Maiſters teaching. Fo𝔯 though the ſeed be ſowne in the beſt ground that is, 𝔈 in varitie of grounds fo𝔯 triall ſake and haue all the coſt that may be beſtowed thereon, yet cannot this adde, o𝔯 deminiſh any thing to the nature of the ſeede, (ex ſpinis non colliguntur vuæ) Therefo𝔯e ought not nature to be compelled, no𝔯 ſtrugled to much withall: ſeeing that teaching is nothing but plantatio, & rigatio, planting and watering, as Saint Paule ſaith in ſpirituall things.

Whereupon let him know, that not euerie thing which he teacheth, though neuer ſo plaine, and p𝔯ofitable, doth better the Scholler much, but that which he is inclined vnto by his owne Genius, o𝔯 ſpirit. Fo𝔯 nature arrideth that, which is agreeable to her, and perfectiue of her, and though the thing be great and waighty in the accompliſhment, and attainement thereof to others in regard of the means: yet is ſhee not diſcouraged, but comprehending in generall the way, and poſsibility thereof by ſmall moments obtaineth the but, o𝔯 marke of her inclination and deſirs. Herevpon arriſeth that common ſpeech p𝔯ouerbially vſed, That which wilbe, wilbe, and who would euer haue thought it. On the other ſide nature is froward, and aduerſe to that, which diſſenteth from her, hauing no pleaſure, no𝔯 delight therein, and therefo𝔯e though the thing be eaſie, and means great to the view and iudgement of others, yet after much a doe, this is the concluſion, and fruite, opera, & impenſa perijt. It was a thing that would not be. {n. p.}

Therefo𝔯e fo𝔯 moſt iuſt cauſe is the Maiſter compared to a matrice, ſeeing that the Schollar, as the ſeede, is the agent, and the maiſter the patient (In ſpirituall things it is quite contrarie fo𝔯 the goſpell being effectuall by the ſpirit is the agent conuerting, and changing man into the nature of it ſelfe, who is therefo𝔯e a meere patient, being a leeper in the pureſt ſpirits of his heart, and b𝔯aine and therefo𝔯e hath in him no power, o𝔯 facultie at all to attract any ſpirituall thing, vnleſſe to carnaliʒe it, but his powers are infuſed from aboue, as the reaſonable ſoule is, 𝔈c.) Whereupon it followeth by good conſequence, that the Schollar muſt attaine to learning by his owne ſtudie, induſtrie, diligence, and exerciſe, vſing his maiſter as a helpe, as a nourſe, o𝔯 matrice, as I ſaid befo𝔯e. And againe the Maiſter is to exhibite himſelfe to the Schollar as a well mannered tilled, and pure ſoile, that will b𝔯ing fo𝔯th flooriſhing and plentifull fruits by the ſtrenght thereof, although the ſeede be but weane, and ſuch as will hardly grow at all in barren, leane, and moſſy ground: knowing this that the fat paſture cauſeth the Ewes to twinne, Et ex fortibus creari fortes.

This that I haue ſayd of the Schollers ſelflearning is to be well noted, fo𝔯 oft times the maſter partly of conſcience (but not too often) and partly to ſatiſfie the earneſt deſires of the parents, is verie deligent in teaching, which maketh the ſcollar mo𝔯e negligent in learning, as the p𝔯ouerbe is, a quick, handed miſtreſſe maketh a ſlow heeld ſeruant, and the wheat that is ſowne in too fat, and ranke ground often p𝔯ooues naught in harueſt time. Let not the Scolar therefo𝔯e haue an idle, carleſſe, and wand𝔯ing imagination of the Maſters {B. 4.} inſtructiōs, but let him ſo faſten on the ſame, 𝔈 that in ſerious muſing thereon, he may feele the truth 𝔈 reaſon thereof in his owne vnderſtanding, whereby it comes to be made his owne, and is not eaſily fo𝔯gotten, nay it is neuer fo𝔯gotten, if the Scholar really, not phantaſtically attracting the ſame doth ripely, not rawly digeſt it.

That this may be rightly done, two things in nature are to be obſerued. Firſt we vnderſtand, and remember by ſemblances, and places (Similitudines & locos). Fo𝔯 let a man marke himſelfe, when he heareth, o𝔯 readeth ſomething that he p𝔯eſently vnderſtandeth, not: and againe, when hee vnderſtandeth, but feareth to fo𝔯get, he beginneth immediately to raiſe vp, and ſift the phantaſmes of the imagination, and to call them out of the memo𝔯ie, that lie hid, and treaſured there; which appearing to his minde doe helpe his app𝔯ehenſion, giuing alſo directions and info𝔯mations to the diſcourse of his reaſon. Hence it is, that they, which are of good memo𝔯ie, and quick imagination are ſharp, witty, and eloquent, and commonly, (though erroneouſly) accompted the beſt Scholars, at leaſt wiſe haue the generall applauſe, fo𝔯 many be phantaſticall, but few iudicious. And though their vnderſtanding be but weake (ſpeaking and doing excellently oft times that, which they ripely vnderſtand and not) yet he that is contrarily defectiue in imagination, and memo𝔯ie, but of deepe app𝔯ehenſion, receiueth great helpe, and furtherance by them: fo𝔯 without thoſe lights of the phantaſie, his app𝔯ehenſions lie hid, and obſcure to others, yea and to himſelfe, inſo much that he ſtands neede of one to ſpeaks that which he thinks, and knowes, and to be as it were his interp𝔯eter. And to vtter this mo𝔯e plainely, {n. p.} theſe two differing ſo𝔯ts of men habent rationem maris, & fæminæ. Fo𝔯 the iudicious 𝔈 app𝔯ehenſiue is helped by the imaginatiue man, 𝔈 therfo𝔯e delighteth in him: 𝔈 the imaginatiue man is perfected by yͤ iudgement of the other, 𝔈 therfo𝔯e reioyceth in him.

But to digreſſe no farther (fo𝔯 much may be ſpoken hereof) child𝔯en are very imaginatiue, and full of fances. And as they are ſtrong in imagination, ſo are they weake in vnderſtanding, and diſcourſe; therefo𝔯e the maiſter muſt in as plaine ſo𝔯t as may be, manifeſt euery thing to their vnderſtandinges, alwayes calling on them, 𝔈 vrging them to marke well what he ſayth to them, asking them, if they vnderſtand him: Fo𝔯 p𝔯oofe whereof let him cauſe them to rehearſe what he hath told them, without regarding his wo𝔯des ſo much as his meaning, which let them declare after their owne manner, as they would ſpeake one to another (fo𝔯 if they ſtudy chiefly to rehearſe his wo𝔯ds, tis a token that their memo𝔯y is better than their vnderſtanding, 𝔈 therefo𝔯e they take the eaſiest way, viʒ. to repeat ſome of the wo𝔯ds, but to let the meaning goe) this vrging of them to attention will cauſe them to bend, and reflect their imaginations vpon it, and to ſeeke out ſome ſemblance, o𝔯 place to illuſtrate, and to giue them light fo𝔯 the ripe conceiuing therof. Fo𝔯 child𝔯en are as vnwilling to buckle themſelues to vnderſtand things, as they that delighting to runne about on pleaſure, loue not to be held to any wo𝔯ke, vnleſſe it be a little fo𝔯 recreation, and when they are weary of other pleaſures (as the moſt delicious things, with continuance are loathſome) to make a pleaſure of idle labour. And child𝔯ē deſire eyther not to learne at all, o𝔯 no mo𝔯e than may ſerue fo𝔯 a recreation, which is in effect {n. p.} iuſt nothing at all.

Therefo𝔯e the maiſter is to inculcate often into them, the neceſsitie, p𝔯ofite, vſe, and end of learning, 𝔈c. as alſo of play, 𝔈c. ſo begetting in them a knowledge, and a conſcience, ſelfe reſtraints, and ſelfe motiues, 𝔈c. Fo𝔯 they know not to what end they were created, 𝔈 bo𝔯ne into the wo𝔯ld, to what end they are put to Schoole, 𝔈c. what the end, and vſe of learning is, 𝔈c. If the Schoole maiſter ſhalt not be mute, but euer filling their heads with theſe things, he ſhall find the ſchollers much mo𝔯e willing to learne, and to p𝔯ofite mo𝔯e than with all rigour and ſeueritie, wherein there is as much difference, as there is betweene him that liueth healthfully by the ſtrenght of nature, and him, that liues dyingly by the ſtrenght of Phiſick. Further marke well what I ſay, of filling their heads alwayes with good fancies. It is a moſt ſpeciall point, of moſt Schoole-maiſters very little regarded. The Parrate is taught to ſpeake by often hearing the ſame wo𝔯ds: and by often whiſtling the ſame notes the Th𝔯uſh is taught to ſing. Euen ſo child𝔯ens minds runne moſt on that, which they daily heare, and ſee, and conſequently their wo𝔯ds, and actions. Alſo experience may teach vs, that when wee are furniſhed with weapons, our minds are alſo vpon euery ſmall occaſion offered, filled with bloudie phantaſies, yea, the very ſight thereof cauſeth ſuch glaunces, will we, nill we, in our phantaſies.

The ſecond thing to be obſerued in nature, that the Scholler may inco𝔯po𝔯ate, and make that his owne, which he learneth, is this. All kindes of creatures haue their particular imaginations, and naturall ſciences, acco𝔯ding to their kinds, but the imaginations, o𝔯 ſciences of mankind are manifold {n. p.} and innumerable. And the reaſon is, becauſe that man ſeeth in himſelfe, all the qualities, and p𝔯operties of euery creature whatſoeuer: and is therefo𝔯e the true Proteus, o𝔯 Vertumnus, that can turne himſelfe into any ſhape, and euery ſhape. And this is the cauſe why ſome Philoſophers thought, that the firſt inuenters of Arts, learned their skill of Beaſts, Fowles, and Fiſhes: as ſpinning of Spiders, physicke of the Swallow, Sto𝔯ke, Hart, Dogge, 𝔈c. muſicke, and building, of By𝔯ds, 𝔈c. And this is the cauſe why that the vulgar people, not knowing well what they ſay, compare one man to a Wolfe, another to a Foxe, another to a Dog, another to a Serpent, 𝔈c. whereas theſe ſo𝔯tes of men, are not ſo comparatiuely, but really: as alſo we find the ſame in holy Scriptures. Now ſome men are wittie, and ſuttle, that is to ſay, can reflect their reaſon vpon themſelues, and playing the Pantomimes, o𝔯 Stage-players, cannot onely couer their owne ſhame (as all ſhould doe) but make an outward ſhew to the wo𝔯ld of the contrarie. Others againe are fooles, and cannot hide their b𝔯utall man. Others are ſhameleſſe dogges, and will not, 𝔈c. But he that is illuminated from aboue, and withall hath a cleare naturall light, as Salomon, 𝔈c. can ſee in himſelfe, and others, all manner of folly, and b𝔯utiſhneſſe 𝔈c, which th𝔯ough the Spirit of mo𝔯tification, lye dead, o𝔯 curbed in him, 𝔈c.

Now to make application. Hereupon it chiefely commeth to paſſe, that child𝔯ens imaginations are variable, vnconſtant, and rowlinge, to and fro inclining them to any b𝔯utiſhnes and follie, vpon euerie occaſion, and alwayes full of trifling fancies, and flieng glances. And as there is a meaſureable {n. p.} fitnes in them fo𝔯 any thing; ſo will they alſo be good fo𝔯 nothing, without gods’ grace, Parents, and Maiſters care, 𝔈c. and all litle enough.

Therefo𝔯e that learning may take roote, 𝔈 imp𝔯eſſiō in them, the Maiſter muſt with great diſcretion and policie d𝔯awe them from this variety and mutabilitie, to a certaine vnifo𝔯mitie, and conſtancie; that that ſeed of learning, 𝔈c. that he ſowes, and implants in them hauing once taken rooting may bee ſerued of the childes nature, viz, vnderſtanding, reaſon, imagination, memo𝔯ie, being d𝔯awne from other obiects, and idle imp𝔯eſſions, cutting of vaine ſuperfluities (which all men naturally are ſubiect vnto) 𝔈 p𝔯eſeruing them from outward contagion of vaine, vitious, 𝔈 idle perſons, by whoſe meanes the potentiall follyes, and vanities of the child are p𝔯oduced into act, and are very hardly curbed againe. Fo𝔯 ſuch perſons are plantato𝔯es, and rigato𝔯es alſo, whoſe poiſons and infections do ſurely take effect; ſeeing that we are naturally decliue to vice and folly, but accliue to vertue and true wiſdome; being like round heauy ſtones that of themſelues runne downe the hill, but with much a doe are rowled vp, as the ſtone of Siſiphus: and as the earth which is p𝔯one to weedes of it owne acco𝔯d but with much toyle, and labour hardly b𝔯ingeth fo𝔯th good fruite, eſpecially if weeds haue once gotten vpper hand.

The maiſter therefo𝔯e that would haue the child p𝔯oſperouſly, and happilie p𝔯oceede in learning, and good manners muſt deuiſe, frame, and fill the Scholars head with witty, and good imaginations, acco𝔯ding to his age, and diſpoſition, I meane with ſimilitudes, compariſons, examples, 𝔈c. recreating them very offten with delightfull fables, {n. p.} and ſto𝔯ies p𝔯ofitable both to learning, and manners. Fo𝔯 child𝔯en are phantaſticall, and as they loue to heare ſuch things, ſo ſhall they heare them in filthy matter, and manner, at one hand o𝔯 other, therefo𝔯e the Maiſter conſidering child𝔯ens diſpoſitions muſt vſe reuokements, and p𝔯euentions aboue all things moſt carefully. Reuokements that when the childe heareth, o𝔯 ſeeth ſuch naughtines, his Maiſters wo𝔯ds and p𝔯emonitions may come into his minde to retract him. P𝔯euention: By furniſhing him, and fraughting him, with theſe Antidotes, wherby he is better armed 𝔈 ſtrengthned againſt outward aſſaults, then with all co𝔯rections, and th𝔯eatnings. Fo𝔯 if nature as we ſee, be ſtrong of her ſelfe, ſhee will with ſmall helpe of Phiſike expell noiſome co𝔯ruptions, and ſpeedily recouer herſelfe. And as the ground that is well manred tilled, and ſowne thicke with co𝔯ne b𝔯ingeth fo𝔯th no weedes, fo𝔯 the co𝔯ne doth ouergrow them, but being thin ſowne it will gather weeds: euen ſo our nature is ſuch like, as it will b𝔯ing fo𝔯th, the one, o𝔯 the other: but weedes it will b𝔯ing fo𝔯th, vice, and fooliſhnes, moſt plentifully, if this o𝔯der afo𝔯eſayde be not taken.

But I now digreſſe into the refo𝔯mation of manners which requires a larger diſcourſe, than a by-digreſſion. Therefo𝔯e I will rety𝔯e, and p𝔯oceede fo𝔯ward from whence I began to digreſſe, whatſoeuer the maiſter teacheth, let the Scholar by perfect vnderſtanding thereof make it his owne (though he remember not all that he learnes) and if it be too hard fo𝔯 him, why ſhould he be taught that, wherof he is not at al, o𝔯 not yet capable? what a foolly is it, and a deſtruction of nature? And what matrice can b𝔯ing fo𝔯th, wherein their is no {n. p.} ſeede: I meane no p𝔯inciples of that art in the Scholar, which the Maiſter teacheth?

Furthermo𝔯e let the maſter marke well without partialitie, whether the Scholar be defectiue in vnderſtanding, and capacitie, o𝔯 he himſelfe in teaching. I my ſelfe haue knowne ſome child𝔯en o𝔯derly, and methodically taught much what acco𝔯ding to this theo𝔯ike with delightfull, and maruelous ſucceſſe, yea almoſt incredible, which afterward by contrarie o𝔯der haue beene beſotted, and haue had as good will to their booke, as a beare to the ſtake. Againe I haue knowne them, that haue beene long confuſedlie, and diſo𝔯derly taught, (as they are in moſt common Schooles) that could neuer be b𝔯ought from fooliſh gabling, to any vnderſtanding at all, till they were b𝔯ought backe to the beginning of the Accidence, and of purpoſe cauſed to fo𝔯get, whatſoeuer they had learned befo𝔯e. Fo𝔯 hauing once gotten an habite of parrating they will not bend their reaſon, and imagination (neither can they) to learne, and vnderſtand diſtinctlie, ſenſibly, and methodicaly.

It behooueth the maiſter therefo𝔯e, not onley to teach truly (as all doe not) but alſo to be the maiſter of that which he teacheth, that is, th𝔯oughly to vnderſtand it, and to be able to make the Scholler app𝔯ehend it, not alwayes after one way, 𝔈 fo𝔯me, as it were, but ſund𝔯ie wayes: and eſpecially, as he ſhall ſee this, o𝔯 that particular Scholler of capacitie and diſpoſition to app𝔯ehend it. Fo𝔯 as all haue not the ſelfe ſame wit numero (as the Logitians ſay) ſo they doe not alike app𝔯ehend and vnderſtand the ſame thing, though their wittes be all good, if the thing haue any difficultie, o𝔯 ambiguity in it, that being ambiguous to one, which is not ſo {n. p.} to another. Fo𝔯 let a man tell but an o𝔯dinary tale, plaine enough, euen to common wits, yet euery one vnderſtandes it not alike, therefo𝔯e in telling it againe, one telles it one way, and an other another way, differing not onely in wo𝔯ds, but alſo in matter, ſome telling it diſtinctly, and ſenſibly: Others confuſedly, and vncertainely, coniecturing rather, than knowing what they heard. Furthermo𝔯e, let ſund𝔯y men looke all vpon one thing at once, the obiect of the eye, namely the colour is the one 𝔈 the ſame in euery eye: but the thing it ſelfe offers ſund𝔯y conceits, and imaginations to euery one of them, therefo𝔯e if any two of them agree in the ſame cōceit, they fall a laughing o𝔯 ſmiling, which p𝔯oceeds from an app𝔯oouing of the conſent.

This is a thing of ſpeciall note in teaching: and it is indeed painefull, if ſo be that a man haue many Schollers, thus to apply himſelfe to euery particular, which were indeed an excellent courſe. Fo𝔯 when the maiſter ſpeaks to all, he is moſt commonly heard of all, that is to ſay, of none in particular: vnleſſe it be of ſome, that is as willing to learne, as he to teach. And this is the P𝔯eachers caſe. Fo𝔯 all in the Church heare him, but few heare him, viʒ. with ſpeciall attention, to make particular application: the reſt ſuppoſing that he ſpeakes not of, o𝔯 to him, o𝔯 him, 𝔈c. but all. And ſo this all, is a certaine Monogrammus, mathematicall, (as I may ſay) o𝔯 imaginarie, and vniuerſall man, and ſo no one of them is bettered by the P𝔯eacher, and therefo𝔯e neyther the all. Theſe haue the Spirite of ſlumber.

Againe if the maiſter ſpeake to one of a fourme, the reſt heare by halfes with idle eares, and wand𝔯ing mindes, relying vpon him that is ſpoken to, {n. p.} that they may learne of him by rote, o𝔯 p𝔯omping, which he receiued vnderſtandingly from the Maſter. In which caſe one is made, as it were the heire, the reſt as yonger b𝔯eth𝔯en: and ſo it happens to them as to yonger b𝔯others.

Few maiſters wilbe at ſuch paines as this, whereof I ſpeake, vnleſſe a good conſcience rather mooue them therevnto, then either the reward, o𝔯 kind conſideration and thankes of the Parents: which fo𝔯 the moſt part are won with the gooſe, and loſt with the feather: o𝔯 being ruſticall ſtand dodgeing, becauſe they p𝔯iʒe learning at no higher rate, than common market-ſtuffe. And who almoſt regardes it, but as it is a meanes, to b𝔯ing bodily p𝔯ofite o𝔯 pleaſurs, as the Epicures held, 𝔈 p𝔯actiſed? This is none of the leaſt cauſes, why that ſchoolmaiſters in ſome Gentlemens houſes are reſpected no mo𝔯e than o𝔯dinarie ſeruing-men 𝔈 leſſe. Yea they will ſay now a dayes, that they reſpect, and reverence learning, but as fo𝔯 the learned hee may goe begge with Homer. Iudge from what ſpirit this p𝔯oceedeth. Surely as it is an eaſie matter in theſe politike, and hartleſſe dayes one to beguile another: ſo is it as eaſie fo𝔯 Sathan to deceiue all, as euer it was, ſeing that men can ſo cunningly and wittily (themſelues not perceiuing their owne harts, and ſpirits) carnaliʒe, and Epicuriʒe both all humaine learning, and diuinitie. Et vt olmi, ſic et nunc ſpiritus volatiles vbique ſuos fatuos Exagitant.

Thus much (corteous Reader) of the true theo𝔯ike and grounds of teachinge. Wherein many queſtions may be demaunded by the vnſkillfull (fo𝔯 to ſatiſfie euery man in euery thing requireth a large treatiſe) and many objections may be made {n. p.} by the captious. As fo𝔯 the fo𝔯mer that are deſirous of helpe in this facultie, but receiue not much from theſe generall, and remote grounds. I entend to w𝔯ite a treatiſe at large, of the p𝔯actiſe of teaching, from the very firſt entrance, till the perfiting of a Scholar fo𝔯 the vniuerſitie, my reaſons of euery particular being d𝔯awne, from this theorike, whereon I ground my p𝔯actiſe.

As fo𝔯 the captious, I anſwer to them, that Sophiſticall and phantaſticall ſpirits, and ſuch as are of contradictious diſpoſitions, are no competent Iudges in thoſe things that are grounded on nature, experience, and vſe: neither are they much to be diſputed withall, becauſe their wiſedome is onely in wo𝔯ds, 𝔈 therefo𝔯e without good iudgement.

Read therefo𝔯e, I p𝔯ay thee, conſider, p𝔯actiſe, and then iudge, and I hope that thou and I ſhall agree in one. If any thing that I haue done miſlike thee, condemne not the wo𝔯ke, but amend the fault, o𝔯 ſay nothing: And when thou thinkeſt, that thou haſt mended it, beware that thou be not diſliked alſo of others. Such is the fo𝔯tune of euery wo𝔯ke, when it is once expoſed to the publike cenſure. Tot ſenſus, quot Capita. But if euery one would, o𝔯 could follow nature their guide, (and not bare reading, and meere imagination) we ſhould all agree in one: fo𝔯 truth is but one: but imaginations, and p𝔯obabilities are infinite, and too much diſcourſing with the phantaſie, is the mother of errour, which whiles that ſome info𝔯ce, and conſtraine, they runne into a Laby𝔯inth, and may ſooner b𝔯eake their wits, then beat out the truth, where it is not.

A Deo, & naturâ, non ex phantaſia, aut more.

Fare-well.

{C}

 

{n. p.}

 

GRAMMAR is the art to ſpeak well. It hath 2. parts, Etymologie, and Syntaxis.

Etymologie, is the fo𝔯mer part of grammar, that declareth the interp𝔯etation, o𝔯 p𝔯operties of wo𝔯des ſeuerally.

A wo𝔯d, is a ſigne, o𝔯 note, whereby we declare the meaning of the minde in naming, o𝔯 calling ſomething.

In a wo𝔯d are to be conſidered the matter, and ſignification, which is the fo𝔯me.

The matter of a wo𝔯d is diuided into letters, and ſyllables.

A letter, is the firſt, and ſimpleſt matter of a wo𝔯d.

The affections of a letter, are P𝔯oſodie, and O𝔯tographie.

P𝔯oſodie is the true p𝔯onunciation thereof, which is perceiued by the power.

O𝔯thographie is the right w𝔯iting thereof, which is perceiued by the fo𝔯me.

 

Of a Vowell.

A Letter is a vowell, o𝔯 a Conſonant.

A vowell is a letter, which may make a ſyllable o𝔯 wo𝔯d of it ſelfe, and without which no ſyllable can be made: therefo𝔯e it is called a Uowell.

It is p𝔯onounced eyther with the mouth open: {C. 2.} 1as, a, e, i, o𝔯 with the mouth ſhut: as, o, u, and the greeke vowell y. They are the fiue degrees from the wideſt opening, to the narroweſt ſhutting of the mouth in ſpeaking.

The affection p𝔯oper to a vowell alone, is aſpiration, o𝔯 b𝔯eathing.

It is b𝔯eathed ſharpely, o𝔯 ſoftly.

The ſharpely b𝔯eathed vowell is ſigned with this Character, o𝔯 note befo𝔯e it (h). Therefo𝔯e ſeeing it is ſet befo𝔯e no Conſonants we rightly p𝔯onounce Hi-ulcus, Hi-accus, Hi-eronymus, Hi-eruſalem, &c.

In latine wo𝔯ds, it is ſometimes ſet after c, as, charus, pulcher, &c.

In greeke wo𝔯ds, after foure Conſonants: as, Rhodus, Thorus, Chorus, Phillis.

The wo𝔯d that is ſoftly b𝔯eathed, wanteth this note: as amo, onus.

 

Of a Conſonant.

A Conſonant is a letter, which maketh a ſound onely with a vowell.

It is ſingle, o𝔯 double.

The ſingle Conſonant is a ſemi-vowell, o𝔯 a mute.

A ſemi-vowell is a conſonant, that hath the halfe ſound of a Uowell.

It is liquid, o𝔯 firme.

The liquid ſemi-vowell is p𝔯onounced with the lips mo𝔯e open, and as it were melteth in ſounding as, l, m, n, r, s.

The firme ſemi-vowell is p𝔯onounced with the lips mo𝔯e d𝔯awne together, and hath an vnchangeable ſound: as j, jod, v, vau: f.

A mute is a Conſonant, which alone doth onely {n. p.} mutter, as it were a certain endeuour to p𝔯onounce, It is open, o𝔯 shut.

The open mute murmureth with the lips open: and that partly in the teeth: as, t, d, partly in the palate: as c, q, g. Note that k hath the ſame ſound with c, and is vtterly vnuſuall in latine wo𝔯ds.

The ſhut mute muttereth in the inner cheekes, the lips being ſhut: as, p, b,

The double Conſonant is made of two Conſonants: as x, z. X, is made of cs, o𝔯 gs, as in crux, 𝔈 frux, which may be perceiued by the genetiue caſes crucis, and frugis.

Z, is made of sd, o𝔯 ſſ in the middle of a wo𝔯d. Note that in what wo𝔯d ſoeuer y, o𝔯 z, is found, the ſame is deriued from the greekes.

I, betweene two vowels is a double Conſonant, as maja, Pompejus.

 

Of Quantitie.

Mo𝔯eouer, the common affection of their fo𝔯me, o𝔯 figure, is the quantitie thereof. In reſpect wherof, they are called Capitall, o𝔯 great letters, and little, o𝔯 ſmall letters. They are in number 25.

The ſmall let. a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, ſ, t, u, x, y, z, & jod, vau.

The great let. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, V, X, Y, Z.

Note.

Great letters are vſed, firſt in the beginning of Uerſes, periods, and p𝔯oper names.

Secondly, being ſet alone, they ſignifie a fo𝔯ename (which we call our Ch𝔯iſtian name) and a ſurname, ſome title of office, o𝔯 dignitie, ſomething of ſpeciall note: and alſo numbers. {C. 3.}

 

Names.

A. Aulus.

P. C. Patres conſcripti.

C. Caius.

Q. Quintus, Quæſtor,

Cn. Cneus. (fo𝔯 Cons.

Quirites.

Cos. Conſul.aphæreſis,

Res. Reſpub. reſpublica.

Coſſ. Conſules.

Sp. Spurius.

D. Decius.

Sex. Sextus.

Deus Opt. Max. optimus, maximus.

S.P.Q.R. Senatus, Populúſque Romanus.

G. Gaius.

T.C. Tua clementia.

L. Lucius.

Sc. Senatuſconſultum.

M. Marcus.

Q.B.F. ſ. quod bonum,

P. Publius.

fælix, fauſtumque ſit.

Ms. manuſcriptus.

 

Hs. millies millia ſeſtertiorum.

 

P.R. Populus Romanus.

 

 

Numbers.

I.

1.

LX.

60.

II.

2.

LXX.

70.

III.

3.

LXXX.

80.

IIII.

4.

XC.

90.

V.

5.

C.

100.

VI.

6.

CC.

200.

VII.

7.

CCC.

300.

VIII.

8.

CCCC.

400.

IX.

9.

D.

500.

X.

10.

DC.

600.

XI.

11.

DCC.

700.

XX.

20.

DCCC.

800.

XXX.

30.

DCCCC.

900.

XL.

40.

M.

1000.

L.

50.

 

 

{n. p.}

 

Thus farre of the true p𝔯onunciation, and right w𝔯iting of a letter.

Of a Syllable.

A Syllable is a full, and perfect ſound in a wo𝔯d.

It is made of one letter, o𝔯 mo𝔯e.

A Syllable of one letter is euery vowell, a, e, i, o, u, and y, monophthongues.

A Syllable of mo𝔯e letters, is made either of two vowels, o𝔯 of a vowell, and conſonant mixt togeather.

The Syllable made of two vowels is called a diphthongue, i. the ſound of two vowels in one Syllable.

There be fiue diphthongues: æ, au, œ, ei, eu, as, ætas, audio, cœlum, hei, euge.

The Syllable mixt of a vowell and conſonant, may conteine diuerſe letters: as, ars, mars, ſtans ſcrobs, ſtirps.

 

OF Compoſition.

The affections of a Syllable are compoſition, o𝔯 ſpelling, and p𝔯onounciation.

Compoſition, is whereby they are rightly ſpelled. o𝔯 ſet togeather. Firſt, thoſe Conſonants muſt be, ioyned togeather in the middle of a ſimple wo𝔯d, which ought to be ioyned in the beginning of a wo𝔯d.

 

bd

A-bdomen.

gm.

A-gmen

becauſe we ſay,

ct

San-ctus.

gn.

I-gnis.

Bdelliū Cteſiphō

pſ

Scri-pſi.

mn

O-mnis.

Pſittacus, Scamnum,

ſc

Pi-ſcis.

st.

Ve-ster.

Tlepolemus, gnarus,

tn

Æ-tna.

pt.

Pro-pter

ſtruma, Xantippus.

tl

A-tlas.

xi. &

Di-xi. &c

 

Secondlie, if in a ſimple wo𝔯d of two Syllabels {C. 4.} the fo𝔯mer end in a conſonant, the latter ſhall begin with a conſonant: as, Gal-lus &c.

Thirdly, if the latter ſhall begin with a vowell, the fo𝔯mer ſhall end in a vowell: as, Deus, pius.

Fourthly, if a conſonant be in the middle, it ſhalbe referred to the Syllable following: as, pa-ter.

S, is not w𝔯itten after x, becauſe it is included in x, as, excribo, ecſcribo.

 

Of Euphonie.

PRonounciation,2 is whereby Syllables are rightly p𝔯onounced.

It ſtands in Euphonie, and Meaſure.

Euphonie is, whereby certaine p𝔯epoſitions in compound wo𝔯ds, are ſmoothly, and diſtinctly p𝔯onounced, and w𝔯itten acco𝔯dingly.

 

Smoothly.

 

Harſhly.

Diſtinctly.

 

Indiſtinctly.

Occurro.

 

Obcuro.

Abſtineo.

 

Auſtineo.

Officio.

rather

Obficio

Obtineo.

 

Ottineo.

Aufero.

then.

Abfero.

Obrepo.

not

Orrepo.

Affero.

 

Adfero.

 

 

 

Effero.

 

Exfero.

 

 

 

 

And fo𝔯 diſtinct p𝔯onounciation ſake, conſonants are ſometimes intermixed: as, redamo, redeo, ambigo, ambio: not reamo, reeo, &c.

Contrariwiſe, the p𝔯epoſition con, comming befo𝔯e a vowell looſeth, n: as, coerceo, coinquino, cooperio.

 

Of Time, or Quantitie.

MEaſure is whereby ſyllables in their p𝔯onounciation are meaſured. It is Time, o𝔯 Tone.

Time, is the holding out of a Syllable in the p𝔯onounciation thereof.

In regard of time, a Syllable is ſho𝔯t, o𝔯 long.

A ſho𝔯t ſyllable conſiſteth of one time, 𝔈 if need be, it is noted ouer the vowell thus, Dĕus, mĕus. {n. p.}

A ſho𝔯t Syllable is.

I. one vowell befo𝔯e another in the ſame wo𝔯d: as dĕus, pĭus.

II. a, e, y, in the end of a wo𝔯d: as, muſă, retĕ, moly̆.

III. Euery vowell befo𝔯e theſe letters, r, l, t, d, m, b, in the end of a wo𝔯d.

IIII. i, and u, befo𝔯e s, in the end of a wo𝔯d: as triſtĭs, bonŭs.

A long Syllable conſiſteth of two times, and is thus marked, (-) mūſa.

A Syllable is long by nature, o𝔯 by poſition.

The Syllable long by nature, is.

I. Euery Dipthongue, as, aūdio.

II. i, and u, in the end of a wo𝔯d: as veni, manu.

III. Euery vowell befo𝔯e n, and c, in the end of a wo𝔯d: as titan, ſplen, Delphin, hac, illac, &c.

IIII. a. e, o, befo𝔯e s, in the end of a wo𝔯d: as, amas, doces, nepos.

A Syllable is long by poſition.

I. When a vowell commeth befo𝔯e two conſonants in the ſame wo𝔯d.

II. When it commeth befo𝔯e a dooble conſonant, as, pax, gaza, Maja.

III. When a vowell commeth befo𝔯e two conſonants in diuerſe wo𝔯ds: as, Major Sum, quām cui poſſit fortûna nocere.

IIII. A ſho𝔯t vowell befo𝔯e a mute, and a liquid following is in verſe common: as, patris, volucris, cerebrū, Hibla. But if the vowell be long, it remaineth ſo: as, arātrū, Simulāchrū.

V. o, in the end of a wo𝔯d is comon: as homo, amo: But in wo𝔯ds of one Syllable it is long: as, ô, ſtô, flô.

 

The Affections of Quantitie. {n. p.}

THe Affections of Quantitie, are Syſtole, and diaſtole.

Syſtole, is when a long Syllable is made ſho𝔯t in meeter: as, Verg. Conūbio jungam ſtabili. &c.

Diaſtole, is when a ſho𝔯t Syllable is made long: as verg, Excercet Dĭana choros, &c.

 

The quantitie of Syllables is full expreſſed in theſe rules following.

 

De primis, & medijs, Syllabis.

Vocalis præiens aliam, breuis eſto Latinis.

Tardant vocales alias, alias a breuiantque.

Produc b dipthongũ, quoque cũ poſitura.

Præ muta, & liquida breue ſi vocale ſit anceps.

Ei longábis quintæ, quando immediate.

I præit, at breuis (vt fidei) ſi conſona præſit.

Fio cum ductis tarda c r, e, m comitentur.

Eheu produces, communis redditur o hæ.

Arbitrio breuis aut longus genetiuus in íus:

Alterius breuis eſt, ſed produc ſemper alius.

Tardat vocales d i, conſona ſe præiuntes.

Primæ menſuram e vox derivata ſequatur.

Simplicis & legem verbi f compoſta ſequntur.

Sẽper corripies, ab, ad, in, re, per, ob, ſuper & ſub

A tarda g c, de, di, præ, ſe, pro, Latiumque.

Ɛſt pro breue in fugio, cello, fanoque, nepoſque.

Ɛt fateor, fundus, pago, ſectoque profari.

Iunge h propheta, propino, protervus, ſic proficiſcor

Incurro, fundo, pello, pulſo, variatur. {n. p.}

Præteritum produc diſſyllabon, atque ſupinum.

Tolle bibit, ſcidit, atque fudit, tulit, ortaque do, sto.

Sic datum, itumȜ ſtatũȜ, ſatũq́Ȝ, ratumq́Ȝ, quitũq́Ȝ.

Adde ſitumque, citumȜ, litumque, rutumȜ ſupina

Præterito gemino breuis eſt prima, atque ſecunda.

Fuſte cecīdit eos dices tamen, atque pepēdit.

k I, vel o compoſiti partem finire priorem

Si videas breuia, velut armiger, orthographoſque.

Nomen in obliquis quantum ſit, flectio monſtrat.

His Adiectiuis penultima ſit tibi longa,

Icus, et alis, jungas aris, & orus, & oſus,

Atus, & itus, & utus, & ivus, & anus, & enus,

Queis addas l inus, niſi ſignat m materiale.

A verbi produc creſcentis, ſed dare deme.

n Ɛ produc, niſi præ, rim, ram, ro, queis bĕris adde.

Eſt i breuis niſi ſit præſens o quartæ ſed et ĭui.

Sed tibi pluralis dat p venimus, īuimus atque.

q Sum, volo, dant imus ſubiuncto, rimus, & anceps.

r O ſemper produc s ſumus, & volumus breuiato.

 

De vltimis Syllabis. (quintus.

Tarda 3a, Non quiă, pută, ită. a Rectus, quartus, ă,

In gintā numerus longus, quandoque fit anceps.

4B breue. C tarda. Non lăc, nec, Donec. At hic, fac.

Neutrũ hoc non b ſexti: tibi ſint communia cuncta.

De breue, t, e. Non c me, te, ſe. Non d u: cætera rapta.

5Verborum juga, ſi jubeant, procuce e ſecunda.

Nominibus (docte vt) produc aduerbia ducta.

Hæc tria, ritĕ tamen, benè, cum male f corripiantur. {n. p.}

g Quintſextum produc, hodieque, dieque, fideque.

6I tarda, (quaſi, nec niſi) ibi mihi, vbi, tibi, et anceps.

Et h vocat et dat i, græca, breue os ſibi dans genetiuo.

Corripias 7l, ſol. Non ſāl, nil, longa & i Hebræa. (ās

k Ɛſt breuis on, breuis in, breuis an, ſi eſt rectus ă, non

Tarda 8n. Non forſan, tamen, attamen, an, ſubin, in, l

Quæ per īnis creſcunt, genetiuo corripiuntur. (men.

O dubia: obliquis tarda: modò, quo modo nunquam.9

m Vix citò, ego, ambo, duo. Crebrò, ſerò, ſedulo, n neutra

10R breue. Non far, nar, ver, fur, cur, o parȜ, crater, lar.

Graja in up p longa: Pater, & q mater breviato.

Græcum dos gignens as (pallas Pallados) eſto.

11Correptum. r Accuſans creſcens pluralis in aſque.

Omnia in as ſunto, ſi ſint, producta, latina.

12Es tarda. Brevis est graviter creſcens genetiuo.

Deme ariēs, abiēs, parieſque, Ceres, s pes, orta et,

Es cum compoſitis, prodĕs, potĕs, adde penĕſque.

t Græcorum neutra, u & pluralia in es breviato.

13Is breue. Pluralis caſus non corripe x curvos.

Is quoque longabis, ſi gignens creſcit acutè.

14 y Eis producatur dipthongus græca, latina.

15 Is, quis, z bis breve: Cætera ſed monoſyllaba produc.

Tarda a verba is, quæ faciunt pluralia in ĩtis.

16 Os tarda; Haud impos, b compos, græcũ & per o paruũ

Vs breve: non monoſyllaba, nec ſi creſcat c acutè.

17Flectio contracta ũs dat, non d rectus, nec e vocativus.

18Græcula in oũs finita ſient producta, Melampũs.

19 V ſemper tarda. Tibi lectio cætera monſtret. {n. p.}

 

Scholia.

a20 Græci. b niſi ſequente vocali. c vt fierem, fieri. d vt major, pejor. e21 At vōcis, lēgis, regis, ſedes, jumentum, fomes, jucundus, junior, mobilis, humanus, vomer, pedor, a brevibus fiunt longæ. Contrà, dŭcis, dicax, fides, ărena, ăriſta, pŏſui, gĕnui, frăgor, frăgilis, nŏto, as, diſertus, ſŏpor, a longis fiunt breves. f22 At innŭba, pronŭba, a nūbo. Dejĕro, pejĕro, a jūro. g23 Excipe dĭrimo, dĭſertus. h24 niſi ſequente vocali: vt, vnda dehiſcens, ſudibuſque præuſtis. i25 Græca per o parvum. k26 Quotidie, et quotidianus variant. Sed ibīdem, tibīcen, fidīcen, vbique, homicida, geometra, meridies, Theophilus, orthodoxus. Scilicet, ſiquidem, quantilibet, quantivis, l27 præter diutinus, craſtinus, priſtinus, perendinus, hornotinus, ſerotinus. m28 cedrĭnus, fagĭnus, Chryſtallĭnus, myrrhĭnus, &c. n29 Excipitur tertia coniugatio, niſi in rēris, & rēre imperfecto paſſivo opt. o30 vt audīs, audītius, audītis. p31 Penultima pluralis ſemper corripitur in omnibus. q32 vt ſīmus, velīmus. r33 O incremento verborum producitur, s verô corripitur. Penultima nominum in al, do, go, ela, ile, imen, trīmus producuntur, ſed intĭmus corripiuntur. Excipe anĭmal, putĕal. Sic nomina in ītius corripiuntur. Item verba in ŭrio, præterprūrio, ſcatūrio. Antepenult. Nominum in ībilis longatur: vt, audibilis.

A34 Nominativus, acc. Voc. In a: præter vocat. Græcorum. B35 Nā hoc ablativi eſt longa. C nec vlla monoſyllaba præter quĕ, nĕ, vĕ enclyticas. D36 Græca in e, vt, Anchiſē, phæbē, Tempē. E37 vt docē, mouē, cavē. F38 Sic magĕ. G Ablat. ſecundæ impariſſ. H vt Pallas, palladŏs, dĭ. Sic Phyllidĭ, &c. voc. Amaryllĭ, Alexĭ, Daphnĭ, &c. i39 Vt Michael, Daniel, &c. k vt Ilion (per o parvum) pylion, Alexin, Ity̆n, Ægină, Æginăn, {n. p.} Ænæas, Ænæān, &c. l40 Et omnia, quæ per apocopen caſtrantur. M41 Item et homo, vix leguntur producta. N42 Sic mutuo, ſunt communia. O ſic compoſita compar, impar. &c. p43 vt aēr, æther, ſoter, charactēr. Q44 apud latinos. R vt, Heroăs, phyllidăs, &c. s vt compes, præpes. T45 vt hippomanes. U vt Naidĕs, Cyclopĕs, &c. x46 Dativum, & Ablat. Y Simoeis, omneis, parteis, &c. ɀ47 Bīs tamen apud Ovid.

48A Audis, velis, dederis. B Sicŏs oſſis. C vt tellus, ſalus, &c. 49d e Singularis numeri.

 

Of Tone.

Tone, is the tuninge, o𝔯 accenting of a Syllable.

It is ſimple, o𝔯 mixt.

The ſimple is either ſharpe, o𝔯 flat, called acute, and graue.

The ſharpe is accented with a riſing voyce, and it is thus noted ( ́ )

The flat is accented with a falling voice, and is thus marked ( ̀ )

The mixt is accented with both voices. It is called of the Grammarians the circumflexe: But of the Muſitians, a fall. It is thus marked ( ˆ )

 

Of the ſharpe Tone.

The ſharpe tone accenteth wo𝔯ds of one Syllable whether they be ſho𝔯t, as. Mél, fél, o𝔯 long by poſition: as, párs, páx.

Secondly, in wo𝔯ds of two Syllables, the fo𝔯mer not being long by nature, is ſharpened: as cítus, látus, ſólers, ſátur,

Thirdly in wo𝔯ds, of many Syllables, the laſt but one, if it be long is ſharpened: as Libértas penátes, otherwiſe the last but two: as dóminus, póntifex, áffatim, muliéris, cáthédra, mediocris. {n. p.}

Except compounds of fácio: as, benefácis, malefácis, calefácit, frigefácit: And compounds of fís, and fít are ſharpened in the laſt: as, benefít, ſatifít.

Note that doubtfull Syllables in verſe doe follow the Law of the verſe: as, pictæque volúcres.

 

Of the flat Tone.

The flatt accent is neuer exp𝔯eſſed but in the laſt Syllable, to diſtinguish wo𝔯ds: as, triſtè. cùm. It is called the Syllabicall accent, becauſe it is vnderſtood in euery Syllable that is not ſharpened, o𝔯 circumflect, and they are p𝔯onounced with the ſame tenour of the voyce, as, Gratiànopolitanôrum.

 

Of the Circumflexe.

WO𝔯ds of one Syllable being long by nature are circumflect: as, ſpês, flôs, rûs, mûs.

Secondly in wo𝔯ds of two, o𝔯 of many Syllables the laſt but one is circumflect if it be long by nature, and the later ſho𝔯t: as, Lûna, mûſa, mâter, Rôma, amauêre, ſcripſêre: other wiſe it is sharpened as, népos, amauérunt, Scripſérunt: fo𝔯 one long Syllable befo𝔯e another, is neuer circumflect.

 

Note.

NO Syllable is circumflect, ſauing the laſt but one.

None but ſome one of the th𝔯ee laſt Syllables in a wo𝔯d is accented.

 

Of the Affection of Tone.

THe affection of tone, is the changing, and remoouing of it, from the p𝔯oper Syllable to another, and that by ſeauen meanes. {n. p.}

1. By diſtinction, the laſt Syllables of explannatiues are accented with the ſharpe tone, thereby to diſtinguiſh them from ſignificatiues: as vná, eó, quó, continuó, nequá, ſiquá, feré, plané, putá, poné, circúm, aliás, ergó, a coniunction, but ergô, fo𝔯 cauſa is circumflect, as, Virg. Illius ergô, venimus, and many others, which in the end of a ſentence are ſharpened, but in the conſequence, o𝔯 context of a ſpeach are flatt.

2. By Compoſition, the accent is changed, that the compoſition may be diſcerned, therby: as, Déinde próinde, alíquando, húcvſque, àlonge, déinceps, quàpropter, ádmodum, intereáloci, háctenus, &c. otherwiſe the accent is not changed: as dénique, vtique, itaque, vúdique, híccine, &c. But vbîque, & ubîuis are excepted.

3. By Tranſpoſition, p𝔯epoſitions being ſet after their caſuall wo𝔯ds are flatt: as, tranſtra pèr, te penès.

4. By Attraction, the coniunctions que, ne, ve, dum, ſis, nam, and the p𝔯epoſition cum, d𝔯aw the accent to the Sylable next befo𝔯e them, and ſharpen it: as Luminàque, hominéſue, adèſdum, mécum.

5. By interrogation, the accent is remooued to the laſt Syllable: as, Egoné? Quis furor ô civés?

6. By Aphæreſis, the accent is changed: fo𝔯 ſuch wo𝔯ds retain the accent of the whole wo𝔯d: as, Vergíli valéri, Ingèni, Mercúri, fo𝔯 Vergílij, &c. o𝔯 circumflect the laſt Syllable being contracted: as Arpinâs, Rauennâs, noſtrâs, veſtrâs, cuiâs, of Arpinâtis &c. their p𝔯oper Nominatiues. Donec, of donecum hûc, ilûc, iſtûc, &c. fo𝔯 hucce, illucce, &c. And compounds of dîc, duc, & fac, as benedîc, redûc, calefâc.

7. By Idióma, when wo𝔯ds of other tongues: do {n. p.} retaine their owne accents being vſed in the Latine tongue: as Simóeis, Períphas, georgicà, bucolicà, comædía, tragedía, Symphonía: which being made Latine wo𝔯ds, do receiue the Latine accent: as, Símois, périphas, geórgica, bucólica, tragédia, Symphónia, &c. And it is the beſt in bo𝔯rowed wo𝔯ds to vſe the Latine accent.

The matter of a wo𝔯d is interp𝔯eted: ſignification followeth.

 

Of a Noune Substantiue.

A Wo𝔯d in regard of ſignification, is ſiggnificatiue, o𝔯 Explanatiue.

The ſignificatiue wo𝔯d ſerueth p𝔯incipally to ſignifie.

It is either a Noune, o𝔯 a Uerbe.

The Noune is Reall, o𝔯 Perſonall.

 

A Noune, is the name of a thing, that may be ſeene, felt, heard, o𝔯 vnderſtood: as, manus, a hand, domus, a houſe, bonitas, goodnes.

Of Nounes, ſome be Subſtantiues, ſome be Adiectiues.

A Noune Subſtantiue, is that which may ſtand alone in reaſon, o𝔯 ſignification, without another wo𝔯d ioyned to it. And it is ſo called, becauſe it ſtandeth by it ſelfe, and Suſteineth other wo𝔯ds, which cannot ſtand without it: as, Liber, a booke. Liber magnus, a great booke, Liber legitur, a booke is read.

Of Subſtantiues, ſome are Abſolute, ſome are Participles.

The Abſolute Subſtantiue is p𝔯oper, o𝔯 common. {D}

A Subſtantiue p𝔯oper, is a name p𝔯oper to the thing, which it ſignifieth: as, Petrus, Iohannes, Rhadulphus, Egidius.

The Subſtantiue common, (which is alſo called appellatiue) is a name common to many things: as, homo, lapis, iuſtitia pietas.

 

Of the Accidents of a Noune Sub.

SIxe Accidents, o𝔯 p𝔯operties befall a Subſtantiue, viʒ. Notation Nomber, caſe, declenſion, gender, compariſon.

In regard of theſe p𝔯operties, a Noune is Homoclyte, or Heteroclyte.

Homoclyte, is when they doe euenly, o𝔯 regularly agree to their Noune.

 

Of Kinde.

Notation, is kinde, o𝔯 figure.

Kinde ſheweth the o𝔯iginall, o𝔯 nature of a wo𝔯d.

It is P𝔯imitiue, o𝔯 deriuatiue.

P𝔯imitiue hath the o𝔯iginall, o𝔯 beginning of it ſelfe, as, picus, grex, turba, ſibilus, tintinnabulū, clangor, &c.

Deriuatiue is made of the P𝔯imitiue. It is Nominall, o𝔯 Uerball.

The Nominall deriuatiue is made of a Noune:

And it is Patronimicall, o𝔯 Diminutiue.

 

Of the Patronymike.

THe Patronymike is deriued from the father, grandfather, o𝔯 ſome other perſon of the familie, o𝔯 ſtocke: as,

Æacides,

The grand-child of Æacus, i. Achilles.

Pelides,

The ſon of Peleus, i. Achilles.

Atrides,

The ſon of Atreus, i. Agamemnon, or Menelaus. {n. p.}

 

Latoïdes,

Son of Latona, i. Apollo.

Nerine,

Daughter o𝔯 Neece of Nereus.

Menelaïs,

Wife of Menelaus, i. Hellen.

 

Of Diminution.

A Diminutiue is that, which ſignifieth the Deminiſhing o𝔯 leſſening of the ſignification of the P𝔯imitiue: It is vſed fo𝔯 flatterie, mockage, o𝔯 pitty vſually.

A Diminutiue is made of the

Nominatiue caſe by

changing

us, into

leus,

as equus, equuleus, acus, aculeus. Servulus, graculus, of gracus, regulus of rex, adoleſcentulus, lununa, of luna, animula, aquula, ſylvula, menſula, literula, furcula, capitulum of caput.

 

 

ulus,

ula,

ulum,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

aſter,

Antoniaſter, Surdaſter, paraſitaſter, poëtaſter, grammaticaſter. but they are little in vſe

 

 

 

x, into

culus,

la, lum,

Dicax, dicaculus, fax, facula- fornacula, ceruicula, but ſenex, ſenecio.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

o, into

unculus,

la, lum,

Homunculus, (but fur furunculus) Latrunculus, carbunculus, tyrunculus, offenſiuncula, ratiuncula, virguncula, but homulus, & ardea, ardelio.

 

 

 

 

 

Aſinus, na: aſellus, la: gemellus, a, um: Bouus bellus agnellus, pugnus, pugillus: vnus, vllus: vinum, villum: catella, columella, & columnella: ſignum, ſigillum, ſcamnum ſcabellum: ſcutum, ſcutella, rana, ranunculus; anguis, anguilla: ager, agellus, cultellus, libellus, puellus, la: libra libella: vmbra, vmbella, ſacrum, ſacellum: lucrum, lucellum; flabellum, popullus, popellus: catulus, catellus, paululus, 𝔈 pauxillus: codicillus, codiculus of codex: fabella, & fabellula, tabella, tantus, tantillus, velum,vexillum. {D. 2.}

 

 

 

nus, a, ũ

llus,

 

 

 

er, ra, ũ

lus, a, ũ

into

lla,

llũ,

 

 

Adding to it

 

culus,

la, lum,

Flos floſculus, mas maſculus muſculus, corculum, ruſculū, munuſculum, corpuſculum, opuſculum, lepuſculus, fraterculus, paterculus, amatorculus, muliercula, matercula, ſororcula -

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dat. by adding to

o

olus,

la, lum,

Of filio filiolus, ſo Tulliolus, alveolus, capreolus of capro: filiola, Tulliola, negotiolum, palliolum.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

i

culus, la, lum.

Igni, igniculus, dulci dulcicolus, api, apicula, navicula, cuticula, ceniculus, la: particula, fonticulus, monticulus, ponticulus, lenti lenticula.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A wo𝔯d in üi looſeth u: as artui, articulus: verſui, verſiculus: ſo curriculum, geniculum, corniculum, domus domuncula, and domicilium.

Of the

Ablatiue caſe by adding to ē, cula: as Res, rēcula: ſpes, ſpecula, vulpes, vulpecula: nubes, nubecula: dies, diecula: but merces, mercedula. Many haue onely a ſhew of Deminutiues. as baculus, vitulus, vitula, tabula, fabula, rabula, monedula, catulus, cuniculus, periculum, &c.

 

Of the verball.

 

Gerundiue by

Changing, ans, and ens into antia, entia, and alſo entiũ: as témperantia, patientia, ſilentiũ, &c. whereof the engliſh wo𝔯ds, temperance, patience, 𝔈c.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

putting away the verbs ſignifying, action 𝔈 appoſition of the articles.

Maſculine: as oriens, occidens, profluens, confluens.

 

Fæminine: as, conſonans, continens, animans.

 

Neuter: as, contingens, accidens, antecedeus, conſequeus, and animans alſo.

 

Common: as, appeteus, ſitiens, diligens, indulgens s, is changed into t. Engliſh. {n. p.}

A verbally made of the

 

 

Supinall,

Actiue, by changing rus, into ra: as, liturus, whereof litera, flexura, armatura, natura, ctura, cultura, curvatura, &c. A is changed in Engliſh.

 

 

 

 

tio,

 

curatio

 

 

 

 

ſio,

of the action

aſperſio

 

 

 

 

xio

 

conexio

 

 

 

 

which by adding n made engliſh wo𝔯ds.

 

 

 

 

Tor, trix

 

rector, trix

 

 

changing

tus

 

Sor,

of the doer

menſor

 

 

 

ſus

into

Xor,

 

 

 

 

 

xus

 

which are made engliſh changing or into our.

 

 

 

 

trum,

aratrum, ſpectrum

 

 

 

 

chrum,

mulacrum, lauachrum,

 

 

 

 

men,

hortamẽ, volumẽ,

 

 

 

 

mentũ

lamẽtũ ligamentum.

 

paſſiue by

Putting away the ſignification of the verb and appoſition of the article Maſculine: as viſi and, itus, tactus, flexus, which are all of the declenſion contract.

 

Note.

THoſe Supinals of the firſt coniugation, that end in itus, o𝔯 in ctus, doe fo𝔯me their nounes in atio: as, vetitus, vetatio, præſtatio, cubatio, domatio, ſonatio, crepatio, juvatio, tonatio, fricatio, &c. but ſectio is mo𝔯e in vſe, than ſecatio. But domitor, adjutor, ſector.

 

Of Figure.

FIgure ſheweth, whether a Subſtantiue be ſimple, o𝔯 compound. Simple: as, rector. Compound: as Corrector, fideiuſſio. To which may be added the decompound: as, inconſtantia, irreverentia. {D 3}

 

Of Number.

NUmber is Singular, o𝔯 plurall.

The Singular ſignifieth one thing alone: as, lapis, a ſtone.

The Plurall ſignifieth mo𝔯e than one: as, lapides, ſtones.

 

Of Caſe.

50CAſe is, whereby a noune falleth into diuerſe conſtructions.

It is abſolute, o𝔯 oblique.

The abſolute is, whereby a thing is abſolutely named, without dependence on other wo𝔯ds: therefo𝔯e tis called the Nominatiue, o𝔯 right caſe.

51The oblique is, whereby a thing is obliquely named, acco𝔯ding to his depẽdence on other wo𝔯ds, which is by fiue wayes: ſo that there are fiue oblique caſes: the Genetiue, Datiue, Accuſatiue, Uocatiue, Ablatiue.

 

The Caſes are thus knowne.

The Nominatiue caſe commeth immediately befo𝔯e the Uerbe, and anſwereth to the queſtion Who, o𝔯 What: as, magiſter docet.

The Genetiue is gouerned, and ſignifieth of Whom, o𝔯 what a thing is: as, Doctrina magiſtri. Of is his ſigne.

The Datiue caſe is gouerned, and ſignifieth to Whom, o𝔯 to What, a thing is: as, Do librum magiſtro. To is his ſigne.

The Accuſatiue followeth the Uerbe, whoſe action immediately paſſeth into it, and it ſignifieth Whom, o𝔯 What: as, Amo magiſtrum.

The Uocatiue caſe is gouerned, and is knowne by calling, o𝔯 ſpeaking to: as, ô magister. {n. p.}

The Ablatiue caſe is gouerned, and ſignifieth from whom, o𝔯 what a thing is. It is knowne eyther by p𝔯epoſitions ſeruing to it: as, De magiſtro, coram magiſtro: o𝔯 by theſe ſignes, In, With, Through For, From, 𝔈 alſo, by o𝔯 than after the comparatiue degree.

 

Of Declenſon.

DEclenſon, is the varying of a Nowne acco𝔯ding to caſe.

It is ſimple, o𝔯 contract.

The ſimple is Pariſyllable, o𝔯 Impariſyllable.

The Pariſyllable declenſon is, whoſe Genetiue ſingular, fo𝔯 the moſt part, and Datiue plurall, is alwaies of euen ſyllables with the nominatiue ſingular: and it is double.

 

THe firſt declēſon pariſyllable is, when the Nominatiue, Uocatiue, and Ablatiue ſingular end in a, the genetiue, and datiue in æ diphthongue, the Accuſatiue in am: the Nominatiue and Uocatiue plurall in æ diphthongue, the Genetiue in arum, the Datiue, and Ablatiue in is, the Accuſatiue in as: as in example.

 

Singulariter.

Nominativo,

muſa

Pluraliter.

Nominativo,

muſæ

Genetivo,

muſæ

Genetivo,

muſarum

Dativo,

muſæ

Dativo,

muſis

Accuſativo,

muſam

Accuſativo,

muſas

Vocativo, ô

muſa

Vocativo ô

muſæ

Ablativo,

muſa

Ablativo,

muſis

Note.

Note that filia, and Nata doe end in is, o𝔯 in abus in the Datiue, and Ablatiue plurall: but dea, mula, {D 4} equa, liberta, anima, ambæ, duæ, doe end in abus onely.

By Helleniſmus, the Genetiue ſingular imitateth the Greekes: as, paterfamilias, materfamilias, filiusfamilias, vſuall. Dux ipſe vias. En. filius latonas, liv. Andcon. Filij terras, Nev. Nec auras, nec ſonitus memor, verg. vnuſuall.

By Archaiſmus, were vſed aulai, pictai, bellai, fo𝔯 aulæ, pictæ, belli, 𝔈c.

The genetiue plurall is vſually contracted by Syncope: as, Grajugenûm, Ænæadûm, fo𝔯 Grajugenarum, Ænæadarum.

 

THe ſecond declenſon pariſyllable is, when the Nominatiue, and Uocatiue ſingular end in er, ir, us, um, the genetiue in i, the datiue and ablatiue in o, the Accuſatiue in um: The nominatiue, and vocatiue plurall in i, the genetiue in ôrum, the datiue and ablatiue in is, the accuſatiue in os: as in example.

 

Singulariter.

Nominativo,

magiſter.

Pluraliter.

Nominat.

magiſtri

Genetivo,

magiſtri.

Gene.

magiſtrorũ

Dativo,

magiſtro.

Datiuo,

magiſtris

Accuſativo,

magiſtrum.

Accuſ.

magiſtros

Vocativo, ô

magiſter.

Vocat. ô

magiſtri

Ablativo,

magistro.

Ablat.

magiſtris

 

Note.

WHen the nominatiue endeth in us, the vocatiue endeth in e: as, Dominus domine. Except deus, ô deus: and filius, fili, meus, mi, genius, geni. Alſo agnus, lucus, vulgus, populus, chorus, fluvius, end in e, o𝔯 us: as agne, and agnus, 𝔈c.

Alſo all Nounes of what declenſon ſoeuer, being {n. p.} neuters, haue the Nominatiue, Accuſatiue, and Uocatiue like in both nombers, and in the plurall they end all in a: as in example.

 

Singulariter.

Nomin.

regnum

Pluraliter.

Nominatiuo.

regna

Genit.

regni

Genetiuo

regnorum

Datiuo

regno

Datiuo

regnis

Accuſ.

regnum

Accuſ.

regna

Voc. ô

regnum

Vocatiuo

regna

Abl. ab hoc 

regno

Ablat.

regnis.

 

Except Ambo and Duo, which make the Neuter gender in o, and are thus declined

Pluraliter

Nominatiuo Ambo, ambæ, ambo

Genitiuo Amborum, ambarum, amborum

Datiuo Ambobus, ambabus, ambobus

Accuſatiuo Ambos, ambas, ambo

Vocatiuo Ambo, ambæ, ambo

Abl. Ambobus, ambabus, ambobus. Likewiſe duo, duæ, duo.

The Genetiue plurall is often contracted by Syncope: as, deûm, fo𝔯 deôrum, virûm, fo𝔯 virôrum.

Some Nounes of this declenſon do increaſe. vir with his compounds, Duûmvir, triumvir, decemvir, centumvir, levir, ſo, ſocer, gener, adulter, puer, preſbyter, iber, & iberus And adiectiues, aſper exter, liber, miſer, tener, dexter, gibber, proſper, & proſperus. Cæterus, & puerus haue bene in vſe. To theſe adde the compounds of gero, & fero, as, armiger, ſignifer, &c.

The Declenſon Impariſyllable, is, whoſe Genetiue ſingular fo𝔯 the moſt part, and Datiue plural is alwayes of vneuen Syllables, with the Nominatiue ſingular: And it is dooble. {n. p.}

 

THE firſt declenſon Impariſyllable, is when the Nominatiue, and Uocatiue ſing. do end in c, d, e, o, l, n, r, s, t, x, the Genetiue in is, the Datiue in i, the Accuſatiue in em and ſometime in im, the Ablatiue in e, o𝔯 in i, o𝔯 in both: the Nominatiue Accuſatiue, and Uocatiue plurall in es, the Genetiue in um, and ſometime in ïum, the Datiue, and Ablatiue in bus: as, in example.

Singulariter.

Nominat.

lapis

Pluraliter.

Nomin.

lapides

Genit.

lapidis

Gen.

lapidum

Datiuo

lapidi

Dati.

lapidibus

Accuſ.

lapidem

Accuſ.

lapides

Vocatiuo ô

lapis

Vocatiuo ô

lapides

Ablat.

lapide

Ablat.

lapidibus

 

Of the Genetiue caſe Singular.

I. Certaine greeke nounes are deriued hither, from the firſt declenſon pariſyllable: as Æſchines, nis: Ariſtides, dis.

II. This Genetiue is ſometimes bo𝔯rowed of the ſecond pariſyllable: as, immitis Achilli, fo𝔯 Achillis. Duri miles vliſſi, fo𝔯 vliſſis.

 

Of the Accuſatiue Caſe.

52I. Some Accuſatiues end onely in im: as, vim, ravim, tuſſim, ſitim, maguderim, amuſſim, cucumim, Elim. Names of Riuers, as Tybrim, Ararim: And many greeke wo𝔯ds: as Syrtis, Myſis, Thais, Tygris, Tyberis, daphnis, Paris, change im into in: as Syrtin, Myſin, &c.

53II. Some end both in im, and em: as, buris, pelvis, clavis, ſecuris, puppis, torquis, turris, reſtis, feberis, {n. p.} nauis, bipenis, aqualis.

 

Of the Ablatiue Caſe.

54I. Nounes of the Maſculine gender deriued of Adiectiues, do end in i: as annalis, affinis, aprilis, Sextilis, quintilis, ſodalis, rivalis, familiaris. But rudis the fæminine, rude.

II. Neuters in al, ar, e, moſt commonly end in i, as, vectigal, calcar, mare. Reti, of rete. But par with his compounds endeth in e, o𝔯 i. And theſe end onely in e, far, hepar, jubar, nectar, gauſape, præſepe; and p𝔯oper names, Soraſte, Præneſte, Reate.

III. The names of moneths in er, end in i onely: as, September, Septembri. But the ſimple, imber, endeth in e, and i.

IIII. When the Accuſatiue endeth in im, o𝔯 in, the Ablatiue endeth in i: as, ſitim, ſiti, Myſin, ſi. Tigrin, gri. But Ararim, Arare.

Adiectiues in is, o𝔯 in er, that make their neuter in e, doe end in i: as, fortis, mollis, dulcis, acer, cri, But Poëts ſometimes vſe e, fo𝔯 i: 55Other Adiectiues end in e, and i, namely, of th𝔯ee genders vnder one termination: as, amans, clemens, fælix, vetus, capax, 𝔈c. except pauper, vber, hoſpes, ſoſpes.

V. When the Accuſatiue endeth in im, and em, the ablatiue endeth in e, and i: as, puppis, pe, and pi.

VI. All verbals in trix, end in e, and i. So certaine Subſtantiues, ignis, amnis, anguis, ſupellex, vnguis, vectis, avis, ovis, claſſis, fuſtis, finis, and ſometime civis.

VII. Likewiſe all Comparatiues: as, doctior, doctius, ore vel ori. To which adde, noſtrâs, veſtrâs, {n. p.} cujâs, and gentiles, Arpinâs, Fulginâs, 𝔈c. which are contracts of noſtrâtis, veſtrâtis, 𝔈c. now not vſed.

VIII. P𝔯oper names like to Adiectiues, end in e: as, Lateranenſis, Iuvenalis, Martialis, Fælix, Clemens, &c.

 

Of the Nominatiue plurall.

I. In the nominatiue plurall, we ſay Sardis, Trallis, not Sardes, Tralles.

II. Neuters ending in e, in the Ablatiue caſe, doe fo𝔯me the nominatiue plurall in a: as, Corpore, corpora.

III. When the ablatiue ſingular endeth in i onely, o𝔯 in e and i, the nominatiue plurall in the neuter endeth in ja: as, Concordi, fælici, molli, dulci, concordia fælicia, 𝔈c. Except vbera, and all comparatiues: as, doctiora, molliora, 𝔈c. But plura, and pluria, Apluſtra, and apluſtria.

 

Of the Genetiue.

I. When the Ablatiue endeth in i onely, o𝔯 in e, 𝔈 i, the genetiue plurall endeth in iüm: as, puppi, triſti, iüm. Except Comparatiues, and theſe following: as ſupplicum, complicum, artificum, ſtrigilum vigilum, veterum, memorum, pugilum, inopum: but plus, plurium.

II. When the ablatiue ſing. endeth in e, regularly the genetiue plurall is euermo𝔯e contracted: as, honore, honôrum, milite, tum, doctiorum. And diuerſe others, eſpeciall verballs in ans, o𝔯 ens, as, Sapientûm, ſerpentûm, prudentûm, parentûm, &c.

III. When the Nominatiue ſingular endeth in two conſonants, the genetiue plurall endeth in iüm: {n. p.} as, pars, vrbs, falx, glans, trabs, merx, partium, vrbium, &c. except, hiemum, principum, participum, municipum, forcipum, inopum, cælibum, clientum, As, aſſium, mas marium, vas, vadium, nox, noctium nix nivium, os oſſium, mus murium, faux, faucium caro carnium, cor cordium, alituum of ales, bos bonum, in the datiue bobus, o𝔯 bubus.

IIII. When the genetiue ſingular is of euen ſyllables with the Nominatiue, the genetiue plurall endeth in iüm: as, collis, menſis, accris, collium, &c. to theſe are added, litium, ditium, vitium, ſalium, manium, penatium: But canum, panum, vatum, juvenum, opum, apum, are excepted.

V. The names of feaſts being onely pluralls, doe make their genetiue moſt commonly in ôrum, which is bo𝔯rowed from the ſecond pariſyllable: as Agonalia, vinalia, ôrum: ſometimes in iüm: as floralia, feralia, iüm: ſometime in both: as parentalia, Saturnalia, ôrum, vel, iüm.

 

Of the Accuſatiue.

WHen the genetiue plurall endeth in iüm, the accuſatiue endeth in es, o𝔯 eis the diphthongue: as partium, partes, o𝔯 parteis, omnium, omnes, o𝔯 omneis.

 

Rules, whereby to decline all words of this declenſon, and to know the gender.

THe genetiue caſe, increaſing, o𝔯 not increaſing, and conſequently all caſes, are knowne by the terminations, of the Nominatiue.

There be ſeuentie terminations of the Nominatiue, as, hereafter followeth. {n. p.}

 

Seauentie Terminations.

A. ac.

E.

I.

O.

V.

Y.

Al.

Ec.

Id.

Ol.

Vd.

Yn.

An.

El.

Il.

On.

Vl.

Ys.

Ar.

En.

In.

Or.

Vr.

Yr.

As.

Er.

Ir.

Os.

Vs.

Ybs.

Ax.

Es.

Is.

Ox.

Vt.

Yns.

Abs.

Ex.

Ix.

Obs.

Vx.

Yps.

Æs.

Ebſ.

Ibs.

Oïs.

Vls.

 

Æx.

Ems

I. O.

Ons.

Vns.

 

Ans.

Ens.

Ips.

Ops.

Vnx.

 

Aps.

Eps.

Inx.

Ors.

 

 

Ars.

Ers.

 

 

 

 

Alx.

Erx.

 

 

 

 

Anx.

Eus.

 

 

 

 

Arx.

 

 

 

 

 

Aus.

 

 

 

 

 

Aux.

 

 

 

 

 

 

A of two letters.

A.

Ac.

ătis.

Thema, poëma, problema, so Zeugma, a citie, 𝔈c are all greeke neuters and make the dat. and abl. in is, o𝔯 in ĭbus Lac Lactis neut.

Al.

ālis.

Minūtal, anĭmal, vectigal, cervīcal, tribūnall, capĭtal, putĕal, which ſeeme to be contracted of neuters in le, and do end therefo𝔯e in li, in the ablatiue, ſo Ipſal. a citie.

 

ălis.

Hanniball, Aſdrubal, &c. maſ. ſo ſal, if it be declined in both nombers: but if it lack the plurall, tis a neuter. {n. p.}

An.

ānis.

Titan, Acharnan, Pæan.maſ.

Ar.

āris.

Puluīnar, laquear, lucar, calcar, exemplar, &c. contracts, which therfo𝔯e make i, in the abl far: and nar, is alſo ſometime a neuter, car, maſ.

 

ăris.

Hamilcar, cæſar, lar, but lar, lartis, a mans name. Par, with his compounds, compar, impar, ſepar, diſpar nectar, neut. bacchar, fœm.

 

ătis.

Hepar, Hepătris neut.

As.

ātis.

Probitas, charitas, facultas, &c. fæm, all. Magnas, maſ. and primas.

 

āſis

Vas, Vāſis, neut.

 

ăris.

Mas, măris, maſ.

 

ătis.

anas, anătis, com.

 

ădis.

Lampas, monas, trias, decas, doras, dipſas, Pallas, chilias hebdomas enneas, greeke fæm. Ætias, Phaëtontias, Archas, com. Vas vădis, as aſſes, maſ.

As.

antis.

Adamas, elephas, gigas, Acragas, garamas, Chalcas, maſ. Pallas, ſonne of Evander.

Ax.

ācis.

Pax, fornax, fem. thorax, phæax, thrax, anthrax, maſ. and all adiectiues in ax: as, audax, bibax, âcis.

 

àcis.

Greeke appellatiues, and Gentiles, ſtorax, dropax, Atax, Athrax, Pharnax, Briax, Syphax, which onely maketh ācis, and ăcis, maſ. abax, ſmilax, panax, colax, and limax. com. Caudax, fax, fæm.

 

āhis

Aſtinax, Hylax. {n. p.}

 

A, of three letters.

Abs.

ăbis.

Arabs, Arăbis, maſ. trabs, trăbis, fæm.

Æs.

æris.

Æs, æris, neut. But præs, prædis, maſ.

Æx.

ēcis.

Fæx, fecis, fem.

Ans.

antis.

Infans, com. Sextans, dodrans, quadrans, maſ. and all participles in ans.

 

andis

glans, glandis, fem.

Aps.

ăpis.

Lælaps, daps, dapis, fem. but daps is vnuſuall.

Ars.

artis.

Mars, maſ pars, ars, fem whoſe compounds change a into e, expers iners.

Alx.

alcis.

Falx, fem. Calx, a heele, Com. Calx, limechalke, maſ.

Anx.

angis.

Phalanx, phalangis, fæm.

 

ancis.

Lanx, lancis, fem.

Aus.

dis.

Fraus, laus, dis, fem.

Arx.

cis.

arx, arcis, fem.

Aux.

cis.

Faux, cis, fem. But the Nomina. is vnuſuall.

 

E

No wo𝔯ds ending in e, doe increaſe, and they are all neuters.

 

E, of two letters.

Ec.

ĕcis.

Halec, fem. perfect in both numbers. But the neuter lacking plurall.

El.

ēlis.

All Heb𝔯ew wo𝔯ds, Raphaël, Michaël, Daniel. But mel, mellis, fel, fellis, neuter wanting plurall, but mel hath the th𝔯ee like caſes. {n. p.}

En.

ĭnis.

pecten, maſ. oſcen, com. tibicen, Cormēen, liticen, lyricen, tubicen of Cano, maſ. and Flamen, a heatheniſh p𝔯ieſt: alſo certamen, crimẽ, culmen, inguen, and about 70. mo𝔯e neut.

 

ēnis.

lien, Attagen, ſplen, ren, lichen, maſ. ſyren, fem.

Er.

ĕris.

Anſer, paſſer, præſter, acipenſer, epic. Later, vomer, maſ. pauper, puber, degener, vber, adject. aër, æther, maſ. mulier, fem. ſiler, ſuber, cicer, ſicer, laſer, piper, tuber, a toad-ſtoole, and fruit of a tree, ſpinter, acer, verber, cadaver, papaver, iter, tineris, vber, gingiber. But vēr, vēris, Iupiter, Iŏvis.

Er.

ēris.

Greeke wo𝔯des in ϰϱ, make ēris, Sotēr, charactēr, crater, panther, Stater, 𝔈c. Ser. maſ.

Er.

tris.

Pater, venter, frater, accipiter, maſ. campeſter, pedeſter, equeſter, paluſter, ſylveſter, adject. linter. com mater, fem. So, volucer, cris, cre: celeber, bris, bre: alacer, cris, cre, adject. do not increaſe. Imber, bris.

Es.

ĕtis.

Seges, teges, ăbies, fem. interpres, indiges, com. hebes, teres, perpes, præpes, adject. paries, aries, maſ.

 

ētis.

quies, requies, inquies, fem. magnes, tapes, lebes, cres, cures. maſ. and p𝔯oper names, Mendes, Thales, Dares, Chremes, mis, and mētis, cæres, rētis, 𝔈 rītis, com. locuples, adject. But ceres, rĕris, fem. and bes, beſſis, maſ.

 

ēdis.

merces, fem. hæres, com. pes, pedis, maſ. Compes, ĕdis. fem. {E}

 

ìtis.

Ames, ſtipes, limes, fomes, termes, tudes, trames, ceſpes, gurges, palmes, poples, maſc ales, antiſtes, eques, veles, ſatelles, miles, comes, pedes, hoſpes, 𝔈 hoſpita, com. Dives, ſoſpes, com. and ſoſpita.

 

ĭdis.

Obſes, præſes, com. deſes, reſes, Adiect. of ſedeo.

 

is.

Nubes, ædes, clades, labes, contages, cudes, fames, indoles, lues, cautes, moles, ſepes, rupes, ſedes, ſoboles, ſordes, ſtrues, tabes, pubes, apes, vepres, adipes, fides, fem. vates, com. greeke wo𝔯ds in ĕs are neut. verres, maſ. do not increaſe.

Ex.

ĭcis.

Apex, ramex, latex, vertex, and vortex, caudex, 𝔈 codex, pollex, podex, maſ. forfex, carex, fem. vibex, īcis, fem. obex, imbrex, ſilex, cortex, culex, pumex, iudex, vindex, opifex, artifex, aruſpex, illex, index, com. pellex, Ilex, fem. ſupplex, Adiect. But ſupellex, ſupellectis. fem.

 

ēcis.

Reſex, mirmex, vervex, maſ. nex, nĕcis, prex, fem. vnuſuall. But lex lēgis, with his compounds, aquilex, exlex, illex, lelex, com. rex rēgis, and grex grĕgis. maſ.

 

igis.

Remex, remĭgis, maſ. But ſenex, ſenis, com.

 

E, of three letters.

Ebs.

ēbis

Plebs, plēbis, fem. but cælebs, ĭbis, com.

Ems.

ĕmis.

hyems, hiĕmis, fem. {n. p.}

Ens.

entis.

Dens, bidens, triens, torrens, maſ. lens, mens, gens, fem. Bibens, ſerpens rudens, cliens, parens, adoleſcens, com amens, demens, adiect. and all participles wͭ their verbals in ens.

 

endis.

Libripens, maſ. nefrens, com lens, fem.

 

untis.

iens, euntis, with the compounds, abiens, iniens, abiens, rediens, periens, euntis. But ambiens, ientis.

Eps.

ĭpis.

itis.

adeps, princeps, forceps, com. But anceps, cŭpis, and ſeps ſepis, a ſerpent, municeps, particeps, anceps, biceps, præceps, ĭtis, contracts of ancipes, bicipes &c.

Ers.

ertis.

Expers, iners, of ars, adject.

Erx.

cis.

Merx, cis fem.

 

I

No Latine wo𝔯ds in the nominatiue ſingular, end in j.

 

I of two letters.

Id.

Idis.

Dauid, īdis.

Il.

ĭlis.

pugil, vigil, com. mugil epic. ſil, neut. pervigil, adject.

In.

īnis.

Delphin, maſ. and delphis, ſalamin, fem and ſalamis, and ſalamina.

Ir.

ĭri.

Vir, with his compounds, levir, duumvir triumvir &c.

Is.

ītis.

Samnis, tis, Quiris, maſ. lis fem. charis charĭtis sho𝔯t fem.

 

 

Lapis, maſ. caſſis, cuſpis, Iaſpis ægis, aſpis, aclis, ibis tyrannis, cenchris, {E 2}

 

ĭdis.

pyramis, pixis, Iſis, perſis, iris, bolis corōnis, fem. and oſyris, maſ. So greeke patronymiks, Æneïs, dos o𝔯 dis, and many in is, making dos ſho𝔯t. But crenis, crenīdis, Neſis, pſōphis.

 

ĕris.

puluis, vomis, cinis, maſ.

 

ĭnis.

Sanguis, pollis, maſ. in old time Sanguen, pollen, neut. were vſed. Trachis Trachīnis, long.

 

īris.

Glis, glíris, maſ.

Is.

is.

Amuſſis, auris, avis, baſis, bipennis, biremis, callis, chelis, clauis claſſis, cutis, faucis, febris, melis, meſſis, naris, paralyſis, ovis, pellis, peſtis poëſis, proneptis, ratis, ſecuris, ſementis, tuſſis, bilis, ſitis, vis, opis, vicis, ſtipis, ſcobis, ſtrigilis, Novalis, buris cannabis, pelvis, ravis, navis, turris, puppis, fem.

Ix

ĭcis.

Ibix, calix, varix, maſ. ſilix, hiſtrix, filix, fornix, ſălix, coxendix, pix, chænix, fem. Cilix, of cilicia, com.

 

īcis.

Cornix, coturnix, piſtrix, radix, lodix, cervix, matrix, nutrix, fem. phænix, maſ. perdix, com. ſpadix, fælix, pernix, adiect. all verballs in trix: as victrix, &c. fem.

 

ĭgis.

maſtyx, gis. maſ. and phryx, of phrigia.

 

īvis.

nix, nīvis, fem.

 

I of three letters.

Ibs.

Ĭbis

Libs, libis, maſ.

Inx.

ingis

Syrinx, Syringis, fem. and Syringa. {n. p.}

Irps.

irpis.

ſtirps, com. a plant. But a ſtocke, o𝔯 iſſue, fem.

Io.

ōnis.

Legio, ditio not vſed in the nom. contagio, titio, maſ. Io, a p𝔯oper name 𝔈c. ſo ratio, natio, and all verball in tio, ſio, xio, fem.

 

ēnis.

Anio Aniēnis a riuer. Nerio, wife of Mars.

 

O.

O of two letters

On.

ōnis.

Harpàgo, (in accuſ. plurall, harpaginĕs) aquilo, vdo, ligo, cento, cudo, ſulmo, ſpado, ſenio, ternio, ſermo, maſ. So all nounes ſignifying a body, as ardelio, agāſo, carbo, capito, fronto, naſo, epulo, draco, mango congerro, fullo, helluo, labeo, latro, nebulo, præco, prædo, pugio, ſuſurro, ſapo, ſtruthio, ſalmo, pavo, capo, vmbo, temo, vnio, calcitro, verbero, apexabo, mucro, caupo, erro, pulmo, and very few mo𝔯e But vnĕdo, titio, and Dido, calypſo, Iuno, &c. fem.

 

ŏnis.

Certaine gentiles, Macedo. Brito, Saxo, vangio, lingo &c.

 

ĭnis.

All in do, and go: as dulcedo, formīdo, libido, ſiligo, compago, ſartăgo imago, lanugo, virgo grando, fem ordo turbo, maſ cardo margo, com. Apollo, maſ. homo, nemo, com. But caro, carnis, fem.

Ol.

ōlis.

Sōl, ſōlis maſ. the onley wo𝔯d in Ol. {E. 3.}

On.

ōnis.

Damon, ladon, Simon, trigon, triton typhon, maſ. Babilon, Sidon, fem. Pithon, com. and all greeke nounes increaſing by ô, magnum.

 

ŏnis.

Agamennon, canon, dæmon, maſ. gorgon, amăzon, ſyndon, fem. Orīon Ægeon, Edon, ōnis and ŏnis, Architecton, Palæmon, and al ſuch increaſing by o parvum.

 

ontis.

Aaron, Phaëton chamæleon, maſ.

Or.

ōris.

Amor, timor, rumor, honor, vapor, clamor, labor, which haue alſo, honos, vapos, clamos, labos, ſopor, plur. car, maſ and about ſome 50. mo𝔯e, beſides verballs, in tox, ſox, xor, and comparatius, all maſ. Diſcolor, verſicolor, adject. But vxor, ſoror fem. autor, com.

 

ŏris.

Caſtor, Hector, Rhētor, maſ. arbor, and arbos, fem æquor, ador, marmor, neut. memor, bicorpor, indecor adiect.

 

 

Cor, with the compounds excors, vecors, ſocors, concors, adiect.

Os.

ōris.

mos, moris, lepos, flos, ros, rorium, gen. plu. maſ. glos fem, os ōris neut. orium, gen. plu.

 

oſſis.

os, oſſis, neut. exos, exoſſis, adiect.

 

ŏvis.

bos, bovis, boum, gen. plu. com. dat. bobus, bubus.

 

ōdis.

Cuſtos, ōdis, com.

 

ōtis

Nepos, maſ. cos, dos, fem. Sacerdos, com. But compos, impos, ŏtis, adiect. eros, Rhinoceros, Ægoceros, maſ. monoceros, fem. {n. p.}

 

oïs.

Minos, heros, tros, maſ.

Ox.

ōcis.

Volvox, maſ. atrox, velox, ferox, adiect,

 

ŏcis.

Cappadox, m. cœlox, fem. præcōx cis and cŏquis, adiect. nox, noctis, fem.

 

ŏgis.

Allobrox, polyplhilox, maſ.

 

O of three letters.

Obs

ōbis.

Scrobs, and ſcrobis, fem. but Scobs, ˘bis, fem.

Oïs

ntis.

Simoïs, Simoëntis, pyroïs, but diploïs, idis, fem.

Ons.

ontis.

mons, fons, pons, maſ. frons, bifrons, com. ſpontis, te, fem. ſons, inſons, adiect.

 

ondis.

frons, frondis, fem.

Ops.

ōpis.

Cercops, cyclops, canops, hydrops, maſ.

 

ŏpis.

Æthiops, cecrops, Dolops, maſ. ops, a goddeſſe, and ŏpis, helpe fem. inops, adiect.

Ors.

ortis.

Mors, ſors, with his compounds, conſors, exors, adiect. ſo cohors, and fors, te dipt, fem.

 

ordis.

The compounds of cor, excors, vecros, ſocors, diſcors, concors.

 

V.

V. of two letters.

Vd.

ŭdis.

Bogud, Bogŭdis.

Vl.

ŭlis

præſul, conſul, exul, com. {E. 4.}

Vr.

ŭris.

Vultur, furfur, turtur, maſ. murmur, ſulphur, guttur, neut. ſo Anxur, Tybur, cities but anxur, is alſo maſ. Augur, lygur, com. But fur fūris, com. cicur, adiect.

 

ŏris.

Ebur, o𝔯 ebor robur, o𝔯 robus, o𝔯 robor, jecur, jecŏris jecinŏris, jocinor, alſo: femur, neut.

Vs.

ūdis.

Incus, ſubſcus, pălus, ūdis, fem. but pecus, ŭdis, fem.

 

ūris.

Rus, thus, jus, crus, pus, note mus, maſ. tellus, fem. plus, adiect. but sus ſuis, grus gruis, ligus ŭris, com.

 

ūtis.

Virtus, Salus, ſeruitus, ſenectus, juventus &c. all fem. Intercus, inter cŭtis, ſhort adiect.

 

ĕris.

Vellus, olus, onus, latus, funus, munus, genus, vleus, viſcus, opus, pondus, rudus, fidus, ſcelsus, neut. Vetus, adiect. But Venus, venĕris, fem. a goddeſſe

 

untis.

Opus, opuntis, a citie, hydrus, trapezus, and ceraſus, a citie.

 

ŏris.

Litus, nemus, facinus, fæmus, tergus, tempus, decus, corpus, pecus, pectus, penus, frigus, pignus, neut. but lepus, maſ. lepus, o𝔯 lepos, eloquence, pōris.

 

ŏdis.

tripus, Oedipus, Oëdipodis, maſ.

Vt.

ĭtis.

Caput, ſynciput, occiput, neut.

Vx.

ūcis.

nux, crux, lux, which want the plurall feminine. Pollux, maſ. But dux, dŭcis, com. trux, redux, ŭcis, Adiect.

 

ūgis.

Frux, fem. But coniux, o𝔯 coniunx, iŭgis, com. {n. p.}

 

V, of three letters

Vls.

ūltis.

puls, pultis, fem.

Vns

ūntis.

Aruns, Decuns.

Vnx.

vncis.

Septunx, fem. deunx, quincunx, maſ.

 

Y

Y, of two letters.

Y.

y̆os.

moly, Epy fem.

Yn.

y̆nis.

porcyn, Gortyn, fem.

Ys.

y̆dis

chlamis, chlamy̆dis. fem.

Ys.

y̆os

Phorcys y̆os.

Yx.

y̆cis.

Eryx, a hill, and a mans name. Sandyx, maſ. Bebryx, a mans Countrie, ĭcis, and īcis. but bombyx, ȳcis, maſ. chalyx, a flint.

 

y̆chis.

Onyx, and Sardŏnyx, ony̆chis, com. ceryx, maſ. and cëyx, ſonne to Iupiter.

 

y̆gis

Oryx, maſ. ſtyx. fem.

 

Y, of three letters.

Ybs.

y̆bis.

chalybes chaly̆bis. m.

Yns.

ynthis.

Tyrins, Tyrinthis, a city, and a riuer.

Ynx

incis.

Linx, Lincis, com.

Yps.

yphis.

Gryps, gryphis, maſ.

 

The Second Impariſyllable. {n. p.}

THE ſecond declenſon Impariſyllable, is when the Nominatiue ſingular endeth in ies, the Genetiue and Datiue in iēi, the Accuſatiue in iem, the Ablatiue in ie. The Nominatiue, Accuſatiue, 𝔈 Uocatiue plural in ïes, the Genetiue in iêrum, the Datiue, and Ablatiue in iēbus: as in example.

 

Singulariter.

Nom.

meridies

Pluraliter.

Nom.

meridies

a verg. ſayth dij Saluſt, die by contraction.

Gen.

a meridiēi

Gen.

meridiêrũ

Dat.

meridiēi

Dat.

meridiêbus

Acc.

meridiem

Acc.

meridies

Voc. ô

meridies

Voc. ô

meridies

Ablat.

meridie

Ab.

meridiêbus

Note that theſe foure, plebes, res, ſpes, fides, doe end ĕi ſho𝔯t in the Genetiue and Datiue ſingular: as, plebĕi, rĕi, ſpĕi, fidĕi.

Note alſo, that many ending in ïes, are made the firſt pariſyllable, by changing the laſt ſyllable into a; as luxuries, luxuria, mollities, mollitia.

 

Of the Declenſon Contract.

THE declenſon contract ariſeth of the firſt impariſyllable, which increaſing by, is pure, cauſeth the fo𝔯mer ſyllable to be contracted with it into one. The nominatiue and vocatiue ſingular doth alwayes end in us, the genetiue in üis, contracted into us; the Datiue in üi without contraction. The accuſatiue in üem into um: the ablatiue in üe, into u. The nominatiue, accuſatiue, and {n. p.} vocatiue plurall ües into us, the genetiue üium into üum, the datiue and ablatiue in üibus into ibus, and ſometime into ubus: as, in example.

 

Singulariter.

Nominativo,

manus

Pluraliter.

Nominativo,

manus

Genetivo,

manus

Genetivo,

manuum

Dativo,

manui

Dativo,

manibus

Accuſativo,

manum

Accuſativo,

manus

Vocativo, ô

manus

Vocativo ô

manus

Ablativo,

manu

Ablativo,

manibus

 

Note.

Terence vſeth the genetiue without contraction: as, eius anuis cauſa, fo𝔯 anus.

The datiue is ſeldome contracted, to diſtinguiſh it from the Ablatiue, yet it is ſometimes contracted into u: as, verg.

Quod neque concubitu indulgent.

Ter Veſtitu nimio indulges.

Terence bo𝔯roweth the genetiue from the ſecond pariſyllable: as, Nihil ornati, nihil tumulti.

The genetiue plurall contract, is further contracted ſometimes by Syncope: as, Currûm, fo𝔯 curruum.

The Datiue, and Ablatiue, is contracted into ùbus, in theſe following: as, acus, lacus, artus, arcus, tribus, ficus, ſpecus, quercus, partus, veru, partus, which hath alſo portibus: but in all other into ĭbus: as, fætibus, fructibus, 𝔈c.

The holy name Ieſus is thus declined after the Greekes: as, Nom. Ieſus, Gen. Ieſu, Dat. Ieſu. Ac. Ieſum, Voc. Ieſu, Ab. Ieſu.

 

Here followeth a Table of the Declenſons. {n. p.}

 

SINGVLARITER.

1. Pariſyl.

Nom.

G.

D.

A.

V.

A.

 

a.

æ.

æ.

am.

 

 

e.

like the Nominatiue

a.

2. Pariſyl.

er, ir, ur, um, us.

i.

o.

um.

o.

1. Impariſyl.

c, l, t,

d, n, x,

e, r,

o, s,

 

is.

 

i.

 

em.

im.

e.

i.

e, i.

2. Impari.

ies.

iêi.

iêi.

iem.

ie.

Cont.

us.

us.

üi.

um.

u.

 

PLVRALITER.

Nom.

G.

D.

A.

V.

A.

æ.

ârum.

is.

as

like the Nominatiue.

like the Datiue.

i.

ôrum.

is.

os.

es.

um.

ium.

ibus.

es.

ies.

iêrum.

iêbus.

ies.

us.

üum.

bus.

us.

{n. p.}

A Table of the declining of Greeke words.

 

N.

G.

D.

A.

V.

A.

 

1.

Pariſ.

As.

Es.

E.

æ.

æ.

es.

æ.

æ.

e.

an, am.

en, am.

en.

a.

es, e, a.

e.

a.

e, a

e.

Ænæas.

Anchiſes.

Penelope.

2.

Pariſ.

Eus.

Os.

On.

ei, eos.

i.

i.

ei

o.

o.

ea, um.

on.

on.

eu.

e.

on.

eo.

o.

o.

Orpheus.

Delos, Logos.

Ilion, Barbiton.

1.

Impa.

A.

An.

 

Is.

 

Ys.

Es.

As.

O.

 

tis.

os.

 

ios.

dos.

yos.

eos.

ntis.

ûs.

ti.

i.

 

i.

di.

yi.

ei.

nti.

oî.

a.

a.

 

in.

da.

yn.

ea.

anta.

ô.

a.

an.

 

i.

i.

y.

es.

a.

o.

te.

e.

 

i.

de.

 

e.

te.

o.

Thema.

Titan.

 

Metamorphôſis.

Phillis.

Tethys.

Achilles.

Pallas.

Dido, Calypſo, 𝔈c.

Theſe wo𝔯des being changed into Latine, are declined acco𝔯ding to the latine rules.

 

GENDER. {n. p.}

GENDER, is the difference of a noune acco𝔯ding to ſexe. It is ſimple, o𝔯 double.

The ſimple is naturall, o𝔯 feigned. Naturall is maſculine, o𝔯 feminine. A wo𝔯d of the maſculine gender ſignifieth the male kinde, o𝔯 thoſe things, that are conceiued by the male-kind: and it is ſigned commonly with the p𝔯onoune hic, as, hic vir.

A wo𝔯d of the feminine gender ſignifieth the feemale kinde, o𝔯 thoſe thinges that are conceiued by the female-kinde: and it is ſigned commonly with the p𝔯onoune hæc: as hæc mulier.

A wo𝔯d of the neuter gender ſignifieth neyther male, no𝔯 female, no𝔯 any thing that may be conceiued by them; and tis ſigned with the article hoc: as hoc ſaxum.

The manifold gender, is Epicene. o𝔯 common. A wo𝔯d of the Epicene gender ſignifieth the male, and female, vnder one voyce. and one gender: as, hic paſſer hæc aquila, both the heether, and ſheether: and to diſcerne the kind we ſay aquila mas, aquila femina.

A wo𝔯d of the a common gender ſignifieth the male and female, vnder one voyce, and two genders as, homo, infans, bos, bubo: It is ſigned with hic, and hæc.

 

Note.

a Where note, that ſo long as we ſpeake of the ſame ſexe, we may not change the gender of the adiectiue: as to ſay, canis hæc quam velociſſimè curreret, nî eſſet fætus, is incongruous ſpeaking.

Note alſo, that whereas the ſexe is vtterly vnknowne, Autho𝔯s do vſe the ſame ſometimes in the maſculine, ſometimes in the feminine gender, which {n. p.} wo𝔯ds are therfo𝔯e called of the Grammarians, the doubtfull gender; wherein we may change the gender of the adiectiue at our pleaſure: as to ſay, durus eſt hic cortex, eademque eſt amara, is not incongruitie. But it is a needleſſe thing to make this a diſtinct gender from the common, ſeeing that vpon notice of the ſexe, it is the common: as, ſerpens, bubo, dama, halcionis, 𝔈c. And it is better in liueleſſe things to keepe the gender of the adiectiue, than to change it, as common vſe ſheweth.

 

The Gender may be knowne th𝔯ee wayes, i, by

Signification

Termination

Declenſon.

 

1. By Signification.

By Signification the gender is knowne, whether the Subſtantiue be p𝔯oper, o𝔯 common.

 

Subſtantiues Proper, Maſculines.

All p𝔯oper names of gods, of men, 𝔈 their p𝔯oper offices; of Winds, Moneths, and Riuers, are of the maſculine gender: as, Apollo, Virgilius lybs, october, Tibris.

 

Subſtantiues proper, fæminines.

ALl p𝔯oper names of goddeſſes, of women and their p𝔯oper offices: of townes, and cities, of Iles, and countries, (vnleſſe they do end in on, o𝔯 um) are of the feminine gender: as, Venus, Philotis Opus, Britannia, Perſis.

 

Exception of Cities.

Abydos, leſbos, Sulmo, Agragos are maſculines: Argos, Tybur, conclave, præneſte, Iſpal, are neuters Anxur is both maſculine, and neuter.

 

Subſtantiues common, fæminines.

ALl names of trees are of the feminine gender: as alnus, cupreſſus, cedrus, fagus, ficus, malus, {n. p.} pyrus, prunus, vlmus, populus, platănus, meſpilus, ceraſus, buxus, citrus, corilus, fraxinus, terebinthus, Iuniperus, cornus, myrtus, amygdalus, Perſitus, volemus, arbutus, Sambucus, eſculus, tremulus, myrrhus, corymbus, caprificus, morus, pinus, ſorbus, ſpinus, ornus, &c. And moſt plants, as myrtus, nardus, intybus, &c.

 

Exception.

Except oleaſter, pinaſter, pyraſter, taxus, rubus, maſculines: libănus, pampinus, commons: Siler, ſuber, acer thus, robur, neuters. Alſo many plants are maſculines: Rhamnus, paliūrus, helleborus, tribulus, thyrſus, thymus, calamus, ebulus, crocus, &c.

 

Subſtantiues common, Epicænes.

ALl names of foules, beaſts, and fiſhes, if the male, and female cannot manifeſtly be diſcerned are of the epicen gender. Now whether wee muſt vſe the maſculine, o𝔯 the feminine, that muſt be learned by the declenſon.

Subſtantiues common Neuters.

 

2. By Termination.

I. All wo𝔯ds that end in um, (except the names of men, and weomen) and all in on, by o parvum, are of the neuter gender: as, Noricum, Brunduſium, cynnamomum, balſamum, barbiton, Ilion.

II. All nounes indefinites, o𝔯 vndeclined: as, nil, gummi, nefas, &c.

III. All wo𝔯ds in ma, deriued from the grekes, as thema, problema, &c.

IIII. All latine wo𝔯des ending in e, le, and al, except Sal, as, mare, rete, mantile, pectorate, capital, ammal, &c.

V. All in vt: as, Caput, Synciput, occiput. {n. p.}

 

3. By Declenſon.

The Gender of the firſt Pariſyllable.

I. All latine nounes of this declenſon, are of the feminine gender: as, Capra, menſa, mappa &c.

II. Greeke wo𝔯ds in a, o𝔯 e, deriued from their ſecond declenſon: as, muſa, grammaticæ, rhetorice, Helene, which being made latine, wo𝔯ds, are changed into a, as, grammatica, Rhetorica, Helĕna.

 

Exception.

I. The names of men with their offices, are masculine: as, ſcriba, aſſecla, ſcurra, rabula, lixa, laniſta, &c.

II. All wo𝔯ds deriued from the firſt declenſon of the greekes which doe end in as, o𝔯 es, and are made Latine, by changing as, and os, into a, as, Satrapas pa: athletes, ta: ſo cometa, planeta, nauta, pyrata, palæſtuta, Papa, agyrta, eremita, poëta, &c. except margarita, cataracta, charta, catapulta, cochlea, gauſapa, which being maſculines in the greeke, are feminines in latine.

III. Theſe are commons: Dama talpa, auriga: verna, conviva, refuga, profuga, pincérna, idiôta, concuba, and compounds of venio, colo, gigno, cado: as aduena, convena: agricola, cælicola: indigena, terrigena, Graiugena: homicîda, patricîda, fratricîda, matrîcîda.

 

The gender of the ſecond Pariſyllable.

I. All nounes of this declenſon, that end in er, ir ur, are maſculines: as, aper, vir, Satur,

II. All Latine nounes ending in us, and greeke nounes, in os: as dominus, logos.

 

Exception.

I. Humus, domus, alvus, colus, vannus, are {F} feminines.

II. Certaine Latine wo𝔯ds in us, deriued from greeke wo𝔯ds in os: as papȳrus, antidŏtus, coſtus, dipthongs, byſſus, abyſſus, chryſtallus, ſynodus, ſaphyrus, eremus, arctus, biblus, periŏdus, methŏdus, plynthus, dialectus, apoſtrophus, balānus, &c.

III. Theſe are commons. ficus a diſeaſe, phaſĕlus, lĕcytus, atomus, groſſus, pharus, paradiſus

 

The Gender of the firſt Impariſyllable.

A Noune of this declenſon either doth not increaſe, o𝔯 doth increaſe in the genitiue caſe.

A Noune increaſeth not, when there be no mo𝔯e ſyllables in the genetiue than in the nominatiue, and they end in es, is, er, or, e, whereof es, and is, are feminines, er, maſculines, and e, neuters.

 

Exception of maſculines not increaſing.

I. Theſe maſculines are excepted. Verres, lienis, natalis, acinăces, aqualis, orbis, alcis, jugalis, callis, retis, enſis, ignis, follis, caulis fuſtis, crinis, menſis collis, panis, vnguis, penis, caſſis, torris, faſcis, vermis, piſcis, axis, vectis, poſtis, beſſis, laris, majalis, ædilis, riualis, aſſis with his compounds.

II. Theſe commons are excepted, Canalis, amnis, clunis, finis, teſtis, juvenis, reſtis, halciŏnis, corbis anguis, ſcrobis, hoſtis, ſentis, civis, vates, perduellis, patruelis, extorris, canis, affinis, ſodalis, contubernalis

Nounes, in e𝔯, are maſculines: but mater is the feminine, and linter the common.

A Noune increaſeth when there be mo𝔯e ſyllables in the genetiue, than in the Nominatiue the penult whereof is ſho𝔯t, o𝔯 long.

 

Nounes increaſing of the maſculine Gender. {n. p.}

I. Moſt Nounes in es, is, er, il, ul, increaſing ſho𝔯t in the laſt ſyllable but one, are maſculines.

II. Nounes ending in or, os, and o, ſignifieng a body, the penult long in the genetiue caſe: except gentiles, as, ſaxo, ŏnis, &c.

III. All verballs in tor, ſor, xor.

 

Nounes increaſing of the fem. Gender.

Of the feminine gender are very many increaſing long in the penult: as,

I. Nounes increaſing by ātis, ūtis, and ūdis: as, pietas, virtus, palus.

II. Uerballs in tio, ſio, xio, trix increaſing by, ōnis, and īcis long.

III. Many nounes of one ſyllable ending in s, with a conſonant, befo𝔯e it: as ars, ſticps.

IIII. Nounes in do, and go, increaſing ſho𝔯t by ĭnis: as, dulcedo, virgo.

V. Nounes in x, making the genetiue in cis: as pax, fæx, fax lanx.

 

Nounes increaſing of the neuter gender.

I. Of the neuter gender are nounes ending in al, o𝔯 el, increaſing long: as animal, mel.

II. Nounes in ar, increaſing long: and in ur increaſing ſho𝔯t: as, far, murmur.

III. Nounes in en, increaſing ſho𝔯t by ĭnis, pecten: and compounds of cano are onely excepted: as, tibicen, tubîcen, &c.

IIII. Nounes in us, increaſing ſho𝔯t by ĕris, and ŏris: as fædus, corpus.

Note, that theſe rules haue many exceptions, which are to be found in the terminations of the firſt Impariſyllable.

 

The Gender of the Second Impariſy.

All nounes of this declenſon are of the feminine {F 2} gender: except meridies, which is of the maſculine, and dies, which is the common in the ſingular nomber, and the maſculine in the plurall.

 

The Gender of the declenſon Contract

All nounes of this declenſon are masculines, and moſt of them verballs in tus ſus xus: as auditus, tactus, cenſus, flexus.

 

Exception.

Except theſe femines following. Porticus, tribus ſocrus, nurus, manus, idus acus, penus, colus, lacus, ſpecus, anus, domus: and certaine trees: as, Laurus, cornus, ficus, pinus, quercus, platanus.

 

Of Compariſon.

Compariſon befalleth a Subſtantiue, not p𝔯operly, but abuſiuely: as Neronior, a Nerone, Cynædior, a Cynædo, Pænior, a Pæno.

Thus farre of a Noune Homoclyte.

 

Of a Noune Heteroclyte.

A Noune Heteroclyte is, to which theſe Accidents doe not euenly o𝔯 vniformally agree, to wite number caſe declenſon, gender.

An Heteroclite, is, varying, defectiue, Redounding.

 

Variation of Gender.

I. Theſe Nounes are maſculines in the ſingular number, and neuters in the plurall, Mænalus Dindimus, Iſmarus, Tartarus, Taygetus, Tænarus, Pangæus, Maſſicus, Gargarus, baltheus, iuſſus, ſupparus. {n. p.}

II. Theſe are feminines in the ſingular, and neuters in the plurall, Pergamus, intybus, arbutus, Carbaſus, amygdalus, pyrus ſupellex, which may want the plurall.

III. Theſe are neuters in the ſingular, and feminines in the plurall, delicium, epulum, nundinum, balneum. Iuvenall hath balnea.

IIII. Theſe are neuters, in the ſingular, and maſculines in the plurall, cælum, Argos, Elîſium.

 

Redundance of Gender.

I. Theſe being maſculines in the ſingular, are both maſculines, and neuters in the plurall: as, ſibilus, jocus, locus, avernus.

II. Theſe being neuters, in the ſingular, are maſculines, and neuters in the plurall: as, raſtrum, frænum, filum, capiſtrum, clauſtrum.

 

Defect in Nomber.

Furthermore an heteroclyte is defectiue, and that in

number

caſe.

 

Defectiues in the Singular.

I. Theſe maſculines want the ſingular, manes, majores, cancelli, liberi, antes, menſes, monthly termes, lemures, faſti, minores, natales, penates, annales, amitini, antipŏdes, Boni, cani, cælites, centumviri, decemviri, decumani, clitellarij, cognati, conſpirati, Euocati, inferi, libelli, Magni, Magnates, optimates, optimi, ordines, patricidij, patres, poſteri, primores, proceres, purpurati, pythonici, renes ſoles ſummates, ſuperi, ſuperiores, &c. Alſo many names of places: as, Gabij, locri, &c.

II. Theſe feminines want the ſingular, exuviæ, phaleræ, grates, manubiæ, idus, antiæ, inſidiæ minæ {F 3} excubiæ, nonæ, nugæ, tricæ, calendæ, inferiæ, feriæ primitiæ, plagæ, netrs, valvæ, diuitiæ, nuptiæ, ædes, lactes, amitinæ, anguſtiæ, argutiæ, bigæ, blandïtiæ, camenæ, copiæ, cupediæ, dapes, decumæ epulæ, facetiæ, fauces, fores, fortunæ, Icunculæ, Indubiæ, ineptiæ, pleïades, medicinæ, muſæ, naïades opes, tenebræ, palpebræ, pecuniæ, poteſtates, præſtigiæ partes, primæ, Secundæ, &c. reduviæ, reliquiæ, vmbræ, furiæ, Gratiæ, vergiliæ, vires, Sordes literæ, ſuppetiæ, quadrigæ, aquæ, Calidæ, thermæ funeræ. Alſo many names of places, as Sardes, Amiclæ, Pheræ, Thebæ, Athenæ, &c.

III. Theſe Neuters want the ſingular, Arma, mapalia, mænia, munia, iuſta, roſtra, præcordia, ſponſalia, luſtra, effata, exta, crepundia, teſqua, cunabula, caſtra, acta, adeſpota, Æſtiua, Alcedonia, ambarvalia, analecta apophoreta, armamenta, aromata, avia, aulæa, bona, centaurea, cibaria, cineralia, comitia, compita, compitalia, confinia, dictata donaria, chranica, femoralia, feminialia, forenſia, freta, frivola, Ceraunia, genitalia, genualia, geſta, honoraria, Ilia, impedimenta, initia, initiamenta, lacticinia, lina, magnalia, magalia, menſtrua miſcellania miſſillia, muliebria, olympia, palearia, paſcua, pecuaria, penſa, pontificia, popularia, præſcita, pythia falſamenta, Semina, ſeria, ſuprema, fraga, flabra, talaria, Tempora, repotia, verenda, vlnatia, robigalia, funeralia, hiberna, juga,

P𝔯oper names: as, Cythera, Artaxata, Bactra, Suſa, Ceraunia, Names of feaſtes. orgia, Nycteria, Bacchanalia, Floralia, &c. Titles of bookes, Bucholica, Georgica, chronica, &c.

 

Defectiues in the plurall.

Theſe want the plurall number. {n. p.}

I. All p𝔯oper names of men, women, towns, countries, flouds, moneths, winds, and woods: and whatſoeuer is diſtinguiſhed by ſome p𝔯oper name.

II. Uertues: as, prudentia, ſapientia, iuſtitia, temperantia, 𝔈c. a56 vices: as, ſtultitia, invidia, deſidia, 𝔈c. Diſeaſes; mettals, aurum, argentum, ferrum, ſtannum, cuprum, plumbum, &c.

III. All things that are rather meaſured than numb𝔯ed: as, gluten, butyrum, ſebum, &c.

IIII. Nounes ſignifying a certaine tyme: as, heſperus, veſper, diluculum, æſtas, infantia, ævum. And pax, mors, vita, fames, ſalus, lues, tabes, labes, fides, ſoboles, pix, lux, ſitis, bilis, talio, tuſſis, ſenecta, juventus, humus, cholera, pubes, fuga, quies. And alſo ſol, aër, ſanguis, æther, nemo, pontus, pelagus, limus, fimus, tellus, aluus, cæſtus, album, faſcinum, cænum, ſenium, lethum, ſalum, ſolum, barathrum, vitrum, viſcum, penum, iuſtitium, nihilum, ver, lac, halec, gelu, ſolium, iubar.

V. Moſt herbes want the plurall.

 

Defectiues in Caſe.

I. Theſe haue no caſes, and are therefo𝔯e called Aptotes: fas, nefas, nihil, and nil, inſtar, cornu, genu, gummi, frugi, Tempe, ſeſqui, gauſape, ſpecus, veru, mancipi, mille, neuci, pondo, præſto, virus, huiuſmodi, cuiuſmodi, illiuſmodi, iſtiuſmodi, eiuſmodi, neceſſe, neceſſum, quid, expes, tot, quot, and all numbers from th𝔯ee to an hund𝔯ed.

II. Theſe haue but one caſe, called Monoptotes, noctu, natu, iuſſu, iniuſſu, promptu, permiſſu,57 Ablatiues. Macte, voc. ambāge ab. ſo aſtu ab. ſing. aſtus accuſ. plur. inficias, accuſ. plu.

III. Theſe haue two caſes called Diptotes, fors forte, ſpontis ſponte, repetundarum repetundis, iugeris {F 4} iugere, verberis verbere, impetis, impete, melos melo, tabi tabo, chaos chao, plus, pluris, ſuppetiæ ſuppetias, grates grates. Amongſt all theſe, cornu, genu, ambāge, verberis, plus, iugeris, haue all the Caſes plurall, but veru wants the Nominatiue.

IIII. Theſe haue th𝔯ee caſes, called Triptotes, vicis vicem, vice: opis, opem, ope, which hath the plurall whole: but vicis wants the genetiue. So Dicam, dicas, dicis: ſitus, ſitum, ſitu.

V. Theſe want the Nominatiue caſe onely, and are called Pentaptotes: Dapis, remigis, precis, frugis, necis, proceris, faucis, ditionis. Nemo wanteth the genetiue. Frondis, vis, feminis, want the Datiue: and frons the Nominatiue, is vnuſuall. All relatiues, diſtributiues, Infinites, 𝔈 all p𝔯onounes, except noſter, noſtras, meus, tu, doe want the Uocatiue Caſe. All which haue the plurall whole.

VI. Theſe neuters haue onely the th𝔯ee like Caſes in the plurall number: hordeum, far, forum, mel, mulſum, defrutum, and thûs.

VII. All nounes of the ſecond Impariſyllable haue the th𝔯ee like caſes plurall onely: except res, ſpecies, facies, acies, dies.

 

Note.

P𝔯oper names, that haue the ſingular number, doe want the plurall: and they that haue the plurall want the ſingular.

 

Redundance.

I. Theſe redound in gender, and termination, and ſome in declenſon alſo. Tonitrus, tonitru: clipeus clipeum: baculus, baculum: ſensus, ſum: tignus, tignum: tapetum, tapete, tapes: punctus, punctum: {n. p.} ſinapi, ſinapis: ſinus, num: menda, dum: peplus, plum: penus penus, penum peni, penus penŏris: buxus, buxum: capulus, lum: viſcus, cum: cornu, cornum: eventus, tum: fimus, mum: angiportus tus, angiportum ti, angiportus ti: cacabus, bum: caduceus, um: calcaneus, um: callus, lum: calvities, um: candelaber, brum, capo, capus: currus, rum: catinus, num: catillus, lum: catinulus, lum: cavus, vum: cingulus, lum: coccus, cum: clivus, vum: cementarius, um: crocus, cum: chryſtallus, lum: dorſus, um: faſcinus, um: galerus, rum: ganea, um gauſape, gauſapes, gauſapa, gauſapum: gipſus, um: labruſca, cum: helleborus, um: inceſtus, tum: malluvia, um: mandibula, um: mariſcus, cum: mulctrale tra, trum: palatus, tum: nardus, nardum: patibulus, lum: pileus, um: piſtrina, um: porrus, rum: pulviſculus, lum: ſarculus, lum: ſupparus, rus: thymus, mum: ſcalpellus, lum: peniculus, penicillus, lum: ſcrupulus, lum: caupo, cupo; cupa, capa: batilius, lum: cochleum, cochlis, cochlidium: corallius, um: expenſa, um: contagio, contages, contagium: conventus, tum: hibiſcus, cum: lixivia, um: pavus, pavo: Pergamus, mum: dupondius, vm: chirographus, phum: amygdala, lum: penaria. um.

II. Theſe redound in termination, and ſome in declenſon, but not in gender: gibbus, ber: cucumis, mer: ſtipis, ſtips: cinis, ner; vomis, mer: ſcobis, ſcobs: pulvis, ver: pubes, ber: honor, nos: labor, bos: ador, dos: arbor, bos: vapor, pos: delphin, phinus: apes, pis: plebs, plebis, plebes: elephas, phantus: Congrus, ger, Meleagrus, ger: Teucrus, cer.

III. Theſe redound in declenſon onely. Laurus, quercus, pinus, ficus, penus, domus, lacus, colus, cornus, {n. p.} a tree, which are of the ſecond pariſyllable, and contract declenſon.

The Subſtantiue abſolute is interp𝔯eted: the Participle followeth.

 

Of the participle Subſtantiue.

A Participle hath certaine accidents of a Subſtantiue, to wit, Caſe, and declenſon, but the ſignification of a verbe.

It is a gerund, o𝔯 a ſupine.

 

Of the Gerund.

The Gerund is of the ſecond pariſyllable, and is thus declined.

Nom.

Amandum.

Gen.

Amandi.

Dat.

Amando.

Accuſat.

Amandum.

Voc.

Caret.

Abl.

Amando.

 

Of the Supine.

The Supine, is of the declenſon contract, and is thus declined.

Accuſat.

Amatum.

a Diptote.

Ablat.

Amatu.

 

It ſerueth rather fo𝔯 elegancie and copie, than fo𝔯 neceſsitie.

Thus farre of the Subſtantiue: the Adiectiue followeth.

 

Of a Noune Adiectiue. {n. p.}

A NOVNE Adiectiue cannot ſtand alone in reaſon, o𝔯 ſignification, but muſt needes be ioyned to a a58 Suſtantiue: as, bonus vir, ingenuus puer, liber craſſus, murus âlbus.

Of Adiectiues ſome are abſolute, ſome are Participles.

The abſolute is p𝔯oper, o𝔯 common.

The Adiectiue p𝔯oper, ſignifieth an affection p𝔯oper to the thing alone, to which it is ioyned: as, Gradivus is p𝔯operly attributed to Mars, Quirinus, to Romulus, Enoſigæus to Neptune. And are therefo𝔯e ſometimes put alone without the Subſtantiues: as, Verg. Remus, cum fratre Quirino, Iura dabant.

The Adiectiues common, ſignifieth an affection common to many Subſtantiues: as, piger, alacris, candidus, clemens.

 

Of the accidents of an Adiectiue.

Seauen accidents befall an Adiectiue: Kind, Figure, Nomber, Caſe, Declenſon, Gender, and Compariſon.

 

Of Kinde.

AN Adiectiue of the p𝔯imitiue kind, is Interrogatiue, o𝔯 Numerall.

Interrogatiues are theſe: quis, vter, qualis, quantus, quotus, quot, nunquis: which are alſo ſometimes vſed indefinitely, ſometimes a59relatiuely. To theſe adde their Redditiues, talis, tantus, tot.

 

Of numerals there be diuers kindes.

I. Cardinals, whereby things are abſolutely numb𝔯ed, {n. p.} as, vnus, duo, tres, quatuor, quinque, ſex, &c.

II. O𝔯dinals, whereby things are numb𝔯ed acco𝔯ding to their o𝔯der: as, primus, ſecundus, tertius, &c.

III. Diſtributiues, whereby the ſame number is diſtributed to euery one of many things: as, creabantur olim bini conſules, i, per ſingulos annos duo. Fo𝔯 ſo the O𝔯atours (but not the Poëts) doe vſe the ſignification of theſe nounes. Binus, o𝔯 bini, two diſtributed to each thing, ternus o𝔯 terni, th𝔯ee to each thing, 𝔈c.

IIII. Partitiues, which either ſignifie many things ſeuerally: as, quiſque, vnuſquiſque, vterque, neuter: o𝔯 one thing of many: as, alter, alius, aliquis, cætera, reliquus. To which may bee added, quilibet, quivis, alteruter.

V. Uniuerſals, which ſignifie the whole nature of the Subſtantiue: as, omins, conctus, nullus, nemo nihil, totus. Omnis ſignifieth all the particulars o𝔯 ſeuerals of the diſcreete quantitie: Totus, the parts of the continued. To theſe adde i, compound Interrogatiues, which are Infinites: as, quiſquis, qualisqualis, quantusquantus, quotusquotus, vteruter, quotquot: and compounded with cunque: as, quicunque, qualiscunque, quantuscunque, quotuſcunque, quotcunque, and vniuerſus, i. ſimul totus, o𝔯 ſimul omnis.

VI. Particulars, which ſignifie not the whole nature, but ſome part of the Subſtantiue: as, aliquis, quiſquam, vllus, quidam.

 

Of the Deriuatiue.

AN adiectiue is deriued of ſome other wo𝔯d, o𝔯 of it ſelfe. {n. p.}

I. Of the Subſtantiue p𝔯oper, whether gentile: as, græcus, Latinus, Hæbræus, Anglus, o𝔯 ſignifying a mo𝔯e particular place: as, Eboracenſis, Londinenſis, Cantabrigienſis, Oxonienſis, Dorobornienſis, Ætonenſis.

II. Of the Subſtantiue common are deriued moſt adiectiues: as, herilis, ſervilis, regius, paternus, hortenſis, agreſtis, maritimus, montanus, 𝔈c.

III. Of the Aduerbe: as, hodiernus, heſternus, craſtinus, clandeſtinus.

IIII. Of the p𝔯epoſition: as, ſupernus, ſupinus, poſterior, inferior, &c.

 

Of the Verball.

V. Of the verbe, whether it be gerundiue, o𝔯 ſupinall.

Adiectiues are made of the gerundiue, whether it be actiue, o𝔯 paſſiue.

They are made of the gerundiue, actiue, two wayes.

I. By taking away the verball ſignification: as, abundans, amans, audiens, abſtinens, efficiens, ferens, fugitans, furens, negligens, patiens, præſtans reuerens, ſeruans, appetens, cupiens, experiens fugiens, fidens, metuens, obſeruans, potens, ſitiens, and all that may be compared: whoſe engliſh moſt commonly end in ant, o𝔯 ent.

II. By changing ans, o𝔯 ens into bundus, which are vſed inſtead of verbs, frequentatiues, that are wanting: therefo𝔯e, becauſe we cannot ſay, luſitans riſitans, erritans, populitans, vititans, moritans, rubitans, furitans, lætitans, we ſay, ludibundus, ridibundus, errabundus, populabundus, vitabundus, moribundus, furibundus, lætabundus: but rubicundus, not rubibundus. {n. p.}

They are made of the gerundiue paſſiue alſo two wayes.

I. By taking away the verball ſignification: as amandus, docendus, videndus, ſcribendus, as, puër amandus, a louely childe. Legendis veteribus proficis, by old autours reading thou p𝔯ofiteſt.

II. By changing ndus into bilis, as amabilis, deteſtabilis, penetrabilis, audibilis, docibilis, &c. ſignifying paſſiuely.

Adiectiues are made of the ſupinall actiue, and paſſiue two wayes.

I. By taking away the verball ſignification: as, nociturus, viſurus, prætermiſſurus, &c. ſo conſideratus, circumſpectus diſertus, cautus, tutus, ignotus, argutus, falſus, contentus, tacitus, profuſus, fluxus, ſcitus, diſcretus, adultus, defectus, doctus, indoctus, conſultus, eruditus, expertus, lapſus, inactus, ſuſpenſus, and all that may be compared.

II. By changing tus, Sus, xus, into tilis, filis, xilis, whice ſignifie as their Supinalls doe ſometimes actiuely, ſometimes paſſiuely: as, fictilis, coctilis, raſilis, penſilis, flexilis, tortilis tonatilis, futilis, ſculptilis, altilis, volatilis, fiſſilis, vmbratilis, verſatilis, ductilis, plicatilis, fiſſilis, ſolutilis, ſectilis, docilis, fragilis, futilis, fluuiatilis, which ſignifie, paſſiuely, vnleſſe their verbs want the paſſiue voice

Adiectiues are deriued alſo of themſelues to wite diminutiues and comparatiues.

Diminitiues follow the rules of the ſubſtantiue: as, parvulus, gemellus, integellus, intedulus, limatulus, politulus, putidulus, vllus, majuſculus, minuſculus, &c.

Comparatiues are deriued of their abſolutes: as, durior, duriſſimus, of durus. {n. p.}

 

Of Figure.

Figure, is either ſimple: as, iuſtus, o𝔯 compound: as, iniuſtus, o𝔯 decompound: as, irreparabilis.

 

Of Declenſon and Gender.

THE declenſon of the adiectiues is knowne by the termination. And all adiectiues are of euery gender, which is diſtinguiſhed by the termination alſo.

The termination is ſimple, o𝔯 manifold.

The ſimple termination is when th𝔯ee genders are comp𝔯ehended vnder one voyce: as, fælix, teres amans, particeps &c. Of ſuch like terminations are all Adiectiues of the firſt Impariſyllable: as.

Singulariter.

Nomin.

fælix

Pluraliter.

No.

fælices, & fælicia.

Genit.

fælicis.

Genetiuo.

fælicium.

Datiuo

fælici.

Datiuo.

fælicibus.

Acc.

fælicĕ, & fælix.

Acc.

fælices, & fælicia.

Voc. ô,

fælix

V.ô

fælices, & fælicia

Abl.

fælice, &, ci.

Ablat.

fælicibus.

The manifold termination is double, o𝔯 th𝔯eefold.

The double termination comp𝔯ehendeth the th𝔯ee genders vnder two voices: the maſculine, and feminine, alwayes ending in is, the neuter, in e, except comparatiues, that end in or, and us: as triſtis, triſte: triſtior, triſtius. They are of the firſt declenſon, impariſyllable not increaſing in the genetiue caſe: except comparatiues that increaſe by ŏris.

Singulariter.

Nom.

triſtis,  triſte.

Pluraliter.

Nom.

triſtes, triſtia.

Genetivo,

triſtis.

Gene.

triſtium.

Dativo,

triſti.

Datiuo,

triſtibus.

Acc.

triſtem, triſte

Acc.

triſtes, triſtia

Voc. ô,

triſtis, triſte.

V.ô

triſtes, triſtia.

Ablativo,

triſti.

Ablativo.

triſtibus. {n. p.}

The th𝔯eefold termination, is, when the th𝔯ee genders are exp𝔯eſſed by th𝔯ee voyces. the maſculine ending in er, ur, us: the feminine in a, the neuter in um. The feminine is of the firſt impariſyllable, and the other two of the ſecond.

Singulariter.

Nom.

bonus, a, um.

Pluraliter.

Nom.

boni, æ, a.

Gen.

boni, æ, i.

Gen.

bonorum, arŭ, orŭ

Dat.

bono, æ, o.

Dat.

bonis.

Acc.

bonum, am, um.

Acc.

bonos, as, æ.

Voc.

bone, a, um.

Voc.

boni, æ a.

Ab.

bono, a, o.

Ab.

bonis.

But theſe eight with their compounds make the genetiue caſe singular in ïus, the datiue in j, to wite vnus, totus, ſolus: and alſo vllus, alius alter, vter, neuter, which fiue lacke the vocatiue caſe. Vnus laketh the plurall number, except it be ioyned with a wo𝔯d, that lacketh the ſingular: as, vnæ literæ, vna, mænia.

Singulariter.

Nom.

vnus, a um.

Pluraliter.

Nomini.

vni, æ, a.

Gen.

vnius.

Gen.

vnorum, arum, oruŭ.

Dat.

vni.

Dativo.

vnis.

Acc.

vnum, am, um

Acc.

vnos, as, a.

Voc.

vne, a, um.

Voc.

vni, vnæ, a.

Ab.

vno, a, o.

Ab.

vnis. and ſo the reſt.

 

Of Compariſon.

COmpariſon is, whereby the ſignification of many adiectiues is increaſed, o𝔯 deminiſhed. Therebe two degrees of compariſon, after the abſolute, o𝔯 poſitiue.

The comparatiue ſomewhat exceedeth the poſitiue in ſignification. And it either hath this engliſh wo𝔯d (mo𝔯e) befo𝔯e it, o𝔯 the ſyllable (er) in {n. p.} the end of it: as, durior, mo𝔯e hard, harder.

The ſuperlatiue exedeth the poſitiue in the higheſt degree. And it hath either this engliſh wo𝔯d (moſt) befo𝔯e it, o𝔯 the ſyllable (eſt) in the end: as, duriſſimus, moſt hard hardeſt.

Compariſon, is perfect, o𝔯 defectiue.

Perfect compariſon hath both degrees. It is regular, o𝔯 Irregular.

Regular is, when the comparatiue, and ſuperlatiue are fo𝔯med of the firſt caſe of the poſitiue in j, that by putting to or, and us, this, by putting to ſ, and ſimus: as, duri, durior durius triſti triſtior, triſtius, duriſſimus, triſtiſſimus.

Irregular compariſon departeth from this rule: bonus. melior, optimus, malus, pejor peſſimus, Parvus, minor, minimus. Multus plurimus, multa plurima, multum, plus, plurimum.

If the nominatiue of the poſitiue endeth in er, the ſuperlatiue is fo𝔯med of it, by putting to rimus: as pulcher, pulcherimus, inger ingerrimus, tener tenerimus. But dextimus of dexter: maturimus, and maturiſſimus, of matur vnuſuall.

Theſe ſix in lis, do fo𝔯me the ſuperlatiue, by changing lis, into limus: as, facilis, agilis, gracilis, docilis, humilis, ſimilis.

Compounds of dico, volo, facio, make entior, and entiſſimus: maledicus, maledicentior, maledicentiſſimu:s Benevolus, benevolentior, benevolentiſſimus magnificus, magnificentior, magnificentiſſimus.

To theſe adde, vetus, veterior, veterrimus: nequam, nequior, nequiſſimus: dives, divitior, ditiſſimus, frugi, frugalior, frugaliſſimus.

If a vowell come befo𝔯e us, it is compared by magis, and maximè: as, pius, magis pius, maximè pius: aſſiduus, magis aſſiduus, maximè aſſiduus. {G}

 

Defectiue Compariſon

Ocyor, ociſſimus, of ὠϰύς,

Siniſter, ſiniſterior.

Potior, potiſſimus.

Iuvenis, iunior.

Inclytus, inclytiſſimus.

Senex, ſenior, maximus natu.

Opimus, opimor.

Ingens ingentior.

Novus, noviſſimus, nevv.

Infinitus, infinitior.

Noviſſimus, laſt.

Satur, ſaturior.

Adoleſcens adoleſcentior.

Aſſiduus aſſiduior.

mo𝔯e ſeldome.

Meritus, meritiſſimus.

Strenuus, ſtrenuior

 

Theſe Superlatiues are very ſeldome vſed.

Egregiſſimus.

Perpetuiſſimus.

Mitificiſſimus.

Tuiſſimus.

Pientiſſimus, and pijſſimus.

Exiguiſſimus, Ovid.

Ipſiſſimus.

Multiſſimus, Cic.

 

Of the Heteroclyte.

THe Heteroclyte is redounding, o𝔯 defectiue.

Theſe adiectiues following being of the dooble termination, redound in the nominatiue caſe: as Campeſter, campeſtris, ſtre, volucer, cris, cre: Celeber, bris, bre: celer, ris, re: So, ſaluber, pedeſter, equeſter, acer, paluſter, alacer, ſylveſter indecor, ris, re.

Theſe following redound in termination.

inermus inermis: imbecillus, imbecillis: bijugus, bijugis: enervus, enervis: declivus, declivis effrænus, effrenis: inſonnis, inſomnis: ſublimus ſublimis: inanimus, inanimis, elumbus, elumbis, hilarus, hilaris:

Theſe are defectiue in nomber, ambo, duo, tres, tria, mille, millia, ducenti, æ, a, trecenti, æ, a, cæteri, yet there is, decætero, But cæter, o𝔯 cæterus is now vtterly vnuſuall. Plærique hath onely the plurall; and vnus, ſometimes lacketh the ſingular. Likewiſe compounds of plus, as, complures, many, vſed poſitiuely, and perplures very many. {n. p.}

 

Of the participle Adiectiue.

THe Participle hath certaine accidents of the adiectiue, viz. Number, Caſe, Declenſon, Gender. But the ſignification of a verbe.

It is Gerundiue, o𝔯 Supinall.

The Gerundiue endeth in ans, and ens, o𝔯 in andus, and endus: as, amans, docens, amandus, docendus.

The Supinall endeth in Rus, o𝔯 in tus, ſus, xus, as, amaturus, viſurus, nexurus: amatus, viſus, nexus, and one in üus, as, mortuus.

The Gerundiue in ans, o𝔯 ens, is declined like fælix. But all the reſt like bonus. Thus much of the reall noune.

 

Of the Noune perſonall.

60A NOUNE perſonall ſignifieth one thing alone, with exp𝔯eſſe difference of a certaine perſon. It is therefo𝔯e called a P𝔯onoune.

There bee ſixteene P𝔯onounes, ego, tu, ſui, ille, ipſe, iſte, hic is, qui, meus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, noſtras, veſtras. To which is added the noune cuias.

Theſe th𝔯ee, ego, tu, ſui, are Subſtantiues, the reſt are Adiectiues.

Furthermo𝔯e, a P𝔯onoune is demonſtratiue, o𝔯 relatiue.

The demonſtratiue ſignifieth a perſon, by ſhewing, o𝔯 declaring it p𝔯imarily: whereof there bee 8. ego, tu, ſui, ille, ipſe, iſte, his, is.

Ego, ſignifieth, o𝔯 ſheweth himſelfe: as, ego ſcribo. Therefo𝔯e it is called the firſt perſon. {G 2}

Tu, ſheweth him, to whom we ſpeake: Therfo𝔯e it is called the ſecond perſon: as, tu ſcribis. And euery vocatiue caſe is of this perſon: as, ô Amarylli.

The other demonſtratiues ſhew the thing, whereof we ſpeake: as, ille ſcribit. Therefo𝔯e all maner of nounes, except ego, and tu, are of the third perſon.

Sui, with his derivatiue ſuus, ſheweth the perſon whereof we ſpeake, recip𝔯ocally, i. it hath reſpect, o𝔯 relation to the ſame thing that went befo𝔯e: as Petrus nimium admiratur ſe. Parcit erroribus ſuis.

Hic, ſheweth him, that is with me, o𝔯 next to me.

Iſte, ſheweth him, that is with thee, o𝔯 next to thee. Which we alſo vſe in ſpeaking of a thing with contempt: as, Iſtum æmulum quoad poteris, ab ea pellito.

Ille, ſheweth him, that is a part from vs both, which we alſo vſe in ſhewing the eminence, and excellence of a thing: as, Alexander, ille magnus.

Ipſe, hath the ſignification of the th𝔯ee perſons: as, ipſe vidi, ipſe videris, ipſe dixit. And it is ioyned to nounes, and p𝔯onounes: as, ipſe ego, ipſe ille, ipſe Hercules. Likewiſe, ille ego, ille ipſe, illo ſannio.

Is, ſheweth him, that is farre from vs, and it alſo ſheweth a perſon, o𝔯 thing emphatically: as, is eſto, it is euen he.

The relatiue maketh mention of, o𝔯 rehearſeth a thing that was ſhewed befo𝔯e: whereof there be ſixe, hic, ille, iſte, is, idem, qui.

Idem, ſignifieth the ſame, the very ſame, o𝔯 ſelfeſame. And it is ioyned to all perſons, as, ego idem adſum. Tu idem has nuptias perge facere. Idem {n. p.} eſt vetus.

Qui, is a p𝔯onoune infinite, hauing no certaine difference of perſon, but may indifferently be ioyned to all perſons.

When hic and ille haue reference to two things afo𝔯egoing, hic is referred to the latter, and ille to the fo𝔯mer moſt commonly: as, agricolæ contrarium eſt paſtoris propoſitum: Ille (agricola) quammaximo ſubacto, & puro ſolo gaudet, hic (paſtor) novali, graminoſoque. But ſometimes they are referred contrarily.

 

Of the Accidents of a pronoune.

Seauen accidents befall a p𝔯onoune: Kind, Figure, Number, Caſe, Declenſon, Perſon.

 

Of Kinde.

OF P𝔯onounes, ſome are p𝔯imitiues, ſome deriuatiues.

P𝔯imitiues are Demonſtratiues, and relatiues. Deriuatiues, are deriued of the P𝔯imitiues.

Of Deriuatiues ſome are Poſſeſsiues, ſome Gentiles.

Poſſeſsiues ſignifie ſomething, as pertaining to the poſſeſſour: there be fiue poſſeſsiues, meus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, which are deriued of mei, tui, ſui, noſtri, veſtri.

Gentiles, are ſo called becauſe they ſignifie pertaining to countries, nations, ſects, o𝔯 factions.

There be two Gentiles, noſtrâs, and veſtrâs, contracts of noſtratis, and veſtratis; to which is added the Interrogatiue cujês, o𝔯 cujâtis.

 

Of Figure.

FIgure is ſimple, as, Ego; o𝔯 compounded, as, Egomet. {G 3}

A p𝔯onoune is compounded of wo𝔯ds, o𝔯 by appoſition of ſyllables.

I. It is compounded with a Subſtantiue: as, cuiuſmodi, huiuſmodi, eiuſmodi, illiuſmodi, iſtiuſmodi.

II. With it ſelfe, and that in all caſes, o𝔯 in ſome.

In all caſes as, Egoipſe, tuipſe, ſuijpſius.

In ſome caſe: as, Nom. iſtic, iſtæc, iſtoc vel iſtuc. Ac. iſtunc, iſtanc, iſtoc, vel iſtuc. Ab. iſtoc, iſtac, iſtoc. Plur. iſtæc neuter, of iſte, and hic. So illic, illæc, illoc vel illuc, 𝔈c. of ille, and hic. So quiſquis, quicquid, Acc. quicquid, Ab. quoquo, quaqua, quoquo.

III. With an Aduerbe: as, eccum, eccam, eccos, eccas, of ecce, and eum. Ellum, ellam, ellos, ellas, of ecce, and illum. So idem, of is, and demùm.

IIII. With coniunctions: as, hiccine, hæccine, hoccine. Accuſat. hunccine, hanccine, hoccine, plu. hæccine neuter.

V. With P𝔯epoſitions: as, mecum, tecum, ſecum, nobiſcum, vobiſcum, quicum, quibuſcum.

Theſe are compound with appoſition of ſyllables whereof ſome are placed after the wo𝔯d, ſome befo𝔯e.

Met, is ſet after ego, tu, ſui, but the nominatiue of tu is excepted, and the genetiue of ſui.

Te, is ſet after tu, and te: as, tute, tete.

Ce, is ſet after theſe obliques in s, huius, illius, iſtius, his, hos, illos, iſtos, has, illas, iſtas.

Pte, is ſet after the ablatiue caſe of all poſſeſſiues: as, meôpte, meâpte, 𝔈c.

Dam, vis, liber, cunque, are ſet after qui: as, quidam quivis, 𝔈c.

Nam, piam, putas, quam, que, are ſet after quis: as, quiſnam, quiſpiam, 𝔈c. {n. p.}

Theſe are placed befo𝔯e the wo𝔯d, En, ne, alius, num, ſi: as, ecquis, nequis, aliquis, nunquis, ſiquis, which in the feminine ſingular, and neuter plurall haue qua, not quæ: as, ſiqua mulier, nequa flagitia.

 

Of Number, and Caſe.

NUmber, and Caſe, are the ſame with the noune reall.

 

Of Declenſon, and Gender.

EGo, tu, ſui, are of the maſculine gender, when a man ſpeaketh, but of the feminine, when a woman ſpeaketh. And they are of a peculiar manner of decling: as, are alſo, all demonſtratiues, and relatiues. As.

Singulatiter.

Nominatiuo Ego

Pluraliter.

Nominatiuo nos

Genitiuo mei

Ge. noſtrûm, vel noſtri

Datiuo mihi

Datiuo nobis

Accuſatiuo me

Accuſatiuo nos

Vocatiuo caret

Vocatiuo caret

Ablatiuo à me

Ablatiuo à nobis

 

Singulatiter.

Nominatiuo Tu

Pluraliter.

Nominatiuo vos

Genitiuo tui

Ge. veſtrûm vel veſtri

Datiuo tibi

Datiuo vobis

Accuſatiuo te

Accuſatiuo vos

Vocatiuo ô tu

Vocatiuo ô vos

Ablatiuo à te

Ablatiuo à vobis

 

Singulariter

Nominat. Caret

Accuſatiuo ſe

and

Genitiuo ſui

Vocatiuo caret

Pluraliter

Datiuo ſibi

Ablatiuo à ſe {G 4}

 

Singulatiter.

Nom iſte, iſta, iſtus

Pluraliter.

Nomin. Isti, istæ, iſta

Genitiuo istius

Ge. iſtorũ, iſtarũ, iſtorũ

Datiuo iſti.

Datiuo iſtis

Ac. iſtum iſtă, iſtud

Accu. iſtos, istas, iſta

Vocatiuo caret

Vocatiuo caret

Ablat. iſto, iſta, iſto

Ablatiuo istis.

 

So is illo declined, and alſo ipſe, but in the neuter gender it maketh ipſum, not ipſud.

 

Singulatiter.

Nominat. hoc, hæc, hoc

Pluraliter.

Nomin. hi, hæ, hæc

Genitiuo huius

Ge. horum, harũ, horũ

Datiuo huic

Datiuo his.

Accuſ. hunc, hanc, hoc

Acc. hos, has, hæc

Vocatiuo caret

Vocatiuo caret

Ablatiuo hoc, hac, hoc

Ablatiuo his.

 

Singulatiter.

Nominat. is, ea, id

Pluraliter.

Nominatiuo ij, eæ, ea

Genitiuo eius

Ge. eorũ, earũ, eorum

Datiuo ei

Datiuo ijs vel eis

Accu. eum, eam, id

Accuſ. eos, eas, ea

Vocatiuo caret

Vocatiuo caret

Ablatiuo eo, ea, eo.

Ablatiuo ijs vel eis.

 

 

 

So idem, eadem, idem.

 

Singulatiter.

Nom qui, quæ, quos

Pluraliter.

Nom. qui, quæ, quæ

Genitiuo cuius

g. quorum, quarũ, quorũ

Datiuo cui

Dat. quibus vel queis

Ac. quem, quã, quod

Accu. quos, quas, quæ

Vocat. caret.

Vocatiuo caret

Ab. quo, qua, quo, vel qui

Ab. quibus, vel queis

 

All Poſſeſſiues are declined like bonus, as meus, mea, meum, &c. and Gentiles like triſtis: as noſtras, and noſtrate. gen. noſtratis, &c. Tu, meus, noſter, and noſtras, haue onely the vocatiue caſe.

 

Of Perſon.

There be th𝔯ee perſons, as is afo𝔯eſayde, ego, {n. p.} tu, ille. And of the third perſon, are all maner of nounes.

A noune is interp𝔯eted. the verbe followeth.

 

Of A Verbe.

A VERBE, is a part of ſpech, that conſignifieth a noune, to exp𝔯eſſe the manifold meaning of the minde61.

In reſpect of the noune, which it conſignifieth, it is perſonall, o𝔯 imperſonall.

A Uerbe perſonall hath euermo𝔯e ſome perſon ioyned withit: as Ego, amo, I loue.

The imperſonall hath no perſon, and therefo𝔯e the ſigne (it) ſupplyeth the place thereof as oportet it behooueth.

II. Diuiſion.

In regard of ſignification onely, it is Subſtantiue, o𝔯 Adiectiue.

A verbe ſubſtantiue ſignifieth the being of the perſon, o𝔯 thing, as ſum, forem, fio, exiſto, exto.

The verbe adiectiue ſignifieth ſome other thing from the being thereof. Therefo𝔯e all verbs except theſe fiue are adiectiues.

III. Diuiſion.

In regard of ſignification, and voyce, a verbe is actiue, paſſiue, neuter, deponent, and common.

A verbe a62 actiue endeth in o, and ſignifieth to do as, amo, I loue, and by putting to r, it may be a paſſiue, as, amor.

A verbe b63 paſſiue endeth in r, and ſignifieth to ſuffer, as, amor I am loued, and by taking away, r, it may be an actiue, as, amo.

A verbe neuter endeth in o, o𝔯 m, and cannot take r, to make him a paſſiue: as, curro, ſum. It {n. p.} ſignifieth ſometimes actiuely, ſometimes paſſiuely.

 

Of Neuters therbe three kindes.

I. Some c64 ſignifie Action, o𝔯 doing complete, and perfited in the verbe it ſelfe, without paſſing into an outward patient: as, curro, ambulo, jaceo, dormio, pluit, ningit.

II. Some do ſignifie d65 paſſion, o𝔯 ſuffring complete, in the verbe it ſelfe, without receiuing the ſame from an outward agent: as, palleo, rubeo, albeſco, nigreſco, all which are neuters abſolute.

III. Some beſides theſe ſignifie action, o𝔯 doing which paſſeth into a wo𝔯d of their owne ſignification, o𝔯 a neere ſignification; and therefo𝔯e haue the third perſon ſinguler paſſiue, and often the third plurall: as, aro agrum, aratur, and arantur, agri: navigo, navigatur, and navigantur, ſo, poto, pecco, nato, bibo, curro, vivo, &c. To theſe adde all, to which the figure p𝔯oſopopeaia may be applyed.

Where note, that all neuters, which cannot be made imperſonalls in the actiue voyce, are made imperſonalls in the paſſiue voyce: as, curritur, ſtudetur.

A verbe deponent hath the paſſiue voyce, but the ſignification of the actiue, as loquor verbum, o𝔯 of the e66 neuter, as glorior.

A verbe common hath the paſſiue voyce, and both actiue, and paſſiue ſignification: as, oſculor te, oſculor a te, So criminor, conſolor, ſtipulor, ſpeculor, adulor, fruſtor, dignor, teſtor, interpretor, amplector, meditor, experior, ementior, &c.

 

Note.

I, comming immediately befo𝔯e any wo𝔯d is a 67ſigne, that it is a verbe actiue, deponent, o𝔯 neuter, tranſitiue: as, doceo I teach, experior, I trye: {n. p.} But, am, is, art, are, was, were, be, bene, are ſignes of the paſſiue, o𝔯 neuter of the paſſiue ſignification.

IIII. Diviſion.

In regard of conſtruction, a verbe is tranſitiue, o𝔯 intransitiue.

Intranſitiue, o𝔯 abſolute is any verbe whoſe action alone, without any caſe after it, ſatisfieth a queſtion made by quid agis? o𝔯 quid facis? as, quid agis? amo, I loue, o𝔯 am in loue, quid facis? Scribo I w𝔯ite, o𝔯 am w𝔯iting. Diſco I learne o𝔯 follow learning, 𝔈c. which otherwiſe are tranſitiues: as, amo magiſtrum. Scribo epiſtolas.

Tranſitiue, is euery verbe, whoſe action requireth ſome caſe of a noune, to abſolue, and perfect the ſame. It paſſeth immediatly into the accuſatiue caſe: and mediately into others moſt comonly: as, lego Vergilium, do tibi librum. Dedit mihi veſtem pignori propria manu.

 

Of the Accidents of a Verbe.

Eight Accidents befall a verbe, kinde, figure, moode, tenſe, Perſon, nomber, coniugation, fo𝔯mation.

 

Of Kinde.

Kinde, is twofolde. P𝔯imitiue: as, ferveo: Derivatiue: as, ferveſco.

 

Of Derivatiues.

THerebe fiue kindes of Derivatiues.

I. Meditatiues, o𝔯 argumentatiues, which ſignifie the continuation, intenſion, o𝔯 increaſing of the p𝔯imitiue: as, labaſco, caleſco, edormiſco, tumeſco albeſco, crudeſco, ſordeſco, &c. which haue the ſame signification with compounds of fio, which {n. p.} are wanting: as, ſordeſco, is the ſame, that ſordeſio, ſhould be. And many of theſe are vſed fo𝔯 the p𝔯imitiue: as conticeſco, adhæreſco, deliteſco, concupiſco, labaſco, obdormiſco, contremiſco, expaveſco, hiſco, timeſco, &c.

II. Frequentatiues, doe end in to, ſo, xo, tor: as, viſito, affecto, ſcriptito, viſo, quaſſo, nexo, texo, vexo, ſector, ſcitor, ſciſcitor and they ſignifie a certaine continuance, o𝔯 endeavour; as, dicito, I ſpeake often, viſo, I goe to ſee. To theſe adde vellico, fodico, albico, and ſuch like, called commonly Apparatiues.

III. Deſideratiues doe end in ŭrio: as, Lectŭrio, partŭrio, eſurio, cænaturio, canturio &c. I purpoſe deſyre, o𝔯 am about to read, 𝔈c.

IIII. Diminutiues end in lo, o𝔯 ſſo: as, ſorbillo, to ſipple, cantillo, to chirpe, pipe, o𝔯 whimper, pitiſſo, to bibble: of ſorbeo, canto, bibo.

V. Imitatiues, do ſignifie imitation, o𝔯 following: as, patriſſo, Atticiſſo, Platoniſſo which being deriued from the greeke are imp𝔯oper to the Latines: who rather vſe, Græcor, to riot, cornicor, to chatt, o𝔯 cackle, vulpinor, to play the foxe. Bacchor, to ſwagger, o𝔯 play the Deuill.

Some wo𝔯ds ſeeme to be deriued of the greeke: as, percello, of ϰέλλω, impleo, ϖλῶ, Do, of δόω, Plecto, of ϖλήτω, reboo, of βοάω.

 

Of Figure.

FIgure, is twofold, ſimple: as, facio, compound: as, calefacio. The affection of compound verbs, is Enallage.

 

Of Enallage. {n. p.}

ENallage, is when the firſt vowell of the p𝔯eſent tenſe and perfect tenſe with all tenſes fo𝔯med thereof is changed into, e, i, o𝔯 u.

I. Enallage of a into e.

Theſe verbs being compounded, damno, lacto, ſacro, fallo, arceo, fatiſcor, tracto, partio, carpo, patro, ſcando, ſpargo, pario, change a into e: as contemno, delecto, conſecro, refello, &c. comperio, and reperio (of pario) make comperi, and reperi in the p𝔯eterperf. The reſt make perui as, aperui, operui. Compeſco, and dipeſco, (of paſco) make peſcui in the p𝔯eterperf. the reſt admitte no change as, epaſco, epavi, &c.

II. Enallage of a, e, æ, into i.

Theſe verbs, being compounded, habeo, lateo, ſalio, ſtatuo, cado, Lædo, pango pegi, cano, quæro cædo, tango, egeo, teneo, taceo, ſapio, rapio, change the firſt vowell of all tenſes into i, as perhibio, perhibui, deliteo, delitui, &c. ſo concino, concinui, of cano, diſpliceo, diſplicui, except complaceo, and perplaceo: And depango, oppango, circumpango, repango, kepe a ſtill.

Præmineo, emineo, promineo, immineo (of maneo manſi) make minui in the p𝔯eterperf. others follow the ſimple verbe, as permaneo, remaneo, permanſi, remanſi, &c.

III. Enallage of a, into u,

Theſe verbs, Scaplo, calco, ſalto being compounded change a, into u: as, exculpo, inculco, reſulto. But claudo, quatio, lavo, loſe a as, occludo, excludo: percutio, excutio: proluo, diluo.

Exception.

Theſe following change the firſt vowell of the p𝔯eſent, but not of the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe, into i, as {n. p.} ago, emo, ſedeo, rego, frango, capio, jacio, lacio, ſpecio, premo: as redigo, redegi (of ago egi) reſideo reſedi (of ſedeo ſedi) &c.

But perago and ſatago admit no change. Dego, and cogo loſe a. Rego looſeth the firſt ſyllable in pergo, and ſurgo, in the p𝔯esent tenſe.

Facio being compounded with a p𝔯epoſition changeth a, into i: as, inficio, dificio, &c. elſe not, as, calfacio, terrifacio, benefacio.

Lego, being compounded with theſe p𝔯epoſitions, re, ſe, per, præ, ſub, trans admitteth no chang as, relego, ſelego, perlego, &c. otherwiſe it is changed: as, colligo, eligo, collegi, elegi, &c. But theſe th𝔯ee intelligo, diligo, negligo, make lexi, not legi in the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe.

 

Note.

Therebe many compounds, whoſe ſimples are not in vſe: as, defendo, offendo, aſpicio, conſpicio adipiſcor, experior, comperior, expedio, impedio, deleo, imbuo compello, appello, incendo, accendo, ingruo, congruo, inflīgo, inſtīgo, impleo, compleo, &c.

 

Of Moode.

MOode is the diverſe application of the verbe to the thing, which it conſignifieth.

It is the ſame, that caſe is in a noune.

It is finite, o𝔯 infinite.

A finite verbe, is determinate by noumber, and perſon.

It is of vnlike tenſes, o𝔯 like tenſes.

The finite of vnlike tenſes is the indicatiue, and imperatiue.

The Indicatiue moode ſheweth a reaſon true, o𝔯 falſe, as ego, amo, I loue: o𝔯 aſketh a queſtion as, amas tu? doeſt thou loue. {n. p.}

The Imperatiue biddeth, o𝔯 commaundeth: as, ama, loue thou.

The finite of like tenſes, is whoſe tenſes, are alike in all numbers, and perſons: it is abſolute o𝔯 ſubiunctiue.

The abſolute can abſolue, o𝔯 perfect a tenſe by it ſelfe. It is Optatiue, o𝔯 Potentiall.

The Optatiue wiſheth, o𝔯 deſireth, 𝔈 is knowne by theſe ſignes, would God, I pray, or God grant, and hath alwayes an aduerbe of wiſhing ioyned with it, as, vtinam amem.

The Potentiall is knowne by theſe ſignes, may, can, might, would, ſhould, o𝔯 ought; as, amem, I may, o𝔯 can loue. And it may ſtand without an aduerbe ioyned to it.

The Subiunctiue moode dependeth on another verbe in the ſame ſentence, to perfect his ſignification. And it hath euer ſome coniunction ioyned with it: as, cùm amarem, eram miſer.

The Infinite moode, is not determinate with number, and perſon. And it hath commonly the ſigne (to) ioyned to it: as, amare, to loue.

 

Of Tenſe.

TEnſe, is the difference of a verbe in regard of Tyme.

There be fiue tenſes, o𝔯 tymes.

1. The p𝔯eſent tenſe ſpeaketh of the tyme, that now is: as, amo, I loue.

2. The p𝔯eterimperfect tenſe ſpeaketh of the tyme not altogether paſt: as, amabam, I loued, o𝔯 did loue.

3. The p𝔯eterperfect tenſe ſpeaketh of the tyme fully paſt: as, amavi, I haue loued. It is knowne by {n. p.} the ſigne (haue).

4. The p𝔯eterpluperfect tenſe ſpeaketh of the tyme paſt long agoe: as, amaueram, I had loued. It is knowne by the ſigne (had).

5. The future tenſe ſpeaketh of the tyme to come: as, amabo, I ſhall, o𝔯 will loue. It is knowne by the ſigne, ſhall, o𝔯 will.

 

Of Perſon.

PErſon, is th𝔯eefold in both numbers, as hereafter appeareth.

 

Of Number.

NUmber, is two-fold, as hereafter appeareth.

 

Of Coniugation.

COniugation is anſwearable to Declenſon in a noune. Uerbes in o, haue foure Coniugations, which are thus knowne.

The firſt Coniugation, hath ā long befo𝔯e re, 𝔈 ris: as, amāre, amāris.

The ſecond hath ē long befo𝔯e re, and ris: as, docēre, docēris.

The third hath ĕ ſho𝔯t befo𝔯e re, and ris: as, legĕre, legĕris.

The fourth hath ī long befo𝔯e re, and ris: as, audīre, audīris.

But the verbe Sum hath a peculiar manner of declining.

 

The declining of the verbe Subſtantiue Sum.

 

Indicatiue Moode Singular. {n. p.}

 

1. Sum, I am, es, eſt.

Pluraliter.

Sumus, eſtis, ſunt.

tus.

2. Eram, I was, erat, erat.

eramus, eratis, erant.

ſus.

3. Fui, I haue beene, fuiſti, fuit.

fuimus, fuiſtis, fuêrunt vel êre.

xus.

4. Fueram, I had beene, ras, rat.

fueramus, ratis, rant.

 

5. Ero, I ſhall, o𝔯 will be, eris, erit.

erimus, eritis, erunt.

 

Imperatiue moode preſent tenſe.

Sis,

 

Sit,

Pluraliter.

 

Sitis,

Sint,

Es,

be thou

Eſto,

ſimus

Eſte,

Sunto

Eſto,

 

 

 

Eſtote

 

 

Optatiue moode Singular.

 

1. Sim, I p𝔯ay God I be, ſis, ſit.

Pluraliter.

ſimus, ſitis, ſint.

tus.

2. Eſſem, would God I were, ſes, ſet.

eſſemus, eſſetis, eſſent.

ſus.

3. fuerim, I p𝔯ay God I haue beene, ris, rit.

rimus, ritis, rint.

xus.

4. fuiſſem, would God I hadde beene, ſſes, ſſet.

iſſemus, iſſetis, iſſent.

 

5. fuero, God grant I be hereafter, ris, rit.

erimus, eritis, erint.

 

Potentiall moode Singular.

 

1. Sim, I may, o𝔯 can be, ſis, ſit.

Pluraliter.

ſimus, ſitis, ſint.

tus.

2. Eſſem, I might, o𝔯 could be, eſſes, eſſet.

eſſemus, eſſetis, eſſent.

ſus.

3. fuerim, I might, could, ſhould, o𝔯 ought to haue beene, ris, rit.

fuerimus, ritis, rint.

xus.

4. fuiſſem, I might, could, ſhould, o𝔯 ought to had beene, ſes, ſet.

fuiſſemus, ſetis, ſent.

 

5. fuero, I may, o𝔯 can be hereafter, ris, rit.

fuerimus, ritis, rint. {H}

 

Subiunctiue moode Singular, Cùm.

 

1. Sim, when I am, ſis, ſit.

Pluraliter.

ſimus, ſitis, ſint.

tus.

2. eſſem, when I was, eſſes, eſſet.

eſſemus, ſetis, ſent.

ſus.

3. fuerim, when I haue beene, ris, rit.

fuerimus, ritis, rint.

xus.

4. fuiſſem, when I had beene, ſſes, ſſet.

fuiſſemus, ſſetis, ſſent.

 

5. fuero, when I ſhall, o𝔯 will be, ris, rit.

fuerimus, ritis, rint.

 

Infinitiue moode.

1.

Eſſe, to be.

3.

fuiſſe, to haue o𝔯 had beene.

2.

 

4.

 

5.

Fore, vel futurum eſſe, to be hereafter. Particip. futurus.

 

Note.

THeſe tenſes ſupplie the want of diuerſe tenſes of Uerbes in or, name of the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe of the Indicatiue moode, and all tenſes fo𝔯med thereof: and are combined after this ſo𝔯t, after the Supinals in tus, ſus, xus, and üus: as, hereafter followeth.

 

 

 

r,

ris vel re,

 

tus, ſum, vel fui, i,

 

1. Con.

AMo, amas

 

amavi,

amare, amandi, do, dũ,

 

 

s,

 

dus,

 

 

 

amatum, amatu, amans, amaturus, to loue: to be loued. {n. p.}

 

 

 

r,

ris, re, ctus ſum, fui, i,

2. Con.

DOceo, doces, docui, docere, docendi, do, dum,

 

s,

 

dus,

 

doctum, doctu, docens, docturus, to teach: to bee taught.

 

 

r,

 

eris, ere, ctus ſum, fui, i,

3. Con.

Lego, legis, legi, legere, egendi, do, dum.

 

s,

 

dus.

 

lectum, lectu, legens, lecturus, to read, to be read.

 

 

r,

 

ris, re, tus ſum, fui, i.

4. Con.

Audio, audis, audivi, audire, audiendi, do, dum,

 

s,

 

dus

 

auditum, auditu, audiens auditurus to heare: to bee heard.

 

Of Deponents, and Commons.

DEponents, and Commons are declined like the paſſiue, ſauing that they haue the Gerunds, Supines, and participles actiue alſo, as appeareth in the examples. But when Deponents doe not gouerne an Accuſatiue after them, they want the gerundiue in dus.

 

Note.

Dor and der, are not vſed in the ſimple.

Neyther for, no𝔯 fer, which commeth of, for.

 

Here followeth a Table of the Declining of Verbes. {H 2}

 

 

 

A GLASSE OF VERBES.

 

1. Con.

 

 

 

s

 

 

 

 

 

 

ndi, do, dum,

rus,

 

 

o, as,

avi,

are,

atum.

2. Con.

 

 

 

s

 

 

 

 

 

ndi, do, dum,

rus,

 

eo, es,

üi,

ēre,

itum,

 

A Table whereby to decline all Verbes.

3. Con.

Bo, ſit

Co,

Do,

Go,

Ho,

Lo,

Mo,

No,

Po,

Quo, is,

Ro,

So,

Sco,

To,

Vo,

Cio,

Dio,

Gio,

Pio,

Rio,

Tio,

V-o.

Bi, ſit

Ci,

Di,

Xi,

Xi,

üi, li,

üi, mi

Vi, ni,

Psi, ndi, do, dũ

Qui, ere,

Vi,

Sivi, ſi,

Vi,

Ti,

Vi,

Ci,

Dij,

Gi,

Pi,

Ri,

Ssi,

üi.

Tum,

ctum,

Sum,

ctum,

ctum,

itum, ſum,

itum, tum,

tum,

Ptum, rus,

Tum, u,

Tum,

tum, ſum,

tum,

tum,

tum,

ctum,

Sum,

ctum,

Tum,

Sum,

ſſum,

itum.

The exceptions of all coniugations are to

be found in the rules of fo𝔯mation.

Change o, o𝔯 io into ĕre ,and it is the Infinitiue moode actiue: Change ĕre into i, and it is the Infinite pasſiue.

 

4. Con

 

 

 

s,

 

 

 

 

 

 

endi, do, dum,

rus,

 

 

io, is,

ivi,

ire,

itum,

 

NOTE

That the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe of euery coniugation, endeth like ſome one of the third, and hath the ſame Supine acco𝔯dingly. {n. p.}

 

 

Indicatiue moode præſent tenſe Singular.

am

d

are

d

is

d

Pluraliter.

are

d

are

d

are

d

I loue,

thou loueſt,

he loueth

wee loue,

yee loue,

they loue.

r,

 

ris vel re,

ur,

 

r

 

mini

 

ur

 

Amo,

amas,

amat,

Amamus,

amatis,

amant

r

 

ris,

re

ur

 

r

 

mini

 

ur

 

Doceo,

doces,

docet,

Docemus,

docetis,

docent,

r

 

eris,

re

ur,

 

r

 

mini

 

ur

 

Lego,

legis,

legit,

Legimus,

legitis,

legunt,

r

 

ris,

re

ur

 

r

 

mini

 

ur

 

Audio,

Audis,

audit,

Audimus,

auditis,

audiunt,

 

 

r

 

was

 

 

Preterimp.

Amabam,

 

I loued, o𝔯 did loue.

 

 

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur.

Docebam,

bas,

bat. Pl. bamus,

batis,

bant.

r

 

 

 

 

Legebam,

 

 

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

Audiebam

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus ſum vel fui,

 

 

 

Preterperfect.

Amavi,

 

 

bene.

tus ſum vel fui,

 

I haue loued.

 

Docui,

ſti, it.

Pl. ĭmus, iſtis, erunt vel êre

 

ctus ſum vel fui,

 

 

 

Legi,

 

 

 

tus ſum vel fui,

 

 

 

Audivi

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus eram vel fuerã

 

 

Preterplup.

Amaveram,

 

 

bene.

ctus eram vel fueram

 

I had loued.

Docueram,

ras, rat.

Pl. ramus, ratis, rant.

ctus eram vel fueram.

 

 

Legeram.

 

 

tus eram, vel fuerã,

 

 

Audiveram

 

 

{H 3}

 

 

r

 

be

d

 

 

Future.

Amabo,

 

I ſhall, o𝔯 will loue.

r

eris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

Docebo,

bis,

bit, Pl. bimus,

bitis,

bunt,

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

Legam,

es,

et, Pl. êmus,

etis,

ent,

r

 

 

 

 

Audiam

 

 

 

 

 

Imperatiue Moode, præſent tenſe Singular.

be thou loued. let him be loued.

loue thou, let him loue,

be

d

be yee loued,

let them be loued.

let vs loue.

loue yee,

loue they

 

Re

 

ur

 

 

r

mini

 

ur

 

 

Ama,

amet,

Plu. amemus,

Amate,

ament,

 

R

 

r

 

 

minor

 

r

 

 

Amato,

amato,

 

Amatote,

amanto.

 

 

Re

 

ur

 

 

r

mini

 

ur

 

 

Doce,

doceat,

Plu. doceamus,

docete,

doceant,

 

R

 

r

 

 

minor

 

r

 

 

Doceto,

doceto,

 

docetote,

docento,

 

 

Re

 

ur

 

 

r

mini

 

ur

 

 

Lege

legat,

Plu. legamus

legite,

leganto

 

R

 

r

 

 

minor

 

r

 

 

Legito,

legito,

 

Legitote,

legunto,

 

 

Re

 

ur

 

 

r

mini

 

ur

 

 

Audi,

audiat,

Plu. audiamus,

audite,

audiant,

 

r

 

r

 

 

minor

 

r

 

 

Audito,

audito,

 

auditote,

audiunto,

 

 

Optatiue Moode præſent tenſe Singular, Vtinam. {n. p.}

 

 

 

be

d

 

 

 

 

 

 

God grant I loue,

 

 

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

 

 

Amem,

ames,

amet,

Plu. amemus,

ametis,

ament,

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Doceam,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur.

 

 

Legam,

as,

at,

Plu. amus,

atis,

ant,

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Audam,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

 

 

were

 

 

 

 

Amarem,

 

Would god I loued, o𝔯 did loue.

 

Præterimperf.

r

ris, re

Ur

r

mini

ur

 

Docerem,

res,

ret,

Plu. remus,

retis,

rent.

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

Legerem,

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

Audirem,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Præterperf.

tus ſim fuerim,

 

 

beene

 

 

Amaverim,

 

I p𝔯ay god I haue loued.

ctus ſim fuerim

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuerim,

ris,

rit.

Plu. rĭmus,

itis,

rint.

ctus ſim fuerim,

 

 

 

 

 

Legerim,

 

 

 

 

 

tus ſim, fuerim,

 

 

 

 

 

Audiverim,

 

 

 

 

 

 

Præterplup.

tus eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

beene

 

 

Amaviſſem,

 

would god I had loued.

ctus eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

ri

 

 

Docuiſſem,

ſes,

ſet.

Plu. ſemus,

ſetis

ſent.

ctus eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

 

 

 

Legiſſem,

 

 

 

 

 

tus eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

 

 

 

Audiviſſem,

 

 

 

 

 

{H 4}

 

Fut. tenſe

tus ero, fuero,

 

 

be

 

 

Amavero,

 

God grant I loued hereafter.

ctus ero fuero,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuero,

ris,

rit.

Plu. rĭmus,

ritis,

rint.

ctus ero, fuero,

 

 

 

 

 

Legero,

 

 

 

 

 

tus ero, fuero,

 

 

 

 

 

Audivero,

 

 

 

 

 

 

Potentiall Moode præſent tenſe Singular.

 

 

be

D

 

 

 

 

 

I may, o𝔯 can loue,

 

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

 

Amem,

ames,

amet,

Plu. amemus,

ametis,

ament,

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

Doceam,

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

ris, vel re,

ur

r

mini

ur,

 

Legam,

as,

at.

Plu. amus,

atis,

ant,

 

r

 

 

 

 

 

 

Audiam,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

 

be

d

Præterimp.

Amarem,

 

I might, would, ſhould, ought, o𝔯 could, loue

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

Docerem

res,

ret. Plu.remus,

retis,

rent.

r

 

 

 

 

Legerem,

 

 

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

Audirem,

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus ſim, fuerim

 

beene

 

Præterperf.

Amaverim,

 

I might, would, ſhould, o𝔯 ought to haue loued

ctus ſim, fuerim,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docerim,

ris,

rit. Plu.rimus,

ritis,

rint.

ctus ſim, fuerim

 

 

 

 

Legerim,

 

 

 

 

tus ſim vel fuerim

 

 

 

 

Audīverim.

 

 

 

 

{n. p.}

 

 

tus eſſem, fuiſſem

 

beene

 

Præterpluperf.

Amaviſſem,

 

I might, would, ſhould, o𝔯 ought to had loued

ctus, eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuiſſem,

Ses,

ſet. Plu.ſemus,

ſetis

ſent.

ctus, eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

 

 

Legiſſem,

 

 

 

 

tus eſſem, fuiſſem

 

 

 

 

Audiviſſem.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus ero, fuero,

 

be

d

Fut. tenſe.

Amavero,

 

I may o𝔯 can, loue, hereafter.

ctus ero, fuero,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuero,

ris,

rit. Plu.rimus,

ritis,

rint.

ctus ero, fuero,

 

 

 

 

Legero,

 

 

 

 

tus ero, fuero,

 

 

 

 

Audivero,

 

 

 

 

 

Subiunctiue Moode præſent tenſe ſingular, Cùm.

 

 

am

d

 

 

when I loue,

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

Amem,

ames,

amet,

Plu. emus,

etis,

ent,

r

 

 

 

 

 

Doceam,

 

 

 

 

 

r

ris re,

ur

r

mini

ur

Legam,

as,

at.

Plu. amus,

atis,

ant,

r

 

 

 

 

 

Audiam,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

r

 

was

 

Præterimperf.

Amarem,

 

When I loued, o𝔯 did loue.

r

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

Doceam,

res,

ret. Plu.remus,

retis,

rent,

r

 

 

 

 

Legerem,

 

 

 

 

r

 

 

 

 

Audirem,

 

 

 

 

{n. p.}

 

 

tus ſim, fuerim

 

beene

 

Præterperf.

Amaverim,

 

when I haue loued.

ctus ſim, fuerim,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuerim,

ris,

rit. Plura. rimus,

ritis,

rint.

ctus ſim, fuerim

 

 

 

 

Legerim,

 

 

 

 

tus ſim, fuerim,

 

 

 

 

Audiverim.

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus eſſem, fuiſſem

 

beene

 

Præterpluperf.

Amaviſſem,

 

when I had loued.

ctus eſſem fuiſſem,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuiſſem,

ſes,

ſet. Plu.ſemus,

ſetis,

ſent.

ctus eſſem, fuiſſem,

 

 

 

 

Legiſſem,

 

 

 

 

tus eſſem, fuiſſem

 

 

 

 

Audiviſſem.

 

 

 

 

 

 

tus ero, fuero,

 

be

d

Fut. tenſe.

Amavero,

 

when I ſhall o𝔯 will loue.

ctus ero, fuero,

 

 

ti

 

 

Docuero,

ris,

rit. Plu. rimus,

ritis,

rint.

ctus ero, fuero,

 

 

 

 

Legero,

 

 

 

 

tus ero fuero,

 

 

 

 

Audivero,

 

 

 

 

 

Of the Verbe Infinite.

THe verbe Infinite, is not determinate by number, 𝔈 perſon.

It is abſolute, o𝔯 participiall.

The Infinitiue abſolute hath a double termination, re, of the p𝔯eſent tenſe, and p𝔯eterimperfect tenſe, and iſſe of the p𝔯eterperfect, and p𝔯eterpluperfect tenſe. {n. p.}

 

Præſent, and præterimp.

i

 

Præterperf. and

præterplu.

tũ eſſe fuiſſe.

 

Amare,

 

Amaviſſe,

 

i

 

ctũ eſſe, fuiſſe.

 

Docere,

be

d

 

Docuiſſe,

to haue, o𝔯

i

to

loue.

ctũ eſſe, fuiſſe.

beene

 

Legere,

 

Legiſſe,

had loued

i

 

tũ eſſe fuiſſe.

 

Audire,

 

Audiviſſe,

 

 

Of the participle Subſtantiue.

A Uerbe Participle hath certaine p𝔯operties of a noune, but the ſignification of a Uerbe.

It is a participle Subſtantiue, o𝔯 a participle Adiectiue.

The Participle Subſtantiue, is a gerund, o𝔯 a Supine.

 

Of the Gerund.

THe Gerund hath th𝔯ee terminations, di, do, dum, whereof di, and do, are the p𝔯eſent tenſe, and p𝔯eter tenſe, and dum is of the Future tenſe, with a certaine inſtant motion. And they ſignifie moſt commonly, actiuely, and ſometimes paſsiuely: as.

 

being loued.

 

being loued.

 

be loued.

Amandi,

of louing.

Amando

in louing.

Amandum

to loue.

Doce͂di,

of teaching.

Doce͂do,

in teaching

Docendũ,

to teach.

Lege͂di,

of reading.

Lege͂do,

in reading.

Lege͂dum,

to read.

Audie͂di,

of hearing,

Audie͂do

in hearing.

Audiendũ.

to heare.

 

Of the Supine.

THe Supine hath two terminations; the one in um, the other in u.

The Supine in um, is of the future tenſe, with a certaine inſtant motion, and ſignifieth actiuely: as. {n. p.}

Fut. tenſe.

Amatum,

to loue

 

Doctum,

to teach

This Supine is ſometimes exp𝔯eſſed by the Verbe ire, an actiue, and iri, a paſsiue: as.

Lectum,

to reade

Auditum,

to heare

 

Amatũ ire,

to loue,

 

Amatũ iri,

to be loued,

 

Doctũ ire,

to teach

hereafter

Doctũ iri,

to be taught

hereafter

Lectũ ire,

to read,

 

Lectũ iri,

to be read,

 

Auditũ ire,

to heare

 

Auditũ iri,

to be heard,

 

 

The Supine in u, is of the p𝔯eſent tenſe, and p𝔯eter tenſe, and ſignifieth paſsiuely: as,

Amatu,

to be loued.

Doctu,

to be taught.

Lectu,

to be read.

Auditu,

to be heard.

 

Of the participle Adiectiue.

THe Participle Adiectiue, is Gerundiue, o𝔯 Supinall.

The Gerundiue, is deriued of the Gerund. There be two Gerundiues, one of the p𝔯eſent tenſe; and another of the Future tenſe.

The Gerundiue of the p𝔯eſent tenſe hath his latine ending in ans, o𝔯 in ens, and his engliſh in ing, and it ſignifieth actiuely: as.

Præſe. tenſe.

Amans,

louing.

Imperſonalls haue no participles, except pænitans, dece͂s, libe͂s, pertæſus, pænide͂dus, pude͂dus

Docens,

teaching

Legens,

reading.

Audiens

hearing.

A Gerund of the Future tenſe hath his latine ending in andus, o𝔯 endus, and ſignifieth paſsiuely: as. {n. p.}

Fut. tenſe.

Amandus,

 

Loued,

 

Docendus,

to be

Taught,

hereafter.

Legendus,

 

Read,

 

Audiendus

 

Heard.

 

The third ſo𝔯t of Neuters, hauing the third perſon plurall, haue this tenſe: as, aranda terra.

This Gerundiue is vſed abſolutely with eſſe: as.

Fut. tenſe.

Amandum eſſe,

 

loued,

 

Docendum eſſe,

to be

taught,

hereafter

Legendum eſſe,

 

read,

 

Audiendum eſſe

 

heard.

 

 

Of the Supinall.

THe Supinall is made of the Supine. There be two Supinals: one of the Future tenſe, another of the P𝔯eter tenſe.

A Supinall of the Future tenſe hath his Latine ending in Rus, and ſignifieth actiuely, like his Supine: as.

Fut. tenſe.

Amaturus, to loue o𝔯 about to loue.

Docturus, to teach, o𝔯 about to teach.

Lecturus, to reade, o𝔯 about to reade.

Auditurus, to heare, o𝔯 about to heare.

It is vſed alſo abſolutely with eſse: as,

Fut. tenſe.

Amaturum eſſe,

To loue,

 

Docturum eſſe,

To teach,

hereafter.

Lecturum eſſe,

To read,

 

Auditurum eſſe,

To heare,

 

The Supinall of the P𝔯eter tenſe, hath his latine ending in tus, ſus, xus: as, amatus, viſus, nexus: 𝔈 his engliſh in d, t, n: as, loued, taught, ſlaine. But one endeth in üus: as, mortuus. Example˙ {n. p.}

Præt. tenſe.

Amatus,

Loued.

The third kind of Neuters afo𝔯eſaid haue this tenſe: as, arata terra.

Doctus,

Taught.

Lectus,

Read.

Auditus,

Heard.

It is vſed abſolutely with eſſe, and fuiſſe: as,

Amatum eſſe, vel fuiſſe,

 

loued.

Doctum eſſe, vel fuiſſe,

to haue, o𝔯 had beene,

taught.

Lectum eſſe, vel fuiſſe,

 

read.

Auditum eſſe, vel fuiſſe,

 

heard.

 

Anomalie of Coniugation.

THeſe Seauen Verbes following, poſsum, volo, nolo, malo, edo, fio, fero with his paſsiue feror, doe not altogether follow the rule of coniugation, which are thus declined.

68POſſum, potes, potui, poſſe, potens. To may o𝔯 can.

Volo, vis, volui, velle: volendi, volendo, volendum: ſupinis caret, volens. To wil o𝔯 to be willing.

69Nolo, non vis, nolui, nolle: nolendi, nolendo, nolendum: ſupinis caret, nolens. To nill o𝔯 to be vnwilling.

70Malo, mauis, malui, malle: malendi, malendo, malendum: ſupinis caret, malens. To haue rather, o𝔯 to be mo𝔯e willing.

Edo, edis vel es, edi, edere vel eſſe: edendi, edendo, edendum: eſum, eſu, vel eſtum, eſtu: edens, eſurus vel eſturus. To eate.

Fio, fis, factus ſum vel fui, fieri: factus, faciendus. To be made, o𝔯 done.

Fero, fers, tuli, ferre: ferendi, ferendo, ferendum: latum, latu: ferens, laturus. To beare o𝔯 ſuffer.

Feror, ferris vel ferre, latus ſum vel fui, ferri: latus, ferendus. To be bo𝔯ne o𝔯 ſuffered. {n. p.}

 

Indicatiue Moode.

Præſent tenſe, Singular.

POſsũ, potes, poteſt.

Pluraliter.

Poſſum9, poteſtis, poſſũt

Volo, vis, vult.

Volumus, vultis, volunt.

Nolo, non vis, non vult.

Nolumus, non vultis, nolunt.

Malo, mauis, mauult.

Malumus, mauultis, malunt

Edo, edis vel es, edit vel eſt.

Edimus, editis vel eſtis, edunt.

Fio, fis, fit.

Fimus, fitis, fiunt.

Fero, fers, fert.

Ferimus, fertis, ferunt.

Feror, ferris, vel re, fertur

Ferimur, ferimini, feruntur.

 

Præterimp. Sing.

Poteram,

 

Volebam,

 

Nolebam,

 

Malebam,

as, at. Pluraliter, amus, atis, ant.

Edebam,

 

Fiebam,

 

Ferebam,

 

Ferebar, baris vel bare, batur. Plur. bamur, bamini, bantus.

 

Præterperf.

Potui,

Malui,

 

Volui,

Edi,

iſti, it. P.imus, iſtis, êrunt vel êre.

Nolui,

Tuli,

 

 

 

 

Factus

ſum vel fui, &c.

Latus

 

 

 

Præterplu.

Potuerã,

Maluerã,

 

Voluerã,

Ederam,

ras, rat. P.ramus, ratis, rant.

Noluerã,

Tuleram,

 

 

 

 

Factus

eram vel fueram, &c.

Latus

 

 

{n. p.}

 

Potero, poteris, poterit. Plura.erimus, eritis, erint

Volam,

Edam,

 

Nolam,

Fiam,

es, et.Plural.emus, etis,ent.

Malam,

Feram,

 

Ferar, ferêris, vel rê. Plu.ferêmur, remini, rentur.

Poſſum, Volo, Malo, want the Imperatiue moode.

 

Imperatiue Moode.

Præſ.tenſe Sing.

Noli, nolito. Pluraliter, nolite, nolitote

Es, eſto,

edat,

 

edite, eſte,

edant

ede, edito

eſto,

P. Edamus,

eſtote,

edunto.

 

edito

 

editote.

 

Fito tu,

Fiat,

Pl. Fiamus

Fite,

Fiant,

 

fito,

 

fitote,

fiunto

Fer,

Ferat,

P. feramus,

ferte,

Ferant,

ferto,

ferto,

 

fertote

ferunto

Ferre,

Feratur,

p. feramur

Ferimini,

ferantur

ferror,

fertor,

 

feriminor

feruntor

 

Optatiue moode Vtinam.

Præſent tenſe.

Poſſim,

Nolim,

is, it. Plu.īmus, ītis, int.

Velim,

Malim,

 

Edam,

 

 

Fiam,

as, at. Plu.amus, atis, ant.

Feram,

 

 

Ferar, raris vel rare, ratur. Plu.ramur, ramini, rantur.

 

Præterimp.

Poſſem,

Ederem,

 

Vellem,

vel eſſem,

es, et. P.emus, etis, ent.

Nollem,

Fierem,

 

Mallem,

Ferrem,

(rentur.

Ferrer, rêris vel rêre, rêtur.Plu.remur, remini,

{n. p.}

Præterperf.

Potuerim,

Maluerim,

 

Voluerim,

Ederim,

ris, rit.Pl.rimus, ritis, rint.

Noluerim,

Tulerim,

 

 

 

 

Factus

ſim vel fuerim, &c.

Latus

 

Præterplu.

Potuiſſem,

Maluiſſem,

 

Voluiſſem,

Ediſſem,

ſes, ſet. P.ſemus, ſetis, ſent.

Noluiſſem,

Tuliſſem,

 

 

 

 

Factus

eſſem vel fuiſſem, &c.

Latus

 

Fut. tenſe.

Potuero,

Maluero,

 

Voluero,

Edero,

ris, rit. Plu. rimus, ritis, rint.

Noluero

Tulero,

 

 

 

 

Factus

ero vel fuero, &c. And ſo of the Potentiall and Subiunctiue as afo𝔯eſayde.

Latus

 

Infinitiue moode.

Preſent tenſe.

Poſſe

P𝔯eterperfect and P𝔯eterpluperfect tenſe

Potuiſſe,

 

 

 

Velle,

Voluiſſe,

 

 

 

Nolle,

Noluiſſe,

 

 

 

Malle,

Maluiſſe,

 

 

 

edere vel eſſe,

Ediſſe

Fu

Eſurum,

eſſe,

Ferre,

tuliſſe

 

Laturum

 

Fieri,

 

Factum eſſe vel fuiſſe

Ferri

 

Latum eſſe vel fuiſſe

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Future

Factum iri, vel faciendum eſſe,

 

 

tenſe.

Latum iri, vel ferendum eſſe.

 

{I}

 

Of Formation.

FO𝔯mation, is whereby all the tenſes of euerie moode, are fo𝔯med of the ſecond, o𝔯 firſt parſon of the p𝔯eſent tenſe of the Indicatiue moode.

 

I. Coniugation.

 

 

Ama-bam, bar.

 

 

 

 

Ama-bo, bor.

 

 

Of the p𝔯eſent tenſe ama-s is fo𝔯med the

Imparatiue moode Ama, whereof are fo𝔯med

Am-em, er.

 

 

Ama-rem, rer.

 

 

Ama-re, ri.

 

 

 

S

 

 

Ama-ndi

whereof, amans, by changing

di into s.

Ama-ndo

 

S

 

 

Ama-ndum, whereof amandus, whereof amandum eſſe.

 

 

 

 

P𝔯eterperf. tenſe by changing s, into vi, as amaui, whereof are fo𝔯med

Amav-eram.

 

 

Amav-erim.

 

 

Amavi-ſſem.

 

 

Amaui-ero.

 

 

Amavi-ſſe.

 

 

Ama-tum, whereof

Amatum

ire.

 

 

iri.

 

Amaturus, whereof

 

 

 

Amaturum eſſe

 

 

 

amatus ſum vel fui.

 

 

 

Amatu, whereof amatus, and

amatus eram, vel fueram

 

 

 

amatus ſim vel fuerim.

 

 

 

 

amatus eſſem vel fuiſſem

 

 

 

 

amatus ero, vel fuero.

 

 

 

 

amatum eſſe, vel fuiſſe

 

In the P𝔯eterperfect tenſe of this Coniugation ſixteene verbes are irregular, namely. {n. p.}

Iuvo juvi, nexo nexui, ſeco ſecui, neco necui, and necavi, mico micui, and dimicavi, plico plicui, frico fricui, domo domui, tono tonui, ſono ſonui, crepo crepui, but increpavī, and diſcrepavi, veto vetui, Pe𝔯f. vetavi, cubo cubui, do dedi, ſto ſteti.

Deponents in this Coniugation are regular.

 

II. Coniugation.

 

 

Habe-bam, bar.

 

 

 

 

Habe bo, bor.

 

 

Of the p𝔯eſent tenſe Habes, is fo𝔯med the

Imparatiue moode Habe, whereof are fo𝔯med

Habe-am, ar.

 

 

Habe-rem, rer.

 

 

Habe-re, ri.

 

 

 

s

 

 

Habe-ndi

whereof Habens, by changing

di into s.

Habe-ndo

 

s

 

 

Habe ndum, whereof Habendus by changing m, into s, whereof Habendum eſſe.

 

 

 

 

P𝔯eterperf. tenſe by changing s, into vi, as amaui, whereof are fo𝔯med

Habueram.

 

 

Habu-erim.

 

 

Habui-ſſem.

 

 

Habu-ero.

 

 

Abui-ſſe.

 

 

 

Habitum

ire.

Habitum, whereof

 

iri.

 

Habiturus, and habiturum eſſe.

 

 

Habitu whereof Habitus

Sum, vel fui.

 

 

 

Eram, vel fueram.

 

 

 

 

Sim, vel fuerim.

 

 

 

Eſſem, vel fuisſem.

 

 

 

 

Ero, vel fuero.

 

 

 

 

Habitum eſſe, vel fuiſſe.

 

{I 2}

In the P𝔯eterperfect tenſe of this Coniugation many verbs are irregular.

 

Beo.

iubeo iuſſi: ſorbeo, ſorbui, and ſorpſi.

 

Ceo.

luceo, luxi: polluceo, polluxi: mulceo, mulſi.

 

Deo.

Suadeo, ſuaſi: rideo, ardeo, ſi: video, vidi: ſedeo, ſedi.

 

 

Mordeo, momordi: tondeo, totondi: ſpondeo, ſpoſpondi: pendeo, pependi, which foure double the firſt ſyllable of the p𝔯eſent tenſe in the p𝔯eterimperfect. prandeo prandi: But gaudeo, gaviſus ſum: audeo auſus ſum, neutro paſſiues.

In

Geo.

fulgeo, fulſi: tergeo, turgeo, vrgeo, algeo, ſi: mulgeo, mulſi and mulxi: Indulgeo, ſi: augeo, auxi: lugeo, luxi, frigeo, frixi.

 

Leo.

pleo, plevi: neo, nevi: fleo, flevi: leo, deleo, levi: oleo, olevi ſoleo, ſolitus ſum, neutro paſſ.

 

Neo.

maneo, manſi: but, promineo, emineo, præmineo, immineo, üi.

 

Queo.

torqueo, torſi, liqueo, licui.

 

Reo.

hæreo, hæſi: mereo, merui: But mæreo, mæſtus, neutro paſſ.

 

Veo.

caveo, cavi, faveo, foveo, moveo, voveo paveo, vi: ferueo

 

bui, and vi, of ferbeo, and fervo, pingueo, pingui: Niveo, and conniveo, uivi, and nixi: cieo: civi: vieo, vievi.

Deponents in this Coniugation vſually make ĭtús: as, liceor, licitus, tueor, tuitus. But miſereor, miſerītus, and miſertus: fateor, faſſus: confiteor, profiteor, diffiteor, fesſus, reor, ratus.

 

III. Coniugation. {n. p.}

 

 

 

 

Lege-bam, bar.

 

 

 

 

Leg-am, ar. Fut.tenſe.

 

 

Imperat. moode

by changing o

into e, whereof

are fo𝔯med

Lega-m, ar. præſ. opt. pot. Sub.

 

 

Lege-rem, rer.

 

 

Lege-re, gi. ere, o𝔯 e, into i.

 

 

 

 

 

Lege-ndi,

 

 

 

 

Legendo,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Lege-ndum: whereof legendus; whereof legendum eſſe.

Of theſe laſt ſyllables of the p𝔯eſent tenſe, are fo𝔯med

Bo,

 

Bi,

 

 

Tum,

 

Co,

 

Ci,

 

 

ctum,

 

Do,

 

Di,

 

 

sum,

 

Go,

 

Xi,

 

 

ctum,

 

Ho,

 

Xi,

 

Leg-eram.

ctum,

 

Lo,

 

üi, li,

 

Leg-erim.

itum, ſum,

 

Mo,

 

üi, mi

 

Legi-ſſem.

itum, tum,

 

No,

 

Vi, ni,

 

Leg-ero.

tum,

 

um

Po,

 

Psi,

whereof are fo𝔯med

Legi-ſſe, 𝔈

Ptum,

whereof

 

Quo

Præterper. by changing theſe laſt ſyllables into

Qui,

ſo of all the

Tum,

urus

Ro,

Vi,

reſt.

Tum,

urum

So,

sivi, ſi

 

tum, ſum,

 

eſſe.

Sco,

Vi,

 

tum,

 

To,

Ti,

 

tum,

 

Vo,

 

Vi,

 

tum,

 

Cio,

 

Ci,

 

 

ctum,

 

 

Dio,

 

Di,

 

 

Sum,

ctum,

 

 

Gio,

 

Gi,

 

 

Tum,

 

 

Pio,

 

Pi,

 

Supines by changing theſe laſt ſyllables into

Sum,

 

 

Rio,

 

Ri,

 

ſum,

Sum, vel fui

 

Tio,

 

Ssi,

 

itum,

Erã, vel fuerã

 

uo.

 

üi.

 

 

Sim, vel fuerim

 

 

 

 

 

u: where of comes us

Eſſe͂, vel fuiſſe͂

 

 

 

 

 

Ero, vel fuero

 

 

 

 

 

um eſſe, vel

 

 

 

 

 

 

fuiſſe.

{I 3}

Note.

THe p𝔯eterperfect tenſe of euery coniugation endeth in one of theſe terminations, Bi, Ci, Di, 𝔈c. whereof the ſupine is fo𝔯med. Therefo𝔯e to knowe the ſupines of any coniugation, looke here fo𝔯 the termination of the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe; and it ſhoweth the ſupine ouer againſt it, vnleſſe it be excepted, as hereafter followeth.

 

I. Anomalie of the Imperat.moode.

IN the fo𝔯mation of the Imperatiue mood of this Coniugation, thoſe Uerbes that end in cio, dio, gio, pio, rio, tio, are irregular: fo𝔯 in the Imperat. moode they looſe i: as, jacio, jace. In the Imperfect tenſe, they keepe it: as, faciebam: ſo in the future tenſe, and in the p𝔯eſent tenſe of the Opt. pot. ſub. imitating the fourth Coniugation.

 

II. Anomalie of the præterperfect tenſe.

Bo, Bi.

lambo, lambi. But ſcribo, ſcripſi, nubo nupſi, cumbo, cubui.

Co, Ci.

vinco, vici. But parco, peperci, and parſi: dico dixi: duco, duxi.

Do, Di.

mando, mandi. But ſcindo, ſcidi: findo, fidi: fundo, fudi: tundo, tutudi: pendo, pependi: tendo, tetendo: pedo, pepêdi: cado, cecidi: cædo, cecîdi. Cedo, ceſſi, to depart, o𝔯 giue place. And theſe following change do, into ſi: as, vado, rado, lædo, ludo, divido, trudo, claudo, plaudo, rodo. But fio, fiſus ſum, neutropaſsiue.

Go, xi.

Iungo, iunxi. But go befo𝔯e r, is turned into ſi, ſpargo, ſparſi: lego, legi: ago, egi: tango, {n. p.} tetigi: pungo, punxi, and pupugi: frango, fregi: pango, pepigi, to bar-gaine: pegi, to ioyne: panxi, to ſing.

Ho, xi.

Traho, traxi: veho, vexi. Regular.

Lo, üi.

Colo, colui. But pſallo, pſalli: ſallo, ſalli: vello velli, vulſi: fallo, fefelli: cello, to b𝔯eake, ceculi, pello, pepuli.

Mo, üi.

Vomo, vomui. But, emo, emi: como, compſi: promo, prompſi: demo, dempſi: ſumo, ſumpſi: premo, preſſi.

No, vi.

Sino, ſivi: But temno, tempſi: ſterno, ſtravi: lino, lini, livi, levi, cerno, crevi: gigno, genui: pono, poſui: cano, cecini.

Po, pſi.

Scalpo, ſcalpſi. But rumpo, rupui: ſtripo, ſtrupui: cripo, crepui.

Quo, qui.

linquo, liqui. But coquo, coxi.

Ro, vi.

Sero, ſevi, to plant, o𝔯 ſow. But ſero, ſerui, to app𝔯oach too, o𝔯 to lay in o𝔯der: verro, verri, and verſi: vro, vſſi: gero, geſſi: quæro, quæſivi: tero, trivi: curro, cucurri.

So, ſivi.

arcerſo, arceſso, inceſso, laceſso. But capeſſo, capeſſi, and capeſſivi: faceſſo, faceſſi: viſo, viſi: pinſo, pinſui.

Sco, vi.

paſco, pavi. But poſco, popoſci: diſco, didici: quiniſco, quexi.

To, ti.

verto, ti. But ſiſto, ſtiti, to make to ſtand, ſterto, ſtertui: meto, meſſui: flecto, flexi: pecto, pexui, pexi: necto, nexui, nexi: mitto, miſi: peto, petij, petivi.

Vo, vi.

volvo, vi. But vivo, vixi: nexo, nexui: texo, texui.

Cio, ci.71

facio, feci: jacio, jeci. But lacio, lexi: ſpecio, ſpexi.

Dio, di.

fodio, fodi. Gio, gi: as, fugio, fugi. Pio, pi: as, capio, cepi. Cupio, pivi: rapio, rapui: ſapio, {I 4} ſapui, and ſapivi.

Rio, Ri.

Pario, peperi. Tio, Ssi: as, quatio, quaſſi.

üo, üi.

ſtatuo, ſtatui. But pluo, plui, and pluvi: ſtruo, ſtruxi: fluo, fluxi.

DEponents irregular. Labor, lapſus: gradior, greſſus: patior, paſsus: apiſcor, aptus: adipiſcor, adeptus: amplector, amplexus: comminiſcor, commentus: defatiſcor, defeſsus: expergiſcor, experrectus: iraſcor, iratus: naſcor, natus: nanciſcor, nactus: obliviſcos, oblitus: paciſcor, pactus: vlciſcor, vltus: fungor, functus: loquor, locutus: ſequor, ſecutus: quæror, quæſtus: revertor, reverſus: nitor, niſus, and nixus: vtor, vſus: fruor, fruitus, 𝔈 fructus: whereof commeth fretus: ringor, rictus: orior, ortus: morior, mortuus: tuor, and tueor, tuitus.

 

IIII. Coniugation.

Of the p𝔯eſ. tenſe Audi-s, is fo𝔯med the

Imperatiue moode Audi,

whereof are

fo𝔯med

Audi-ebam, bar. But ibam,

 

quibam, of eo, and queo.

 

Audi-am, ar. But ibo, quibo.

 

Audi-am, ar. præſ.opt.pot.ſub.

 

Audi-rem, rer.

 

Audi-re, ri.

 

 

 

s

 

 

Audi-endi, wherof audiens

 

 

Audi-endo,

 

 

Audi-endum, whereof audiendus, 𝔈 of that audiendum eſſe.

 

 

But eundi, queundi, do, dum.

 

 

 

 

P𝔯eterper. by changing

s into vi, as, audivi.

Audiv-eram.

 

Audiv-erim.

 

Audivi-ſſem.

 

 

 

Audiv-ero.

 

 

 

Audivi-ſſe. {n. p.}

 

 

 

 

 

 

whereof are fo𝔯med

Auditum, whereof

auditũ

ire.

 

 

 

iri.

 

 

Auditurus, 𝔈 rum eſſe.

 

 

Auditu, whereof auditus and

Auditus ſum, vel fui.

Auditus erã, vel fuerã.

 

 

 

Auditus ſim, vel fuerim

 

 

 

Auditus eſse͂, vel fuiſſe͂.

 

 

 

Auditus ero, vel fuero.

 

 

 

Auditũ eſſe, vel fuiſſe.

In the p𝔯eterperfect tenſe of this Coniugation, thirteene Uerbes are commonly irregular. Venio, veni: cambio, campſi: raucio, rauci: farcio, farci: ſarcio, ſarci: ſepio, ſepſi: ſentio, ſenſi: fulcio, fulſi: Haurio, hauſi: ſancio, ſanxi: vincio, vinxi: ſalio, ſalui, to leape: amicio, amicui. Theſe are ſeldome regular. But venio, neuer maketh venivi. Deponents Irreg. are, metior, menſus: orior, ortus.72

 

Of the Compound Preterperfect tenſe.

IN the Compound p𝔯eterperf. tenſe, theſe are irregular.

I. Simple verbs, that *73 double the firſt ſyllable of the p𝔯eſent tenſe, in the p𝔯eterperf. tenſe: doe not ſo in the compound: as, tetendi, contendi. Cello ceculi, perculi, and perculſi. Except præcurro, excurro, repungo. And compounds of do, diſco, ſto, poſco.

II. Plico, being compounded with Sub, o𝔯 a noune, fo𝔯meth plicavi: as, ſupplico, multiplico, duplico, triplico, 𝔈c. But applico, complico, replico, explico, üi, and avi. Lacio, elicui, inſero, inſerui, inſēvi.

III. Oleo, olüi fo𝔯meth olêvi: as, exoleo, exolēvi. {n. p.} But adolevi, and adolui: redolevi, and redolui: obolevi, and obolui: ſubolevi, and ſubolui. All compounds of pungo, fo𝔯me punxi: but, repungo, repunxi, and repupugi.

IIII. Compounds of do, of the third coniugation, make didi: as, addo, credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, obdo, condo, indo, trado, vendo, and the compounds of ſto, make ſtiti.

 

III. Anomalie of the Supine.

Bi, tum.

Bibi, bibitum. reg.

Ci, ctum.

feci, factum: jeci, jactum: ici, ictum, reg.

Di, Sum.

vidi, viſum. But theſe double s. pandi, paſſum: ſedi, ſeſſum: ſcidi, ſciſſum: fidi, fiſſum: fodi, foſſum. Dedi, datum.

Note, that the doubled ſyllable of the p𝔯eterperf. is not doubled in the ſupine: as, tetendi, tenſum, and tentum.

Gi, ctum.

Legi, lectum. But pegi, 𝔈 pepigi, pactum, fregi, fractum: tetegi, tactum: egi, actum: pupugi, punctum: fugi, fugitum.

Li, Sum.

Salli, ſalſum. Pepuli, pulſum: ceculi, culſũ: fefelli, falſum: tuli, latum.

Mi, Ni.

Pi, Qui. Tum: as, Emi, emptum: veni, ventum: cecini, cantum: capi, captum, of capio: but cæptum, of cæpio: rupi, ruptum, liqui, lictum.

Ri, Sum.

Verri, verſum. But peperi, partum.

Si, Sum.

Viſi, viſum. Some double s: as, miſi, miſſum: (but fulſi, fultum: hauſi, hauſtum, ſarſi, ſartum: farſi, fartum.) And theſe alſo. vſſi, vſtum: geſſi, geſtum: torſi, tortum, 𝔈 torſum: indulſi, indultum, and Indulſum. {n. p.}

Pſi, ptum.

Scripſi, ſcriptum. But campſi campſum.

Ti, tum.

ſteti, ſtatum, of ſto, ſtiti, ſtatum, of ſiſto. But verti, verſum.

Vi, tum.

flavi, flatum. But paui, paſtum: laui, lotum, lautum, lauatum, potavi, potum, potatum: favi, fatum: cavi, cautum: ſevi ſatum livi, and lini, litum: ſolvi, ſolutum: volvi, volutum: ſingultiui, ſingultum: vænivi, vænum: ſepelivi, ſepultum: adolevi, adultũ, ſobolavi, ſubolitum: but exolevi, exoletum.

üi, ĭtum.

Domui, domitum. But üi, of üo, fo𝔯meth ūtum: as, erui, erūtum. But rui, ruitum: ſecui, ſectum: necui, nectum: fricui, frictum: miſcui, miſtum amicui, amictum: torrui, toſtum: docui, doctum: tenui, tentum: conſului, conſultum: alui, altum alitum: ſalui, ſaltum. colui, and occului, cultum: pinſui, piſtum: rapui, raptum: ſerui, ſertum: texui, textum.

But theſe

change üi, into ſum cenſeo, cenſum: cellui celſum, meſſui, meſſum: nexui, nexum: pexui, pexum: patui, paſſum: carui, caſſum, and caritum.

Xi, ctum.

Vinxi, vinctum but theſe fiue leaue out n, finxi, fictum, minxi, mictum: pinxi, pictum: ſtrinxi ſtrictum: rinxi, rictum flexi, flexum: plexi, plexum: fixi, fixum: fluxi, fluxum, polluxi, polluctum.

 

Of the Compounde Supine.

IN the compound ſupine ſome verbes are irregular, Compounds of tunſum, make tuſum: of ruitum, rutum: of ſaltum, ſultum: of ſevi, ſatum. ſitum: Comedo, fo𝔯meth comeſum, and comeſtum: but the reſt, eſum only: of noſco novi, cognitum, and agnitum: But others fo𝔯me notum: Noſcitum {n. p.} is out of vſe.

Captum, factum, jactum, raptum, cantum, partum, ſparſum, carptum, fartum, change a, into e, as, conceptum, rejectum, perfectum, concentum, &c.

 

IIII. Anomalie of the Supinall in Rus.

THeſe Supinalls, are irregularly fo𝔯med of the Supine. Pariturus, of partum: naſciturus, of natum: ſonaturus, of ſonitum: arguiturus, of argutum: luiturus, of lutum: eruiturus, of erutum: noſciturus, of notum: moriturus, of the feigned ſupine mortuum: oriturus, of ortum: Oſurus, and futurus: ſecaturus of lectum: affricaturus, refricaturus, of frictum, tonaturus, of tonitum: juvaturus, of jutum: and others of the firſt coniugation, whoſe ſupine ends in ĭtum.

 

Heteroclytes, are redundant, or Defectiue.

 

Redundance in the Prætertenſes.

Cæno, cænavi, cænatus ſum juro, juravi, juratus, ſum: poto, potavi, potatus ſum, and, potus ſum: titubo, titubavi, titubatus ſum: carro, carui, caſſus ſum: prandeo, prandi, pranſus ſum: patuo, patui, paſſus ſum: placeo, placui, placitus ſum: Sueſco, ſuëvi, ſuetus ſum: væneo, venivi, venditus ſum: nubo, nupſi, nupta ſum: mereor meritus ſum, merui: And theſe Imperſonalls; licet licuit licitum eſt: libet, libuit, libitum eſt: tædet, tæduit, pertæſum, eſt: pudet, puduit, puditum eſt: piget, piguit, pigitum eſt: miſeret, miſeritum, and miſertum eſt. {n. p.}

Redundance in ſupine.

LAvi, lotum, lautum, lavatum: necui, necatum, nectum: plicui, plicitum, plicatum: potavi, potum patatum: tonui, tonitum, tonatum: carui, caſſum caritum: miſcui, miſtum, mixtum: Indulſi, indulſum, indultum: peperi, partum, pertium. torſi, terſum, tortum: alui, altum, alitum: præſtiti, præſtitum præſtatum: aſtitum, and aſtatum. tuitus ſum tutum and tuitum.

 

Defect in the Præterperfect tenſe.

SOme do bo𝔯row the P𝔯eterperfect tenſe of other verbes: and ſome haue no P𝔯eterperfect tenſe at all.

Theſe bo𝔯row. A deriuatiue in ſco vſed fo𝔯 the p𝔯imitiue, hath the p𝔯eter tenſe of the ſame: as, reviviſco, revixi, of vivo: ſo pertimeſco, ſciſco, adſciſco reſciſco, conſciſco. Siſto, ſtatui and ſtiti, of ſtatuor tepeſco, tepui, of tepeo: ferveſco, fervi, of fervo: cerno vidi, of video: quatio, concuſſi, of concutio: ferio, percuſſi, of percutio: meio, minxi, of mingo fido, ſedi, of ſedeo: tollo, ſuſtuli, of ſuffero: ſum, fui, of fuo: fero, tuli, of tulo: furo, inſanivi, of inſanio: veſcor, paſtus ſum, of paſcor: medeor medicatus ſum, of medicor: liquor, liquefactus ſum, of liquefīo: reminiſcor, recordatus ſum, of recordor.

 

Theſe haue no prætertenſe.

VErgo, ambigo, gliſco, fatiſco, hiſco, Polleo, nideo labo, labaſco, vrgeor, liquet the imperſonall.

All verbes in ſco, deriued of nounes, and therefo𝔯e hauing no p𝔯imitiue to bo𝔯row a p𝔯etertenſe, on: as puëraſco, ſylveſco, fruticeſco, ſterileſco, diteſco, {n. p.} veſperaſcit, albeſcit, &c. to theſe adde aveo, ſalveo, glabreo.

Paſſiues, whoſe actiues want the ſupines: as, metuor, timeor, &c.

Deſideratiues: as ſcripturio, iturio, micturio, cacaturio &c. Except eſurio, eſurivi: Parturio, parturivi.

 

Defect in the ſupine.

THeſe Uerbs haue no ſupine; o𝔯 a ſupine vnuſuall. Lambo, a74 mico, rudo, ſcabo, b75 parco, c76 diſpeſco, d77 diſco, quiniſco, e78 compeſco, f79 poſco, dego, ango, ſugo, lingo, mingo, ſatago, algeo, vrgeo, turgeo, pſallo, volo nolo, malo, labo, tremo, ſtrideo, ſtrido, flaveo, liveo, aveo, paveo, conniveo, ferveo, compounds of nuo: as, renuo, anuno of cado, except occaſum, and recaſum, ſo reſpuo, g80 linquo, h81 luo, metuo, cluo, frigeo calvo, ſterto, timeo, ſapio, luceo, arceo, whoſe compounds make ercitum,ingruo, of gruo.

All Neuters of the ſecond Coniugation in üi. Except oleo, doleo, placeo, taceo, pareo, careo, noceo, pateo, lateo, valeo, caleo. And the moſt verbs of this coniugation, are neuters.

 

Generall Defectiues.

82OVat, ovans, ovandi, 83dejero, 84pejero. Inquio, o𝔯 85inquam; inquis, inquit, inquiunt. Inquiſti, inquies, inquit, inque, inquito, inquiens, 86memento, mementote. 87Faxo, faxis, faxit, faxumus, faxitis, faxint, for faciam, o𝔯 fecero, 88forem, fores, foret, forent, fore. 89Quæſo, quæſumus. 90Auſim, auſis, auſit, auſimus, auſitis, auſint. Aiebam, aiebas, bat, bamus, batis, bant. 91Aias, aiat, aiamus, aiatis aiant aiens. Salvebis, 92ſalve, ſalveto, ſalvete, ſalvere, 93cedo, cedite, to tell, o𝔯 to reach. 94Infit, he ſaith, o𝔯 {n. p.} hath ſayd. 95Odi, 96cæpi, 97memini, 98novi, haue all the tenſes fo𝔯med of them: and they haue alſo the ſignification of the p𝔯eſent tenſe: as, memini, I doe remember.

 

Of Imperſonalls.

IMperſonalls, are declined in the voice of the third perſon ſingular, onely, whether actiue, o𝔯 paſſiue. And there is almoſt no perſonall but it may be made an imperſonall; as alſo no imperſonalls, but they may be made Perſonalls: Except, pudet, pænitet, oportet, libit, licet, liquet, decet, tædet, Piget: yet there is, pudeo, oportent, and oportebant, libent, licent, liquæo, deceo, tædeo, pigeo, but vnuſuall.

Significatiue words are expounded: Explanatiues follow.

 

Of Explanatiues.

AN Explanatiue wo𝔯d, is, whoſe ſignification ſerueth to explaine the ſignificatiue: and it explaineth either ſingle wo𝔯ds, whether nounes, o𝔯 verbs o𝔯 ſentences.

 

The Explanatiue of Nounes is caled a Præpoſition.

A P𝔯epoſition is a part of ſpeech, which being ſet befo𝔯e other parts doth fulfill, change, o𝔯 deminiſh the ſignification thereof.

It is ſet befo𝔯e other parts in compoſition: But peculiarly, befo𝔯e the Caſe of a noune, in appoſition, as ad, patrem. {n. p.} In regard whereof it p𝔯operly called a p𝔯epoſition: fo𝔯 otherwiſe being ſet alone, it goeth into the nature of an aduerbe.

Of p𝔯epoſitions, ſome are alwayes in compoſition, namely theſe ſixe, am, di, dis, re, ſe con: as, ambio, diduco, diſtraho, recipio, ſepono, condono. Some alwaies in appoſition: as apud, citra, erga, pone, ſecundum, circiter ſecus, verſus, penes, coram, palam, ſine, abſque, prope, tenus. The reſt are indifferent.

99In regard of their caſe o𝔯 caſuall wo𝔯d: Some are ſet befo𝔯e the accuſatiue: Some befo𝔯e the ablatiue: Some befo𝔯e both: Some after both. The miſplacing of them is called Anaſtrophe.

 

I.Theſe 32. are ſet before the Accuſatiue.

Ad.

To: ad te ibam.

 

Fo𝔯: ad nullas preces.

 

About: ad ducentos.

 

Towards: ad occaſum ſolis.

 

At: ad diem venit.

Apud.

At: apud forum.

 

With: apud Pompejum.

 

Of: apud majores factitato.

Cis- on this ſide: cis Tyberim.

Citra-without: citra muſicen.

Circiter. About: circiter meridiem.

Extra.

Without: extra muros.

 

Beſides: extra vnam ancillam.

Inter.

Betweene: inter os, and offam.

 

In time of: inter cænam.

 

and inter quietem.

 

Among: inter ipſos. {n. p.}

Ob.

Fo𝔯: ob Italiam.

 

Befo𝔯e: ob oculos.

Penes

In the power: me penes.

 

In: penes te culpa eſt.

Per. By, o𝔯 th𝔯ough: Per Galliam.

Propter

Fo𝔯: proper te.

 

Nigh, beſide: propter rivum.

Præter

Beſide: præter vnum.

 

Againſt: præter ſpem, opinionem.

 

About: præter cæteros.

 

Beyond: præter hominem.

 

Befo𝔯e: præter oculos.

Poſt.

After, behind: poſt carecta.

 

poſt tempus.

Intra.

Within: intra ſuam fortunam.

Secundum.

Beſide, o𝔯 nigh to: ſecundum aurem.

 

After: ſecundum deum parentes ſunt honorandi.

 

Fo𝔯: ſecundũ cauſam noſtram diſputant.

 

In: ſecundum quietem.

 

Upon: ſecundum ea deliberant.

 

Acco𝔯ding: ſecundum Pythagoras.

Supra.

Aboue: ſupra caput.

 

Beyond: ſupra morem.

Ante.

Befo𝔯e: ante calendas

Adve s ſus

Against, towards: Id gratum aduerſum te fuiſte gaudeo.

Aduerſum

Ouer, againſt: adverſum Antipolim.

Circum,

About.

Circa.

 

Contra.

Againſt.

Erga.

Towardes.

Infra.

Beneath.

Iuxta.

Beſide, o𝔯 nigh to.

Pone.

Behinde. {K}

Prope.

Nigh.

Trans.

On the further ſide.

Vltra.

Beyond.

Vſque.

Untill, euen to.

Secus.

By.

Verſus.

Towards.

 

II. Theſe 15. are ſet before the Ablatiue caſe.

A, Ab, Abs.

Of, from: a te accepi.

Of, o𝔯 out: a gente Auguſti, of Cæſars race.

Fo𝔯: a ſenatu ſtare. i. a parte ſenatus.

Against: defendo a frigore myrtos.

Beſide, o𝔯 againſt: non abs re eſt.

As touching: ab animo æger, a me pudica eſt.

Towardes: a ſole, a terra.

At, with: ab eo gratiam inibo.

Becauſe of, fo𝔯: a metu infamiæ, ένεϰα ab amore ſcribere.

Converſant, o𝔯 exerciſed about: ῶεςὶ.

A poculis eſt illi, his Cup-bearer.

A commentarijs, a ch𝔯onicler.

A libellis, the maiſter of Requeſts.

A memoria, a Reco𝔯der.

A rationibus, an Auditour.

A ſecretis, a ſecretarie.

Ab epiſtolis, a ſcribe o𝔯 clerke.

A pedibus, a Lackey.

A, is ſet befo𝔯e Conſonants. Abs befo𝔯e q, 𝔈 t: abs quivis, abs te. Ab moſt often befo𝔯e a vowell: and ſometimes a Conſonant: as, haud ab re eſt, tis not in vaine.

DE. {n. p.}

Of: Cæſar ſcripſit de grammatica.

Fo𝔯, from. Diſce id de me.

Fo𝔯, o𝔯 becauſe of: amas nos de fidicina iſtac.

Acco𝔯ding, after: de more. De ſententia tua.

By in: De nocte vigilare.

As touching, concerning: De cæteris rebus.

After: De media nocte miſſus.

E. EX.

Of: Ex auro. matter.

After, from: ex illo tempore. time.

Acco𝔯ding to, fo𝔯 ex dignitate, ex vſu, e repub. ex ſententia, ex pacto.

Of, in: e renibus laborat.

Out, of, in: e vinclis cauſam dicere.

Of, o𝔯 by: gradiva eſt è pamphilo.

On, from: 𝔈c. è contrario, contrariwiſe, e diverſo, on the other ſide: è facili, eaſily: e longuiquo, farre of: e regione, over againſt.

Pro.

Fo𝔯, becauſe of: pro iſtis, dictis, & factis.

Befo𝔯e: religato pro foribus cane.

In regard of, acco𝔯ding to: pro materia, pro re, pro tempore.

In: pro tribunali.

In defence of: ſtabat pro templo, pro Rabirio, Milone, &c.

In ſtead, o𝔯 right: pro vxore habet, pro nihilo habeo, duco &c. i. quaſi.

Præ.

Befo𝔯e: præ me fero.

Fo𝔯, by reaſon of: præ amore, luxuria.

In compariſon: præ illo ſordes.

Cum: With.

Coram: befo𝔯e, o𝔯 in p𝔯eſence, coram te.

Clam: p𝔯iuily, vnknowne to: clam te eſt, clam {K. 2.} patrem.

Sine, without: ſine Cerere, & libero friget venus.

Abſque,

Palam: openly.

Tenus: vntill, o𝔯 vp to: Capulo tenus. Barba tenus philoſophus. But if the caſuall wo𝔯d be the plurall number, it ſhall be the genitiue caſe alſo: as, aurium tenus, vp to the eares: genuum tenus, vp to the knees. Pectoribus tenus, vp to the b𝔯eaſt.

 

III. Theſe 4. are ſet before both Caſes.

In

Acc.

Towards in me benignus fuit.

Some adde to theſe, procul, as, Tac. procul cæde plin. procul Neapolim. procul muros.

 

 

Againſt: in te. In verrem.

 

 

To: hæc via ducit in vrbem.

 

 

Into: in partes ambas, in cineres.

 

Abl.

In: in te ſpes eſt.

 

Sub.

Accuſ.

To: ſub vmbram properemus.

 

 

By: ſub id tempus miſſus eſt.

 

 

Befo𝔯e: ſub noctem, a little befo𝔯e night. i. ante.

 

Ablat.

Under: ſub terra.

 

 

In: ſub nocte ſilenti.

 

 

Befo𝔯e: ſub judice lis eſt. i. coram.

Super.

Ablat.

Of: as, ſuper, ea re. i. de ea re.

 

 

Upon: fronde ſuper viridi, otherwiſe an accuſatiue.

Subter.

 

It is ſet befo𝔯e the accuſatiue, and ablatiue in the ſame ſignification: ſubter terram, ſubter aquis.

 

IIII. Theſe 4. are ſet before, or after.

Cum,

as

quibuſcum.

verſus

as

Angliam verſus.

Tenus

 

Pube tenus

vſque

 

Ad occide͂tem vſque.

 

Of Compariſon.

Compariſon befalleth certaine p𝔯epoſitions: as, {n. p.}

Citrà, citerior, citimus.

Extrà, exterior, extimus, extremus.

Intrà, interior, intimus.

Suprà, ſuperior, ſupremus, ſummus.

Infrà, inferior, infimus.

Poſt, poſterior, poſtremus.

Vltrà, vlterior, vltimus.

Propè, propior, proximus. Ovid

Antè, anterior.

hath proximior.

 

Of an Aduerbe.

AN Aduerbe is a part of ſpeach, which serueth to explaine, 𝔈 perfect the ſignification of the verbe.

Sometime, it explaineth a Noune: as, egregie impudens. Parum philoſophus.

Sometime, it explaineth it ſelfe: as, parùm honeſtè ſe gerit.

 

Of the Accidents.

Fiue thinges befall an aduerbe. Signification, kinde, figure, compariſon, o𝔯der.

The ſignifications of aduerbs, are gathered from the circumſtances of verbes.

 

Of adverbes ſome ſignifie

1. In a place.

hîc, illîc, iſtîc, intùs, foris, vſquam, vtrobique, vbilibet, alibi, necubi, 𝔈c.

2. To a place.

Hûc, illûc, iſtûc, forâs, horſum, aliorſum, deorſum, quoquoverſum.

3. Frõ a place

Hinc, illinc, iſtinc, aliunde, vndelibet, cælitùs, divinitùs, funditùs, vſquè-

4. By a place.

Hâc, illâc, iſtâc, eâ, aliquâ, ſiquâ, nequâ, quâ, quaquâ, where via, is vnderſtood. {K 3}

5. Time.

Hodie, cras, nuper, heri, olim, quando, aliquando, quamdudum, quáprimùm, quovſq; pridie, poſtridie, nudiuſtertiùs, nudiuſquartus, &c. in dies, in horas, cum, tum.

6. Number.

Semel, bis, or duis, ter, quater, iterum.

7. O𝔯der

Inde deinde, hinc, noviſſimo, inprimis jampridem, adſummum.

8. Aſking.

Cur, quare, quorſum, quamobrem, ecquid, quidita.

9. Calling

ô, heus, ehó, ehodum.

10. Denying

Haud, non, neutiquam, minimè, ne, nequaquam.

11. Affirming.

Etiam, ſic, quid, nî, adeò, nimirum, planè ſcilicet, licèt, eſtò, næ, quidem, equidem, &c.

12. Swearing.

Herclè, mehercle, Pol, ædipol, caſtor, ecaſtor, medius fidius.

13. Exho𝔯ting.

Agè, ſodes, amabò, ſultis, eia, agitè, agedum.

14. Fo𝔯bidding.

Non, haud, ne.

15. Wiſhing.

ô, vtinam, ſi, ô ſi.

16. Excluding.

Modò, dummodò, tantummodò, ſolummodò, duntaxàt, 𝔈c.

17. Gathering.

Simul, vnà, pariter, vniverſim, non modò, non ſolùm.

18. Parting.

Seorſim, ſigillatim, gregatum, viritim, egregiè, oppidatim, vicatim, privatim, ſpenatim, oſtiatim, bifariam, trifariam, omnifariam, plurifariam, 𝔈c.

19.Diuerſitie.

Aliter, ſecus.

20. Chooſing

Potiù, potiſsimùm, imò, ſatiùs.

21. Intention, o𝔯 increaſing

Valdè, nimis, nimiùm, prorſus, impendiò, impenſè, penitùs, funditùs, radicitùs, omninò.

{n. p.}

22. Releaſing, o𝔯 abating.

Vix, ægrè, paulatim, ſenſim, pedentim.

23. Granting.

Licet, eſtò, demùs, ſit, ità, ſit ſanè.

24. Qualitie.

All that end in lie, o𝔯 like: as, learnedly, p𝔯incelike.

25. Quantity.

Parùm, minimùm, ſummum, ad ſummum, magis, maxime.

26. Cõpariſon.

Non, ſolùm, ſed etiam, nedum, tam, quàm, magis, minùs, maxime, minimè, ægrè.

27. Of a thing not finiſhed.

Fermè, ferè, propè, vix, propemodum, tantum, tantum non.

28. Shewing.

En, ecce, ſic, hoc, modo, hoc pacto.

29. Explication.

Id eſt, hoc eſt, quaſi dicas, purà, vtpote.

30. Doubting.

Forſan, forſitan, fortaſſis, fortaſſe.

31. Chance.

Fortè, fortuitò, caſu, forte fortunâ.

32. Likeneſſe.

Sic, ſicut, item, ſicuti, itidem, quaſi, tanquam, ceû, vti veluti.

 

Of Kinde.

KInde is twofolde. P𝔯imitiue. Whereof there be very few: as, cras, olim, cùm, heri, vix, 𝔈c.

Derivatiue, is deriued from other parts.

 

Of the Derivatiue.

ADverbs are derived from ſome caſe of a noune, o𝔯 from a verbe.

They are made of a noune th𝔯ee wayes.

 

I. By Impoſition of the Accent.

I. Theſe are made of the Nominatiue caſe: Caſtor, ecaſtor, pol, ædepol, 𝔈c. So nudiuſtertiùs, nudiuſquartus, nudiuſquartùs, nudiuſquintùs, nudiuſſextùs, i. Now tis the third day ſince, 𝔈c. {K 4}

Likewiſe many other wo𝔯ds, ecquid, nunquid, quantùm, vtrùm, facile, multùm, nimium, recens, toruum, æternum, Imitating the Greekes. So hîc, illîc, hûc, illûc, &c, and comparatiues in us: as, doctiùs, meliùs, &c. But magis, o𝔯 mage.

2. Of the Genetiue: as impræſentarium,

3. Of the Datiue, as, tempori, luci, veſperi.

4. Of the Accuſatiue: aliâs, ætatèm, in diem & dies in horam, & horas.

5. Of the Ablatiue: modo, quo modo, quo pacto, quâ gratiâ, initió, veſpere, oppido, morè, herclè, caſû, fortefortunâ, ingratijs, gratis, So, neceſſariò, mutuò, ſedulò, rarò, &c. to which locus & via, are vnderſtood pridie, poſtridie, &c. i. priore die, &c.

 

II. By appoſition of Syllables.

1. To the Nominatiue caſe: quoties, aliquoties, toties, bis, o𝔯 duis, quater, quinquies, and all adverbes of number though ſomething irregularlie. Bifariam, trifariam, quadrifariam, quinquefariam, Septifariam, multifariam, aliquofariam, omnifariã.

2. To the Genitiue: divinitùs, humanitùs, publicitus, humaniter, firmiter, largiter, naviter, ignaviter, &c. which are rather made of the Ablatiue.

3. To the Ablatiue: ſummâtim, centuriatim, tributim, viritim, cælim, punctim, ſenſim, ſtrictim, furtim, &c: ſo, acriter fortiter, ſublimiter, fœliciter, difficulter audacter contracts, pariter, aliter, omnino, by adding no, &c.

 

III. By changing of letters.

1. Theſe are made of the Nominatiue caſe, by changing ans, and ens, into ter: as, prudenter, ſapienter, latenter, libenter, recenter, decenter, amanter, diligenter, to which adde, violenter, luculenter of violentus, luculentus &c.

2. Theſe are made of the Ablatiue, by changing {n. p.} o, into e: as, doctè, peritè, publicè, luculentè, largè benè, diuinè, ſedule, &c.

II. Some are made of verbes: as, agè, ſodes, i, ſi audes, o𝔯 ſodalis es: amabò, agite, licèt, eſtò, demùs, putà, vtputà, ſcilicet, i, ſcire licet: illicet i, ire licet, ſultis, i, ſi vultis, ſis, i, ſi vis, apage ſis, απαγέ ſi vis Adeſdum, quaſi dicas, &c.

 

Of Figure.

Of Adverbs, ſome are ſimple, as, prudenter: ſome compound: as imprudenter, ſo nequâ, quoquoverſum, pridie, nudiuſtertius &c. i, dies tertius.

 

Of Compariſon.

Certaine adverbs are compared: pridem, prior, primus, pœnè, peniſſimus: nuper, nuperrimus: Diu diutior, diutiſſimus, ſatis, ſatior: Sæpè, ſæpius, ſæpiſſimè: Benè, meliùs, optimè: malè, pejus, peſſimè: magnùm, o𝔯 magnè, magis, o𝔯 mage, maximè parùm, minùs, minimè: And all that are diriued of compared Adiectiues: as, dictè, doctiùs, doctiſſimè: fortiter, fortiùs, fortiſſimè: propè, propiùs, proximè, with other compared p𝔯epoſitions.

 

Of Order.

The Adverbe of denying is alwayes placed befo𝔯e the verbe: as non eſt cuiuſlibet appellere Corinthum.

Adverbes ſignifying relation, are placed after, as other relatiues are: as, tam bonus, quàm diues.

The Adverbe of fo𝔯bidding is placed befo𝔯e: as ne ſævi magne ſacerdos. But moſt Adverbes are placed indifferently.

 

Of a Coniunction.

The Explanatiues of ſingle wo𝔯ds are expounded: explanatiue of ſentences followeth, It is a coniunction, o𝔯 an Interiection. {n. p.}

A Coniunction is a part of ſpeech wherewith the parts of an o𝔯ation being manifold, are ioyned togeather: o𝔯 whereby the dependence of clauſes among themſelues is explained, and declared.

 

It is Enunciatiue, or ratiocinatiue.

Enunciatiue is, whereby the parts of an Enunciation are ioyned: and it is partly congregatiue, and partly ſegregatiue.

Congregatiue is, whereby the parts being as it were true at the ſame time, are ioyned togeather and tis either Copulatiue, o𝔯 Connexiue.

1. Copulatiue is, wherewith the parts are coopled abſolutely: as, ac, etiam, item, que, quoque, atque, itemque, nec, neque, neu, neue, cum, & tum, præterea. hoc ampliùs, his amplius fo𝔯 prætereà. Simul, fo𝔯 et, o𝔯 etiam. Some do adde theſe alſo: Quinetiam, ſed et, ſuperque, inſuper, ad hoc, ad hæc, &c.

2. Connexiue, whereby the conſequent, o𝔯 that which followeth, is coopled vpon condition of the Antecedent, o𝔯 that which went befo𝔯e: as, ſi, ſin, modo, dum, dummodo, ni, niſi.

Segregatiue, is whereby, the parts of an enunciation, as being not true at the ſame time, are ſeperated: and it is Diſcretiue o𝔯 diſiunctiue.

3. Diſcretiue, is, whereby the parts are onely ſeperated in reaſon: as, autem, aſt, at, interea, interim, vt, vero, verum, nunc, tamen, etſi, tametſi, quanquam, quamvis, extraquàm, præterquàm, quin, alioquin.

4. Diſiunctiue is, whereby the parts themſelues, are ſo ſeparated, as if onely one of them could be {n. p.} true: as, aut, an, ſiue, vel, ve, ſecus.

Raciocinatiue, whereby one part of reaſoning is as it were p𝔯ooued by the other: and it is called cauſall, o𝔯 rationall.

5. Cauſall is, whereby the cauſe of the Antecedent is rendered: as, enimverò, etenim, ſiquidem, quoniam, quia, nam, namque, vt cum, quando fo𝔯 quoniam quia, quippe, quod, vtpote, ſiquidem, quandoquidem, propterea quòd. Theſe not onely notes of the Cauſe, but generally of any argument.

6. Rationall is, wherewith the Conſequent is concluded of that which went befo𝔯e: as, ergò, ita, itaque, ideo, igitur, quare, quamobrem, quas ob res, quapropter, quocirca.

 

Of Polyſyndeton.

THe Anomalie of coniunctions is twofold

Poliſyndeton,

 

Aſſyndeton.

Polyſyndeton, is the redundance, o𝔯 ioyning together of many Coniunctions ſuperfluouſly: as et copioſe, et graviter the fo𝔯mer redoundeth, ſignifying both the later, and alſo Amplectitur cum eruditos omnes, tum inprimis Marcellum.

Aut bibat, aut abeat, aut redoundeth ſignifying either, the later o𝔯 elſe. Sive iſta vxor, ſiue amica ſit. cic Etſi, quamvis non fueris ſuaſor, & impulſor profectionis meæ, &c.

But mo𝔯e eſpecially ſuperfluous are Expletiues which notwithſtanding haue their vſe: as, quidem equidem, nimirum, enim vero &c. Ter, At enim non ſinam.

 

Of Aſyndeton, or Dialyton.

Aſyndeton, is the defect, o𝔯 taking away of yͤ coniunctiō: as cic. Abijt, exceſſit, euaſit, erupit. Here the Copulatiue is wanting. Tu cum principem Senatorem {n. p.} domi habeas, ad eum nihil refers, ad eos refers, qui ſuam domum nullam habent, tuam exhauriunt. The diſcretiues quidem, & autem, are wanting. Conſilium primò capit ſtultu, verumtamen clemens. Et ſi is wanting. Ter. Memini, tamet ſi nullus moneas tamen is wanting. Cic. Velit, nolit difficile eſt, the diſiunctiue is wanting. & quod, after volo, nolo, malo, precor, rogo, &c.

The Cauſalls vt are often vnderſtood: as, nolim ita exiſtimes, likewiſe the verbe volo cōming befo𝔯e vt, is concealed with it, cic. Ad me de omnibus rebus quam ſæpiſſimè literas mittas. So ne after caveo, as cave facias. &c.

 

Of Figure.

The Accidents of a Coniunction are figure, and o𝔯der. Some Coniunctions, are ſimple: as, aut, vt, et, ſi, que, &c. ſome are compound: as, itemque neque, &c. But they that are ioyned to the end of a wo𝔯d, are called enclytikes, viz, que, ne, ve, dum, ſis, nam, as, Athamaſque, heruſue, tantæne, adeſdũ, &c.

 

Of Order.

In regard of o𝔯der, ſome are placed befo𝔯e, ſome after, ſome indifferently.

Theſe are placed befo𝔯e.

Verum, Verumetiam, ſed, ſed etiam, neque, nedum, Atque, ac, et nec, tum, quin, quinetiam, sin, at, aſtque.

Extraquam, imò, quòd, præter quàm, etenim, aut, non.

Quamvis, quas ob res, quamobrem, quocirca, igitur, nam, Cum, namque, quapropter, In vneuen Compariſon making cum is placed befo𝔯e, becauſe it ſignifies the mo𝔯e as Amplectitur cum eruditos omnes, {n. p.} tum inprimis Marcellum. In euen compariſon, tum is doobled.

Theſe are placed after.

Tantùm, autem, ve, que, intereà, interim, enim, quoque, verò.

Theſe are placed indifferentely.

Si, niſi, ni, alioquin, alioqui, licet, vt, tamen, vti.

Itaque, enimverò, ſiquidem, ne, ergo, itaque, porrò.

 

Of an Interjection.

AN Interiection is a part of ſpeech, which declareth the ſuddaine paſſion of the mind, vnder an vnperfect voice.

Therebe ſo many ſignifications hereof, as there be ſuddaine paſſions of the troubled minde.

Some are of

Mirth: Euax, vah, hei, evohe, the noiſe of Bacchus his P𝔯ieſts.

So𝔯rowe, Heu, eheu, hoi, hei, ô, ah.

D𝔯ead, o𝔯 feare hei, Atat.

Maruelling Papè ώ͂ ποποι.

Shimming Apagè, Apagéſis, of άπὸά̀γω ſi, vis

P𝔯aiſing Euge.

Calling: Eho, oh, io.

 

Some are of

Diſdaining: as, Hem, vah.

Sco𝔯ning: as, Hui.

Exclamation: as, oh, proh, proh nefas:

Curſing: as, malùm, væ, malùm.

Laughing: as, Ha, ha, he.

Silence: as, au, ſt, 𝔈c. {n. p.}

Mo𝔯eouer any wo𝔯d, o𝔯 wo𝔯ds b𝔯eaking fo𝔯th abruptly o𝔯 ſuddainly, and from ſome troubled paſsion, is an Interiection: as, verg. Navibus infandùm amiſſis.

 

Of Scheme, or Figure.

SCHEME, o𝔯 Figure is the common affection of Etymologie. In regard whereof a wo𝔯d is ſaid to be p𝔯oper, o𝔯 Schematicall o𝔯 figuratiue.

There be foure Schemes, o𝔯 Figures. Protheſis, Aphæreſis, Tmêſis, Enallage, o𝔯 Antimeria.

P𝔯otheſis, is the putting to of a letter, o𝔯 ſyllable to the beginning, b100 middle, o𝔯 c101 end of a wo𝔯d: as, gnatus, tetuli, fo𝔯 natus, tuli: relligio *102 cauſſa, Mavors, fo𝔯 religio, cauſa, Mars: Dicier, fo𝔯 dici.

Aphereſis, is the taking away of a letter, o𝔯 ſyllable from the beginning, d103 middle, o𝔯 e104 end of a wo𝔯d: as, ruit, temnere, fo𝔯 eruit, contemnere: abijt, dixti, repoſtum, fo𝔯 abivit, dixiſti, repoſitum: Ingeni, dixtin, fo𝔯 ingenij, dixiſtine. So ſit, fo𝔯 ſiet, tibicen, fo𝔯 tibijcen.

Tmeſis, is the division of one compound wo𝔯de, one o𝔯 mo𝔯e wo𝔯ds being but betweene the parts. Ter. Quæ meo cunque animo libitum eſt facere. Idem. Thaïs maxímo orabat opere. Ter. Omnia prius experiri, quàm armis ſapientem decet.

 

Enallage.

Enallage o𝔯 Antimeria, is the immutation, o𝔯 changing of letters, of the parts of ſpeach, o𝔯 of the {n. p.} kinds, and accidents thereof.

 

I. Enallage of Letters.

Verg. olli ſubridens hominum ſator, atque deorum, fo𝔯 illi105.

Ter. Mos gerundus eſt Thaïdi, fo𝔯 gerendus.

 

II. Enallage of one part for another.

1. The Subſtantiue is put fo𝔯 the adverbe. Verg. Nec vox hominem ſonat ô dea certè, fo𝔯 humaniter. Iuv. Qui Curios ſimulent, & Bacchanalia vivunt, fo𝔯 Bacchanaliter.

2. The Adiectiue nullus, is put fo𝔯 non. Cic. Philotimus non modo nullus venit, ſed ne per literas certiorem fecit.

Ter. Etſi nullus dixeris, Etſi nullus moneas.

3. The P𝔯epoſition is put fo𝔯 the noune. Verg. Neque enim ignari ſumus antè malorum, fo𝔯 priorum.

4. The P𝔯epoſition fo𝔯 the Uerbe. Nec fuga jam ſuper vlla, fo𝔯 ſupereſt. O mihi ſola mei ſuper Aſtianactis imago. But it is Helleniſmus.

5. The Adverbe fo𝔯 the Noune. Ter. Alijs, quia defit. quod ament. ægrè eſt, fo𝔯 ægrum eſt. So valdè eſt, partim virorum, fo𝔯 pars. E convivio ſurrexit cum partim illorum, for parte.

Ampliùs, plùs, minùs, are vſed fo𝔯 plura quàm, and minora quàm.

Plin plus vicena ova incubanda ſubijci vetant, fo𝔯 plura quàm vicena. Liv. Hoſtium plùs mille cæſi, fo𝔯 plures quàm. Cic. Amplius quadraginta diêbus manſit, fo𝔯 pluribus quàm quadraginta.

Liv. Ampius ſex millia hominum capta, fo𝔯 plures quàm ſex millia hominum capti. Millia, fo𝔯 mille, is Enallage of Gender.

Cæſ. a millibus paſſuum minùs duobus caſtra poſuérunt, {n. p.} fo𝔯 a paucioribus paſſibus, quàm duobus millibus.

6. The Adverbe is put fo𝔯 the P𝔯onoune. Cic. Differo in id tempus, cûm ſcieris, quid actum ſit, fo𝔯 in quo. Verg. Genus vnde latinum, fo𝔯 a quo. Ter. Digna res eſt, vbi nervos intendas tuos, fo𝔯 in qua.

 

III. Enallage of the kinds of each part.

1. The Poëts vſe the p𝔯oper name, fo𝔯 the poſſeſſiue: Verg. Dardana ſuſcitat arma, fo𝔯 Dardenia: but tis Helleniſmus.

2. A certaine number is put fo𝔯 an vncertaine. verg. ô terque quaterque beati. Ter, may ſignifie the 3. faculties of the Soule (Underſtanding, Will, Memo𝔯ie) and quater the foure elements.

3. Plures is commonly vſed fo𝔯 multi.

4. The recip𝔯ocall p𝔯onounes ſui, and ſuus, are put fo𝔯 the Relatiue.

Ter. Orat, ſi ſe ames, vt ad ſe venias, fo𝔯 illam. Cæſ. Si quid ille a ſe velit, illum ad ſe venire oportere.

Ovid. Reſpice Laërten, vt jam ſua lumina condas.

5. The Demonſtratiue, is put fo𝔯 the Poſſeſsiue. Ter. Deſiderio id fit tuo, fo𝔯 tui. Idem. Negligentia & odio id fit tuo.

6. A verbe abſolute, is put fo𝔯 the actiue. Verg.

Et mutata ſuos requierunt flumina curſus.

Ter. Omnes ſe foras proruunt. Verg. Spumas ſalis ære ruebant.

7. The paſsiue is put fo𝔯 the actiue. Verg. Bellantur Amazones armis. Idem. Expoliantur eos, fo𝔯 expoliant. Placidam nutritor olivam, fo𝔯 nutrito. Whereby it ſeemeth that in ancient times they gaue to euery actiue a medium, o𝔯 common, imitating the G𝔯eekes.

8. Many verbes, o𝔯 participialles of the actiue, {n. p.} voyce ſignifie paſſiuely, and many of the paſſiue actiuelie: as, evidens, i, apertè videtur, Gell, equo vehens, fo𝔯 vectus. Horrentia arma, fo𝔯 horrida. So contrarily, circumſpectus, conſideratus, &c.

9. In coniunctions, the copulatiue is put fo𝔯 the diſiunctiue, verg.

Aut Pelago Danaum inſidias, ſuſpectaque dona. Præcipitare jubet, ſubjectiſque vrere flammis, fo𝔯 aut.

The Diſiunctiue fo𝔯 the Copulatiue. Ter. vel mihi rex ſemperagebat gratias, fo𝔯 etiam.

The Copulatiue fo𝔯 the cauſall,106 verg. Audieras, & fama fuit, fo𝔯 nam. Cic. Non ſolùm nobis nati ſumus, ortuſque noſtri partem ſibi vendicat patriá, fo𝔯 enim. So ac, and atque, are put fo𝔯 quàm. Ter Neue aliorſum, atque ego feci, acceperit.

The deede, o𝔯 thing done, is often vſed fo𝔯 the narration, o𝔯 telling of it. Verg. Paſiphaën ſolatur amore juveuci, i, canit, vel narrat Paſiphaën ſolari, &c. Idem.

Tum Phaëtondiadas muſco circundat amaræ.

Corticis, atque ſolo proceras erigit alnos. i. canit vel narrat circundatas, & errectas.

 

IIII. Enallage in the Accidents.

1. Of caſe.

1. The Nominatiue is put fo𝔯 the vocatiue. Verg. Proijce tela manu ſanguis meus, fo𝔯 mî Idem.

Et quæ vos rara viridis tegit arbutus vmbra, fo𝔯 arbute.

Vos ô patricius ſanguis, fo𝔯 patricie. It is Helleniſmus alſo.

2. The vocatiue fo𝔯 the nominatiue. Perſ, cenſoremque tuum vel quod trabeate ſalutas, fo𝔯 trabeatus macte virtute eſto, macte iſta voluntate, fo𝔯 mactus.

3. The Genetiue caſe of a p𝔯oper name is put fo𝔯 {L} the Nominatiue: as, vrbs Antiochiæ, celſa Butroti vrbs. Of a common: as, eius rei mihi venit in mentem, fo𝔯 id, o𝔯 ea res.

4. The Datiue fo𝔯 the Nominatiue. Liv. Scipio cui Africano fuit cognomen, fo𝔯 Africanus.

5. The Nominatiue fo𝔯 the Ablatiue, Hor. Occurrunt animæ, quales neque candidiores terra tulit, fo𝔯 qualibus, But tis Helleniſimus

6. The Ablatiue with a p𝔯epoſition fo𝔯 the genetiue. Ter. Ab. eo gratiam hanc inibo, fo𝔯 eius, i, gratiam eius merebor. Idem. Ea primùm ab eo animadvertenda iniuria eſt. fo𝔯 eius injuria.

 

2. Of Nomber.

1. The Singular is put fo𝔯 the plurall. Ter. ad eone homines ex amore immutarier, vt non cognoſcas eundem eſſe, fo𝔯 eoſdem.

Ovid. Noſtros vidiſti flentis ocellos, fo𝔯 flentium.

2. The plurall fo𝔯 the ſingular. Ter. Eunuchum dixti velle te, quia Solæ his vtuntur reginæ.

 

3. Of Gender.

The Neuter is put fo𝔯 the maſculine, o𝔯 feminine. Ter. Ego quoque pereo, quod mihi eſt charius, i, qui mihi ſum charior.

Verg. Dulce ſatis humor depulſis arbutus hædis, fo𝔯 dulcis.

 

4. Of Perſon.

Danai, qui parent Atridis, contra Priamum arma ſumite.

Ter. Si quis me quærit Rufus, præſtò eſr, fo𝔯 ſum.

 

5. Of Moode.

1. The Indicatiue, is put fo𝔯 the Potentiall. verg Et ſi non alium latè jactaret odorem, laurus erat, fo𝔯 eſſet. Cic. Dices, quid? quaſi iſtuc erat magnum, fo𝔯 eſſet. {n. p.}

2. The future tenſe of the Indicatiue fo𝔯 the Imperatiue. Cic. Valebis, meaque negotia videbis &c. fo𝔯 vale, and vide.

3. The Imperatiue, fo𝔯 the Future tenſe of the Indicatiue.

Verg. Si fætura gregem ſuppleverit, aureus eſto, fo𝔯 eris.

4. The Future tenſe of the Potentiall, fo𝔯 the Future tenſe of the Indicatiue: as, invenerit, acciderit, viderit, fo𝔯 inveniet, accidet, videbit.

5. The Infinitiue moode fo𝔯 yͤ p𝔯eterimperf. of the Indicatiue. Ter. facile omnes preferre, ac pati, fo𝔯 perferebat ac patiebatur. Idem. Omnes mihi invidere, ac mordere clanculùm, ego autem flocci pendere.

 

6 Of Tenſe.

1. The P𝔯eſent tenſe is vſed often fo𝔯 the P𝔯eterperfect in the relation of a thing done. Ter. Accedo ad pediſſequas, fo𝔯 acceſſi.

Verg. Omnis humo funat Neptunia Troja fo𝔯 fumavit.

2. The P𝔯eterperfect tenſe, fo𝔯 the P𝔯eterpluperfect tenſe. Verg.

Ni mea cura reſiſtat, jam flammæ tulerint, fo𝔯 tuliſſent. Liv.

Me quoque juvat, velut in parte laboris fuerim, fo𝔯 fuiſſem.

3. The P𝔯eterimperfect tenſe, fo𝔯 the P𝔯eterperf. Ter. Nam ſi eſſet vnde id fieret, faceremus, fo𝔯 fuiſſet and feciſsemus.

4. The P𝔯eſent tenſe in the Infinitiue, fo𝔯 the Future tenſe, Verg.

Progeniem ſed enim Trojano a ſanguine duci, fo𝔯 ducendum eſſe.

5. The P𝔯eterperfect tenſe, fo𝔯 the Future. Quint. Si tales omnes milites habemus, vicimus, fo𝔯 {L 2} vincemus.

6. The Future tenſe of the verbe ſometimes put with the ſupinall in Rus: as, Prop. Si quid doliturus eris.

Ovid. Mergite me fluctus, cum rediturus ero.

The figure Hendiadis, may bee referred hither, which is, when the Subſtantiue is put fo𝔯 the Adiectiue with the coniunction copulatiue; o𝔯 when the Adiectiue is changed into the Genetiue caſe of his Subſtantiue. Verg. Chalybem, frænoſque momortit, fo𝔯 Chalibea fræna. Idem. Nec mihi diſpliceat maculis, inſignis, et albo, fo𝔯 albis maculis. Idem. Molemque, & montes in ſuper altos, fo𝔯 molem altorum montium. Idem. Pateris libamus, & auro, fo𝔯 aureis pateris. Idem. Per famam, ac populum, fo𝔯 famoſum populum.

So, in partem, & præfam, fo𝔯 partem predæ. In ſpiritu manſuetudinis, fo𝔯 ſpiritu manſueto. {n. p.}

 

The concordance of the Subſt. and Adie.

 

Of Syntaxis.

SYNTAXIS, o𝔯 Conſtruction is the second part of Grammar, that teacheth the true ioyning of wo𝔯ds together.

It hath two partes, Conco𝔯dance, and Regiment.

Conco𝔯dance is, whereby every appoſite agreeth with his ſuppoſite.

Conco𝔯dance is of Significatiues, o𝔯 Explanatiues.

Conco𝔯dance of Significatiues, is of a noune with a noune, o𝔯 of a noune with a verbe.

The conco𝔯dance of a noune with a noune, is of the Subſtantiue with the Adiectiue, o𝔯 of the Antecedent with the Relatiue.

 

1. Concordance of the Subſtantiue & the Adject.

The Subſtantiue is either true o𝔯 feigned.

The true Subſtantiue is firſt a noune Subſtantiue.

2. The Adiectiue put abſolutely in the Neuter gender.

3. Interrogatiues, Indefinites, and partitiues.

4. P𝔯onoune Demonſtratiues exp𝔯eſſed, o𝔯 vnderſtood in the poſſeſsiue.

5. P𝔯onoune Relatiues.

THE Adiectiue whether it be noune, p𝔯onoune, o𝔯 participle, agreeth with his true Subſtantiue in their p𝔯operties of caſe, gender, and number.

Amicus certus in re incerta cernitur.

Pulchra omnia ſunt difficilia.

Quis bonus eſt? Ego laborans dives fio. {L 3}

Divitias amare noli, quod omniũ eſt ſordiſſimum.

Ex tuo ipſius animo conjecturam feceris.

 

Allæôſis. i. Alteration.

The affections of this Conco𝔯de, are Allæoſis, and Ellipſis.

Allæoſis is, whereby they differ in theſe accidents, acco𝔯ding to voyce, but agree in ſence o𝔯 ſignification.

And it is eyther of them all ſeverally, o𝔯 of two together.

 

Of Number.

Allæoſis of number is, Firſt, when many Subſtantiues ſingular of one gender do agree to an Adiectiue plurall of the ſame: as, Ter.

Fidem, & taciturnitatem, quas in te intellexi ſitas.

Secondly, when an Adiectiue comming after many Subſtantiues ſingular of the maſculine, and feminine, o𝔯 neuter gender, agreeth to the maſculine, o𝔯 feminine, becauſe the maſculine is mo𝔯e wo𝔯thie than the feminine, and the feminine than the neuter: as, Rex & Regina beati. Chalybs, & aurum ſunt in fornace probati.

Thirdly, when one number is put fo𝔯 another: as, Noſtros vidiſti flentis ocellos, fo𝔯 flentium.

 

Of Caſe.

Allæôſis of Caſe is, when one caſe is put fo𝔯 an other: as, *107 Macte vir virtute eſto, fo𝔯 mactus: as, mactus eſto hoc ſacrificio, Be thou increaſed in honour by this ſacrifice108

Salve primus omnium parens patriæ appellate, fo𝔯 prime.

 

Of Gender.

Allæôſis of Gender is, when an Adiectiue comming betweene two Subſtantiues of diuers genders, {n. p.} and one perſon, agreeth with eyther of them, but elegantly with the latter: as,

Non omnis error ſtultitia eſt dicenda.

Gens vniverſa venĕti Appellati.

 

Of Number, and Gender.

Allæôſis of both number, and gender is, when an109 Adiectiue plurall of the maſculine gender agreeth with a Subſtantiue of the plurall and maſculine ſignification: as, Gens armati. Pars merſi tenuëre ratem.

Verg. Hæc manus ob patriam pugnando vulnera paſſi.

Secondly, when many Subſtantiues ſingular110 of things not hauing life, agree with an Adiectiue of the neuter gender, though they be other genders: as, Arcus et calami ſunt bona.

Imperium, & dignitas, quæ petijſti.

 

Ellipſis. i. Defect.

Ellipſis is the Concealement of the Subſtantiue, o𝔯 Adiectiue, which agreeth to the Subſtantiue concealed o𝔯 vnderſtood.

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

The Subſtantiue concealed is knowne 2. wayes.

Firſt, it is knowne by the ſpeach, o𝔯 Subſtantiue111 afo𝔯egoing: as, Ter. Tranſtulit in Eunuchum ſuam. Comędiam is concealed.

Centauro in magna. Navi is vnderſtoode.

Sermonem quem audiſtis, non eſt meus Sermo is vnderſtood.

Secondly, It is exp𝔯eſſed in the whole afo𝔯egoing112, and vnderſtoode to the parts: as,

Duæ aquilæ volaverunt, hæc ob oriente, illa ab occidente.

Populus, alij in divitijs, alij in penuria, vivit. {L 4}

 

Of the Adiectiue.

Ellipſis of Adiectiue is, when many Subſtantiues113 come together with one Adiectiue exp𝔯eſſed, which Adiectiue agreeth with the nigheſt Subſtantiue114, whether it bee in the begining, * middle, o𝔯 *ende, and is vnderſtood to the reſt: as.

Datum eſt fanum epiſcopis, non domus, non lectus.

Socijs, & regina receptis.

 

The feigned Subſtantiue.

The feigned Subſtantiue is that, which ſuplieth the place of the true Subſtantiue: It is either ſome other wo𝔯d, ſome member of a ſentence, o𝔯 whole ſentence, as.

Scire tuum nihil eſt, niſi te ſcire hoc ſcia alter.

Audito regem Doroborniam proficiſci.

Furtum committere, & furto aſſentiri æquo ſupplicio digna.

 

2. Concordance of the Antecedent, and Relatiue.

THe Antecedent is a wo𝔯d that moſt commonly goeth befo𝔯e the Relatiue, and is rehearſed againe of the Relatiue.

It is either true o𝔯 feigned.

1. The true Antecedent is a Noune Subſtantiue.

2. An Adiectiue put abſolutely in the neuter gender.

3. Interrogatiues, Indefinites, Partitiues.

4. P𝔯onoune Demonſtratiues exp𝔯eſſed, o𝔯 vnderſtood in the poſſeſſiue115.

1. The Relatiue agreeth with his true Antecedent alwayes in their Accidents of nomber, gender, and {n. p.} perſon: as.

Vir ſapit, qui pauca loquitur.

Quæque pulchra ſunt difficilia.

Non videmus manticæ, quod in tergo eſt. ſupple (id)

Ovid. – Iſta decent humeros geſtamina noſtros.

Qui dare certa feræ, qui vulnera poſſumus hoſti.

2. The Relatiue agreeth with his true Antecedent ſometimes in caſe. In the caſe of the Relatiue are to be conſidered Relation, and Regiment.

 

Relation.

In regard of relation it agreeth with the Antecedent in caſe th𝔯ee wayes.

1. When no Antecedent goes afo𝔯e, as in queſtion aſking as, Quam excribis ſententiam?116

2. In like manner, when the relatiue ſignifieth indefinitely i, engliſhed by (what) as, cic.

Forſtian quæratis, qui ſit iſte terror, & quæ tanta formido, quæ cæteros impediat. &c.

3. By Pleonaſme, and that th𝔯ee waies.

1. When the Antecedent is twiſe repeated: as.

Duo erant itinera, quibus itineribus exire poſſunt.

2. Mo𝔯e elegantly, when the Antecedent is vnderſtood in the ſpeech befo𝔯e, and exp𝔯eſſed with117 the caſe of the relatiue after: as, Ter.

Populo vt placerent, quas feciſſet fabulas.

Sermonem quem audiſtis, non eſt meus.

3. When the Antecedent is exp𝔯eſſed with the caſe of the Relatiue befo𝔯e, and vnderſtood in the ſpeech following: as.

Ter. Quæ res in ſe neque conſilium, neque modum habent vllum, eam conſilio regere non potes.

 

Regiment.

In regard of Regiment, the relatiue is put in {n. p.} the ſame caſe that the verbe requireth, wherewith hee is conſtrued: as.

Fælix, quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum.

 

Allæôſis.

The affections of this Conco𝔯d are Allæôſis, and Ellipſis.

Allæoſis is of number and gender ſeuerally, o𝔯 of both together.

 

Of Number.

Allæôſis of number is two wayes.

Firſt, when many Antecedents ſingular of one gender agree with the Relatiue plurall of the ſame: as, Ter. Fidem, & taciturnitatem, quas in te intellexi ſitas.

Secondly, when a Relatiue plurall comming after many Antecedents ſingular of thinges hauing118 like of the maſculine and feminine gender, agreeth to the maſculine as the wo𝔯thyer: as, Illum, illamque, quos ſemper charos habui, ac me diligas.

 

Of Gender.

Allæôſis of gender is, when a Relatiue comming betweene two Antecedents of diuers genders, agreeth with either of them: as, Homines tuëntur illum globum quæ terra dicitur, o𝔯 qui terra dicitur.

 

Of Number, and Gender.

Allæôſis of number and gender is, when many Antecedents ſingular ſignifying thinges without life, of what gender ſoeuer, haue a Relatiue plurall of the neuter: as, Arcus & calami, quæ fregiſti.

 

Ellipſis.

Ellipſis is the *119 concealement of the Antecedent: as, Verg. Millia quot magnis nunquam venêre Mycenis. {n. p.}

Non videmus manticæ, quod in tergo eſt.

 

The feigned Antecedent.

The feigned Antecedent is that, which ſupplieth the place of the true Antecedent. It is either ſome one wo𝔯d, ſome one ſentence, o𝔯 clauſe afo𝔯egoing, o𝔯 mo𝔯e: as, Credere, quod dei donum eſt, idem eſt, ac ſalvum fieri.

In tempore veni, quod omnium eſt primum.

Tu multum dormis, & ſæpè potas, quæ ambo ſunt corpori inimica.

 

Note.

Id quod, is elegantly vſed fo𝔯 quod, that is to ſay, when it emphatically recollecteth the ſpeech afo𝔯egoing: as, Id, is ſo likewiſe vſed without quod: as, Ter. Sed eas latinas prius factas ſciſſe ſe, id verò pernegat.

 

3. Concordance of the Nominatiue, and the Verbe.

The Nominatiue caſe is either true o𝔯 feigned.

1. The true Nominatiue caſe is a noune Subſtantiue.

2. An Adiectiue put abſolutely in the neuter gender.

3. The Gerund in dum.

4. Interrogatiues, Indefinites, Partitiues.

5. P𝔯onoune P𝔯imitiues, whether demonſtratiues o𝔯 Relatiues.

A verbe perſonall agreeth with his true Nominatiue caſe in number, and perſon: as,

Præceptor legit, vos verò negligitis.

Quis bonus eſt? Aperite aliquis oſtium.

Abeundum eſt mihi.

Miſer eſt, qui nummos admiratur. {n. p.}

 

Allæôſis.

The affections of this Conco𝔯d, are Allæôſis, and Ellipſis.

Allæôſis is of number onely.

 

Of Number.

Allæôſis of number is foure wayes.

Firſt,120 a Nominatiue caſe ſingular of the plurall ſignification, commonly called a noune of multitude, will agree to a verbe plurall: as, Quiſque cæpêre, turba ruunt.

Aperite aliquis oſtium.

Secondly, many Nominatiue caſes ſingular of one perſon, will agree to a verbe plurall of the ſame: as, Ira, et furor mentem præcipitant.

Thirdly, when a verbe commeth betweene two nominatiue caſes of diuers numbers, and one perſon, the verbe will agree to either: as,

Nihil hîc niſi carmina deſunt.

Pectora percuſſit, pectus quoque robora fiunt.

Fourthly, when ſeuerall perſons ſingular come121 befo𝔯e the verbe, it ſhall be the plurall number, and agree with the wo𝔯thyer: as,

Neque ego, neque tu ſapimus.

Ego, et ſuaviſſimus Cicero valemus.

Si tu, & Tullia lux veſtra valetis.

Ego cum fratre ſumus candidi.

 

Ellipſis.

Ellipſis is of the Nominatiue, and the Verbe ſeuerally, o𝔯 of them both togeather.

 

Of the Nominatiue Caſe.

Firſt, the Nominatiue caſe of the firſt o𝔯 ſecond perſon, is moſt vſually concealed, except in vehement, o𝔯 ſignificant ſpeaking: as, tibi aras, tibi occas, tibi ſeris. {n. p.}

Ovid. Tu dominus, tu vir, tu mihi frater eris.

Secondly, the Nominatiue caſe of the third perſon referred to men is moſt often concealed, as,

Ferunt, aiunt, fertur, prædicant, &c.

 

Of the Verbe.

The Verbe concealed is either once exp𝔯eſſed in the ſame ſpeach: o𝔯 vnderſtood by the context of a fo𝔯mer ſpeach.

The verbe concealed in the ſame speach is firſt122 exp𝔯eſſed in the whole, and vnderſtood to the parts, as, Duæ aquilæ volaverunt, hæc ab oriente, illa ab occidente.

Secondly, when many Nominatiues come123 togeather, the verbe agreeth with the nigheſt, whether it be in the beginning, middle, o𝔯 end, and is vnderſtood to the reſt: as,

Datur fanum epiſcopis, non domus, non lectus.

Iohannes fuit piſcator, & Petrus.

Hic illius arma, hîc currus fuit.

Ego, et tu ſtudes.

The verbe to be vnderſtood by the context of a fo𝔯mer ſpeach is concealed moſt often in a queſtion asked: as, Egòne illam? quæ illum? quæ me? quæ non? here are vnderſtood, vlciſcar, recepit, excluſit, admiſit Verg. Quos ego: ſed motos præſtat componere fluctus. (puniam) is vnderſtood.

Of both the Nominatiue, and the Verbe.

Ellipſis of them both is moſt vſuall in ſuch like ſpeaches. Hæc hactenus. Diximus is vnderſtoode. Quid multa? Dicam is concealed: Ter.

Adeòne homines immutari ex amore, vt non cognoſcas eundem eſſe, poſſibile eſt, is concealed.

 

Note.

Ellipticall Conco𝔯dance, and gouernment alſo, {n. p.} are moſt vſuall in familiar, 𝔈 paſſionate ſpeeches, as in Comedies and Tragedies.

 

The feigned Nominatiue Caſe.

The feigned Nominatiue Caſe ſupplyeth the place of the true Nominatiue caſe. It is either ſome one wo𝔯d, ſome member of a ſentence, o𝔯 whole ſentence, o𝔯 mo𝔯e.

Scire tuum nihil eſt, niſi te ſcire hoc ſciat alter.

Partim virorum ceciderunt in bello.

Adde, quòd ingenuas didiciſſe fideliter artes,

Emollit mores, nec ſinit eſſe feros.

Audïre, credere, ſequi chriſtum, & verbum eius ſatis ſunt ad beatam vitam.

 

1. Concordance of the Aduerbe.

The second Conco𝔯dance is of Explanatiues, that is, of the Adverbe, and the Coniunction.

The Adverbe agreeth to a noune whether Subſtantiue, o𝔯 Adiectiue, and to a Uerbe.

 

To a Subſtantiue.

Theſe Adverbes vbi,124 and vnde,125 ſupply the place of the Relatiue, and agree to his Antecedent: as, Ter. Sive adeò digna res eſt, vbi nervos intendas tuos, i. inqua.

Eum cauſam dicere priùs, vnde petitur aurum. i. a quo.

 

To an Adiectiue.

This Adverbe quàm126 agreeth to the poſitiue: as,

Tàm bonus, quàm ſapiens.

To the Comparatiue, eyther by following one, o𝔯 being put betweene two: as,

Non quicquam facio libentiùs, quàm ſcribo.

Seriùs, quàm crudeliùs factum. {n. p.}

To the ſuperlatiue: as, habere quàm laxiſſimas habenas.

Quàm celerrimè mittere.

Vt,127 agreeth to the ſuperlatiue degree, and ſometimes tam: vt diligentiſſimè potui. Res tam maximè neceſſaria.

Tantò, quantò, multò, longè,128 agree to the Comparatiue, and ſuperlatiue degree: as, tantò tu peſſimus poëta, quantò tu optimus patronus. Longè periculoſiſſimum.

Adverbes of Number129 agree to all diſtributiues: as, Bis bina. Ter tria. Septenos octies ſolis anfractus.

In equall Compariſon making. tam coms befo𝔯e the poſitiue, quàm befo𝔯e the poſitiue, o𝔯 ſuperlatiue.

 

To the Verbe.

The Adverbe agreeth to ſome one ſpeciall mode of a verbe, as to the Indicatiue, o𝔯 Subiunctiue: o𝔯 to mo𝔯e.

 

To the Indicatiue.

Vt130, ſignifying as, hovv o𝔯 put fo𝔯 poſtquã, after that.

Donec131, fo𝔯 quamdiû, as long as.

Dum132, fo𝔯 quamdiû ſo long as, o𝔯 ſpeaking of a thing p𝔯eſent.

 

To the Subiunctiue.

Vt,133 ſignifying, that, to the end, although, o𝔯 put fo𝔯 ne non: as, metuo vt ſubſtet hoſpes, i. ne non ſubſtet.

Quoad,134 fo𝔯 donec vntill: as quoad excercitus hûc mittatur.

Ne,135 fo𝔯bidding: as ne metuas. Sometimes to the Imperatiue. {n. p.}

 

The Concordance of the Coniunction.

THe Coniunction agreeth eſpecially to the moods of a Uerbe.

Theſe agree to the Indicatiue moode.

136Etſi, tametſi, etiamſi, quanquam in the beginning of a ſpeech.

137Ne, an, num, ioyned to a verbe of aſking.

Vt fo𝔯 poſtquam, quemadmodum, ſicut, o𝔯 an interrogatiue.

Theſe agree to the Subiunctiue.

138Etſi, temetſi, etiamſi, quanquam, often in the middle of a ſpeech.

139Quamvis, & 140licet moſt often.

141Cùm, fo𝔯 quamvis although, fo𝔯 quandoquidem ſeing that, quoniam becauſe.

142Vt, fo𝔯 quanquam, although, & fo𝔯 vtpote, fo𝔯 as much as, becauſe.

143Ne, an, dum, ſignifying doubting.

 

Of Regiment, or gouernment.

REgiment is, whereby one wo𝔯d is gouerned of another.

It is either of a Noune, o𝔯 a Verbe.The Regiment of a Noune is, whereby the caſe of a Noune is ſaid to be gouerned.

A Caſe is gouerned either by ſelfe-gouernment, o𝔯 by dependance on another wo𝔯d.

Self gouernment is, when a wo𝔯d is put abſolutely in ſome caſe, that is, by vertue of his owne ſignification.

Gouerment by dependence is, when a caſe being conſtrued with an other wo𝔯d whether it be a wo𝔯d of nomber, o𝔯 without nomber, is gouerned of the ſame. {n. p.}

Caſe is gouerned of an other wo𝔯d by vertue of – his

Signification.

 

Compariſon.

 

Compoſition.

 

The Gouerment of the Nom. Caſe.

The Nom. caſe is gouerned by dependence of a.

Subſtantiue.

 

Uerbe.

 

Coniunction.

 

Adverbe.

 

Interiection.

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

1. THe Nominatiue caſe is gouerned of the Subſtantiue wherewith it is conſtrued by appoſition, that is, when they both belong to one thing: as.

Pater meus vir amat me puërum. Flumen Rhenus.

Marcus Tullius Cicero. vrbs Athenæ.

 

Allæôſis.

The later Subſtantiue is ſometimes put in the genetiue caſe by Allæôſis: as, vrbs Patauij, vrbs Antiochiæ.

2. The Noune Subſtantiue is likewiſe gouerned of the P𝔯onoune Subſtantiue being of the firſt, o𝔯 ſecond perſon, by Euocation: that is, when144 the firſt o𝔯 ſecond perſon calleth out the third to make his conſtruction, by vertue whereof it is changed into the firſt, o𝔯 ſecond perſon: as,145

Ego pauper laboro. Tu diues ludis.

Ego tuæ deliciæ iſtûc veniam.

 

Ellipſis. {M}

The firſt, o𝔯 ſecond perſon is ſometimes concealed by Ellipſis, as populus ſuperamur ab vno. Nos, is vnderſtood.

 

Of the verbe.

THe Nominatiue is gouerned of the verbe by comminge befo𝔯e it, o𝔯 after it.

1. The Nominatiue caſe of a noune, o𝔯 p𝔯onoune Demonſtratiue commeth befo𝔯e the verbe: as, præceptor docet.

Tu cubas ſupinus.

2. The Nominatiue caſe of the Relatiue commeth ſometimes immediately befo𝔯e the verbe: as, miſer eſt qui nummos admiratur.

3. The Nominatiue caſe of the gerund commeth befo𝔯e (eſt) ſignifying neceſſitie, o𝔯 duty, made in the Engliſh ph𝔯aſe by muſt o𝔯 ought: as, Abeundum eſt mihi, to depart from hence belongs of neceſſity to me, o𝔯, I muſt go hence.

Vtendum eſt ætate to make uſe of time belongs of duty to vs, o𝔯, we ought to make vſe of time, nobis is vnderſtood.

 

Note.

When, thing, o𝔯 things come with an Adiectiue, it is made a Subſtantiue of the Neuter gender: and hath the conſtruction of a Subſtantiue: as, multa me impedierunt.

4. Uerbs Subſtantiues, ſum, forem, fio, exiſto. Certaine paſſiues, dicor, vocor, ſalutor, nominor, habeor.

Exiſtimor, videor, &c.

Uerbes of geſture, eo, incedo, curro, ſedeo, appareo, bibo, cubo, ſtudeo, dormio, ſomnio, &c. do gouerne alſo a Nominatiue caſe after them: as, {n. p.} Cræſus vocatur dives.

5. All Uerbes almoſt, will haue a Nominatiue caſe of a Noune Adiectiue after them, without an Infinitiue moode betweene, agreeing with the ſuppoſitie of the verbe: as,

Nemo ſaltat ſobrius. pij orant tacti.

6. If a Nominatiue caſe with his verbe haue after them an Infinitiue moode, and the caſe that followeth the Infinitiue moode belonging to the Nom. befo𝔯e the Accuſatiue comming betweene, they muſt be both one: as, Hypocrita cupit videri iuſtus &c.

Ouid. Nec tu meus eſſe negari dignus es.

 

Of the Adverbe.

En, & Ecce, Aduerbes of ſhewing doe moſt commonly gouerne a Nominatiue caſe: as, En Priamus. Ecce tibi ſtatus noſter.

 

Of the Coniunction.

Coniunctions Copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues and theſe foure quàm, niſi, præterquàm, an, doe coople like Caſes: as, Xenophon, & Plato fuêre æquales.

 

Of the Interiection.

Theſe Interiections, ô, heû, pro oh, doe often gouerne a Nominatiue caſe: as, ô, ſeſtus dies hominis, Heû priſca fides. Proh nefas, oh paupertas fælix.

 

The gouernment of the Genetiue Caſe.

The Genetiue caſe is

put Abſolutely.

 

gouerned by dependence.

It is put abſolutely foure wayes.

1. The p𝔯oper name of a towne146 of the ſingular number, and firſt, o𝔯 ſecond declenſion, anſwering {M 2} by, at, o𝔯 in, to a queſtion made by where147, is put abſolutely in the Genetiue caſe as, Vixit Londini. Studuit Oxoniæ.

2. 148Humi, domi, militiæ, belli are likewiſe vſed abſolutely in the Genetiue caſe: as, procumbit humi bos.

Domi bellique otioſi vivitis.

 

Note.

Domi, in this conſtruction admitteth no other Genetiue caſes, but Meæ, tuæ, ſuæ, noſtræ, veſtræ, alienæ: as, veſcor domi meæ, non alienæ. Fo𝔯 otherwiſe it hath the conſtructiõ of common nounes.

3. Wo𝔯ds of any qualitie, o𝔯 p𝔯opertie, to the p𝔯ayſe o𝔯 diſp𝔯ayſe of a thing: and alſo the deſcription of a thing, comming after a noune Subſtantiue, o𝔯 verbe Subſtantiue is put abſolutely in the Genetiue caſe: as, Puêr bonæ indolis, o𝔯 bona indole.

4. The meaſure149 of length, b𝔯eadth, o𝔯 thickeneſſe of any thing is put after Adiectiues, ſometimes in the Genetiue caſe: as, Collum. In morem horti areas latas pedum denûm, longas quinquagenûm facito.

 

Gouerned by Dependence.

The Genetiue is gouerned by

Subſtantiue.

 

dependence of a

Adiectiue.

 

 

Uerbe.

Partic.

 

 

Gerunds.

 

 

Supines.

 

Adverbe.

 

 

Coniunction.

 

 

P𝔯epoſition.

 

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

1. When two Subſtantiues come together betokening diuers things, the latter ſhall be the Genetiue caſe of the ſubiect: as, Facundia Ciceronis. If {n. p.} they belong both to one thing, they are put both in one caſe, as afo𝔯eſaid.

 

Allæôſis.

By Allæôſis, the Genetiue is changed into the Adiectiue poſſeſſiue: as, patris domus, paterna domus.

2. The genetiue caſes of the p𝔯onoune p𝔯imitiues mei, tui, ſui, noſtri, veſtri, ſignifying paſſion, o𝔯 ſuffering, haue the ſame conſtruction: as, Pars tui. Amor mei.

 

Ellipſis.

Note that the fo𝔯mer Subſtantiue is concealed by Ellipſis: as, Huius video Byrrhiam, ſupple, ſervum. Hectoris Andromache, ſupple, vxor.

 

Allæôſis.

The genetiue caſe is ſometimes changed into an other caſe by Allæôſis: as, Ciceronis libri ſunt omne genus elegantia referti, fo𝔯 omnis generis. Id ne autores eſtis mihi, fo𝔯 eius. So id genus, fo𝔯 eius generis, quod genus, fo𝔯 cuius generis, is vſuall. Habuit duos gladios, quib. altero te occiſurum minatur, altero villicum, fo𝔯 quorum.

Secondly, theſe genetiues demonſtratiues mei, tui, ſui, noſtri, veſtri, noſtrûm, & veſtrûm, are changed into their poſſeſſiues meus, tuus, ſuus, noſter, veſter, which agreeing with the fo𝔯mer Subſtantiue, gouerne after them certaine genetiues, which agree not to the poſſeſſiue, but to the demonſtratiue vnderſtood in the poſſeſſiue.

Now theſe genetiues are ipſius, ſolius, vnius, duorũ, trium, &c. omnium, plurium, paucorum, cuiuſque, and the genetiues of participles: as, Ex tuo ipſius animo coniecturam feceris. Ipſius agreeth to the demonſtratiue tui vnderſtood in the poſſeſſiue tuo. {M 3}

Meum ſolius peccatum corrigi non poteſt, fo𝔯 mei.

Veſter duorum eventus oſtendit, fo𝔯 veſtri.

3. An Adiectiue being changed into the nature of a Subſtantiue, i. put abſolutely in the neuter gender gouerneth a genetiue caſe: as, Paullulum pecuniæ. Hoc noctis.

4. The genetiue caſe of the gerund is likewiſe governed of certaine other ſubſtantiues afo𝔯egoing: ſtudum, cauſa, tempus, gratia, otium, occaſio, libido, ſpes, oportunitas, voluntas, modus, ratio, geſtus, ſatietas, poteſtas, licentia, conſuëtudo, conſilium, vis, norma, amor, cupido, locus, 𝔈c. as, ſtudium diſcendi. Cauſa videndi, tempus eundi.

 

Note.

Note that this Gerund in di ſupplieth the place of the Infinitiue mood actiue comming after theſe, and ſuch like Subſtantiues: as, ſtudium diſcere, ſtudium diſcendi. Tempus abire, tempus abeundi.

5. The gerund in DI governeth alſo ſometimes a genetiue caſe plurall but mo𝔯e ſeldome a ſingular: as,

Illorum videndi gratia in forum me contuli.

Principium aliquod generandi animalium fuit.

Date creſcendi copiam rerum novatum.

Illius videndi gratia hûc veni.

 

Of the Adiectiue.

The Genetiue caſe is gouerned of the Adiectiue by

Signification.

reaſon of his

Compariſon.

 

I. By reaſon of Signification.

1. Adiectiues of Affinitie, deſire, knowledge, rememb𝔯ance, igno𝔯ance, fo𝔯getting, with their contraries, do gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, Affinis ſuſpicionis, {n. p.} cupidus auri.

2. Adiectiues of likenes, and vnlikenes in p𝔯opertie, o𝔯 quality, gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, Domini ſimilis es. Quem metuis, par huius erat.

To theſe Adde dignus, indignus, communis, immunis, alienus, which ſometimes gouern a genetiue caſe. as, militia eſt operis altera digna tui.

3. Many Adiectiues in idus, oſus, ïus, rus, gus, vus gouerne a genetiue caſe.

4. Adiectiues in ax deriued from verbes doe gouerne a genetiue caſe, as, Audax ingenij. Tempus edax rerum.

Virtus eſt vitiorum fugax. vtilium ſagax.

5. Adiectiues ſignifying plenty, fullnes, emptines wanting. gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, vacuus laboris. Plenus verborum.

6. Nounes Partitiues, o𝔯 put partitiuely, doe gouerne a genetiue caſe, whereof they bo𝔯row their gender: as, quiſque, vnuſquiſque, vterque, vter, neuter, nemo, nullus, ſolus, medius, quicunque, quidam, vnus, aliquis, and quis fo𝔯 aliquis: as, nemo veſtrum. Aliquis noſtrum. vter eorum. Neuter horum.

7. Certaine Interrogatiues, and Nounes of nomber gouerne a genetiue caſe, whereof they bo𝔯row their gender: as, vnus, duo, tres, quatuor &c. primus, ſecundus, tertius, &c.

Quiſnam eorum, tres fratrum, quatuor iudicium, primus omnium.

8. Adiectiues of knowledge, igno𝔯ance, and deſire, gouerne the gerund in DI, which hath the ſignification of the infinitiue moode Actiue: as, Cupidus visendi. Certus eundi, peritus iaculandi. Gnarus bellandi. which gerund is poëtically turned into the Infinitiue moode: as, peritus medicari, fo𝔯 {M 4} medicandi.

9. The Participle tranſfo𝔯med into the nature of an Adiectiue gouerneth a genetiue caſe, that is to ſay, when it looſeth the ſignification of the verbe: as, appetens vini.

Indoctus pilæ. amantiſſimus tui. fidens animi. profuſus ſui.

 

2. By reaſon of Compariſon.

Adiectiues of the Comparatiue, and ſuperlatiue degree, put partitiuely, with theſe ſignes, of o𝔯 among, doe gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, Cicero oratorum eloquentiſſimus.

Maior veſtrum. Maximus natu noſtrum.

 

Of the Verbe.

THe Genetiue caſe is

Subſtantiue

Perſonall.

gouerned of the verbe

 

Imperſonall.

 

Adiectiue, o𝔯

Perſonall.

 

other Uerbes

Imperſonall,

And that by reaſon of ſignification onely.

 

Subſtantiue Perſonall.

1. This Verbe Sum ſignifying poſſeſſion, owing, propertie, duty, o𝔯 belonging to any thing doth gouerne a genetiue caſe: as hæc veſtis eſt patris.

Inſipientis eſt dicere, non putâram.

 

Allæôſis.

By Allaæôſis the P𝔯onounes Demonſtratiues are changed into their poſſeſſiues meus, tuus, ſuus noſter, veſter: as hic codex eſt meus, mentiri non eſt meum.

Hæc domus eſt noſtra, non veſtra.

 

Imperſonall. {n. p.}

Intereſt, eſt, fo𝔯 intereſt, and this verbe refert do gouerne a genetiue caſe. as.

Intereſt omnium rectè agere.

Prudentis eſt multa diſſimulare.

Refert multum Chriſtianæ reipub. Epiſcopos eſſe pios, Et doctos.

Likewiſe an Accuſatiue with a P𝔯epoſition: as, Intereſt ad laudem meam.

To theſe are added theſe Genetiues tanti, quanti, magni, parui, quanticunque, tantidem: as Magni refert quibuſcum vixeris.

 

Allæôſis.

By Allæôſis the Genetiues Demonſtratiues are changed into the ablatiue poſſeſſiues Feminine meâ, tuâ, ſuâ, noſtrâ, veſtrâ, cuiâ: as, meâ, intereſt. tua refert teipſum noſſè. Here is (parte) vnderſtood.

 

Adiectiue Perſonall.

1. Uerbs of accuſing, condemning, warning, purging, quiting, o𝔯 aſſoiling gouerne a Genetiue caſe of the crime: as, hic furti ſe alligat. Admonuit me errati. Furti abſolutus eſt.

2. Uerbs that betoken to eſteeme o𝔯 regard doe gouerne a Genetiue caſe: as, parui ducitur probitas. Maximi penditur nobilitas.

3. Theſe Genetiues put alone without Subſtantiues, tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, tantivis, tantidem, quantivis, quantilibet, quanticunque, magni, maximi, minimi, parvi, æqui, boni, and alſo, Flocci, nauci, nihili, pili, aſſis, huius, teruntij are gouerned of verbes ſignifying p𝔯ice, value, o𝔯 eſteeming: as, quanti mercatus es hunc equũ? certè pluris, quam vellem. Flocci te pendo. Non huius te facio, qui me pili æſtimas.

Æqui boni conſulo o𝔯 facio, i. in bonam accipio partem. {n. p.}

4. Uerbs of plenty, ſcarcenes, filling, emptying, loading vnloading, and diuerſe ſuch like gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, lactis abundat. Careo tui. Egeo o𝔯 indigeo tui.

Dextra ſaturata cædis, participo te mei Conſilij.

Implentur veteris Bacchi pinguiſque ferinæ.

5. Satago, miſereor, miſereſco, reminiſco, obliviſcor, recordor, memini, & potior, gouerns often a Genetiue caſe: as, Rerum ſuarum ſatagit. Obliviſcor carminis. Potior vrbis.

6. Certaine verbes poëtically gouerne a Genetiue caſe: as, Abſurdè facis, qui angas te animi. Exanimatus pendet animi. Deſipiebam mentis. Diſ.crucior animi.

 

Imperſonall.

Theſe Imperſonals miſeret, miſereſcit, o𝔯 miſeretur, tedet piget, penitet, pudet, doe together with an Accuſatiue gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, miſeret me tui. Pudet me ſtultitiæ.

 

Participle.

Of the

Gerund.

 

Supine.

AS participles are Adiectiues, and gerunds and ſupines Subſtantiues in regard of certaine p𝔯operties, whereof they partake with them: ſo in regard of ſignification and other p𝔯operties they are verbes, hauing the ſame conſtruction that their finites haue. Hence it is, that gerunds and ſupines are governed, and doe governe.

 

Of the Adverbe.

Adverbs gouerne a genetiue caſe

 

Quantitie.

by reaſon of

ſignification. i.

Tyme.

 

 

Place.

 

compariſon.

Likeneſſe.

 

Of Quantitie.

Theſe adverbs, parùm, ſatis, abundè, affatim, gouerne a genetiue caſe: as, eloquentiæ ſatis. Sapientiæ parùm. Abundè fabularum audivimus. Affatim vini in caſtris reliquit.

 

Of Tyme.

Theſe adverbs, nunc, tunc, intereà, pridiè, poſtridiè governe a genitiue caſe: as, nunc diêrum, tunc temporis, pridiè calendarum. Intereà loci.

 

Of Place.

Theſe adverbs, vbi, vbinam, nuſquàm, eò, longè, qua, quò, vbivis, huccine, governe a Genetiue caſe: as, vbi es hominum. quò terrarum abijt. Eò impudentiæ ventum eſt. Nuſquàm loci. So minimè gentium. Longè gentium.

 

Note.

Qua is vſed ſometimes otherwiſe: as, Cic. At quàm honeſta, quàm expedita conſilia tua, qua itineris, qua navigationis, qua congreſſus, ſermoniſque cum Cæſare, Engliſhed thus, partly concerning the iourney, partly concerning the navigation, o𝔯 rather thus, what fo𝔯 the iourney, what fo𝔯 the navigation, 𝔈c.

 

Of Likeneſſe.

This adverbe (inſtar) ſignifying equalitie, meaſure, o𝔯 likeneſſe, governeth a Genetiue caſe: as, Inſtar montis, inſtar omnium.

 

Allæôſis.

By Allæôſis, this Adverbe (inſtar) obtaineth the fo𝔯ce of a noune, hauing the P𝔯epoſition ad, befo𝔯e it: as Vallis ad inſtar caſtrorum clauditur. i. ad ſimilitudinem.

 

Of Compariſon.

Adverbs of the Comparatiue, and Superlatiue {n. p.} degree, put partitiuely, do governe a genetiue caſe: as, omnium elegantiſſimè, optimè omnium dixit.

 

Of the Coniunction.

Coniunctions Copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues, and theſe foure, quàm, niſi, præterquàm, an, couple like Caſes, except the wo𝔯d, to which they are ioyned, governe diverſe caſes: as, Emi fundum centum nummis, & pluris.

 

Of the Præpoſition.

This p𝔯epoſition tenus, governeth a Genetiue plurall, which in conſtruction is ſet befo𝔯e it: as, aurium tenus.

 

The government of the Datiue Caſe.

The Datiue caſe is

Put Abſolutely.

 

Gouerned by dependence.

 

Put Abſolutely.

1. The p𝔯oper name of a place, being of the plurall nomber, o𝔯 third declenſion is put in the Datiue caſe: as, Militavit Carthagini. Athenis natus eſt. So ruri.

2. Theſe Datiues tibi, ſibi, mihi, are ſometimes vſed abſolutely, not of neceſſity, but elegantly: as, Suo ſibi hunc iugulo gladio. Ecce tibi ſtatus noſter.

3. Theſe Datiues tempori, luci, veſperi, ſeeme to be vſed abſolutely in the Datiue caſe: as, tempori ſurgendum. luci laborandum. Veſperi cubandum.

 

Governed by Dependence.

 

Subſtantiue.

 

The Datiue caſe is governed by

Adiectiue.

 

dependence of the

Uerbe,

Participle.

 

 

Gerunds.

 

 

Supines.

 

Adverbe.

 

 

Coniunction.

 

 

Interiection.

 

{n. p.}

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

1. When two Subſtantiues come togeather ſignifying diverſe thinges, the latter is often vſed in the Datiue caſe: as, herus tibi, vrbi maritus. Obtemperatio legibus.

Cervix cur lactea crines accepit.

2. The latter Subſtantiue is put in the Datiue caſe by appoſition.

 

Of the Adjectiue.

The Adiectiue governeth a Datiue by reaſon of

Signification.

 

Compoſition.

 

By reaſon of Signification.

1. All Adiectiues put acquiſitiuely, that is to ſay, with theſe tokens to, o𝔯 for, after them do governe a Datiue caſe: as, Supplex omnibus, mihi proprium. Æqualis Hectori.

2. The Gerund in do, dependeth of Adiectiues likewiſe, that governe a Datiue caſe: as, oportunum augendo exercitum. Invtilis ſcribendo. Non ſum ſolvendo. Potis, is vnderſtoode by Ellipſis.

3. Adiectiues of affinitie governe a Datiue caſe: as, affinis ſuſpicioni.

4. Of p𝔯ofite, and diſp𝔯ofite: as, labor eſt vtilis corpori.

5. Of likeneſſe, and vnlikeneſſe: as, Similis mihi, par, & impar huic.

6. Of pleaſure, and diſpleaſure: as, iucundus omnibus.

To theſe may be added, communis, immunis, alienus, proprius, amicus, inimicus, contrarius, infeſtus, infenſus, moleſtus, gratus, gravis, charus, dulcis, bonus, Idoneus, &c.

7. Of diverſitie: as, huic diverſum.

8. Of Number: as, Nulli poetate ſecundus. {n. p.}

9. Adiectiues of the paſſiue ſignification in bilis, and Gerundiues in dus, gouerne a Datiue caſe: as, flebilis omnibus. Mos gerundus eſt Thaidi.

 

By reaſon of Compoſition.

Adverbes compounded with theſe P𝔯epoſitions, con, per, præ, ob, doe governe a Dative caſe: as, Contubernalis, commilito, conſervus, cognatus, conſcius, confinis, obvius, obnoxius: as, mihi ſum conſcius. Obvius illi.

Pervius vlli.

 

Note.

No caſe is governed of the Adiective that agreeth with it.

 

Of the Verbe.

The Datiue Caſe is gouerned

Subſtantiue,

Signification.

of the verbe

by reaſon of

Compoſition.

 

Adiectiue, by

Signification.

 

reaſon of

Compoſition.

 

Of the Verbe Sub.by reaſon of Signific.

1. Sum, ſignifying neceſſitie, o𝔯 duty, exp𝔯eſſed with theſe ſignes muſt, o𝔯 ought, gouerneth a Datiue Caſe of the perſon: as.

Abeundum eſt mihi.

 

Ellipſis.

This Datiue is moſt commonly concealed by Ellipſis: as.

Vtendum eſt ætate, cito pede labitur ætas.

2. Sum, put fo𝔯 habeo, gouerneth a Datiue caſe as, Eſt mihi mater.

3. Sum, put fo𝔯 afferre, gouerneth two Datiue caſes, whereof the fo𝔯mer may be the Nominatiue: as, Sum tibi præſidio, o𝔯 præſidium.

 

By reaſon of Compoſition. {n. p.}

Sum, being Compounded, except with the Defectiue potis gouerneth a Datiue Caſe: as, mihi nec obes, nec prodes.

 

Of the Verbe Adiectiue.

The Datiue

caſe is gouerned

of other Uerbs.

Act.

Perſo.

 

Signific.

 

Imperſ.

by reaſon of

 

Paſ.

Perſo.

 

 

 

Imperſ.

 

Compoſiti.

By reaſon of Signification.

1. All Uerbes put Acquiſitiuely, that is to ſay, hauing theſe tokens, to, o𝔯 for after them, doe gouerne a Datiue caſe: as, Huic habeo, non tibi.

Note that many verbs gouerne two Datiues one of the perſon, and another of the thing: as, Hoc tu tibi laudi ducis.

2. Uerbs, that ſignifie p𝔯oſit, o𝔯 diſp𝔯ofit gouerne a Datiue caſe: as, Commodo, incommodo, noceo.

3. Of giuing, and reſto𝔯ing, doe gouerne a Datiue of the perſon and likewiſe their contraries, detraho, tollo, abrogo.

4. Of Comparing, as, Comparo, Compono, confero, præſto, excello, antecello, antecedo.

5. Of p𝔯omiſing, o𝔯 paying: as, promitto, profiteor, polliceor, ſoluo.

6. Of Commaunding, o𝔯 ſhewing: as, impero, præſideo, præficio, prædominor, indico, monſtro.

7. Of obeying, fauouring, reſiſting, as, obedio, ſervio, famulor, ancillor, pareo, auſculto, fo𝔯 obedio pugno, ſtudeo, vaco, invigilo, incumbo, aſſentior, adulor, parco, palpor, blandior, repugno, reſiſto, placeo, diſpliceo. &c.

8. Of truſting: as, fido, confido, credo, fidem, {n. p.} habeo.

9. Of th𝔯eatning, o𝔯 being againſt: as, minor, indignor, iraſcor, minitor, interminor, refragor, adverſor, inſidior, officio. &c.

 

Note.

Many of theſe verbs gouerne a Datiue of the perſon, and an Accuſatiue of the thing: as, hoc tibi monſtro.

10. The Datiue caſe of the Gerund is gouerned alſo of diuerſe verbs, that gouerne a Datiue Caſe: as,

Epidicum quærendo operam do.

11. Uerbs of Araying gouerning two Accuſatiue caſes, change the one of them into the Datiue: as, Induo tibi tunicam.

12. Certaine verbs of receiuing, diſtance, o𝔯 taking away, gouerne a Datiue caſe: as, Eripuit illi vitam.

13. Miſereor, & miſereſco ſometimes gouerne a Datiue caſe: as, huic ſuccurro, huic miſereor.

Dilige iure bonos, & miſereſce malis.

14. Thoſe verbes following hauing thoſe ſignifications do gouerne a Datiue caſe: as,

Conſulo tibi, I giue thee good Counſaile.

Conſule ſaluti tuæ. haue care of thy health.

Metuo, timeo, formido, caueo tibi I am carefull fo𝔯 thee.

Auſculto tibi, I obey thee.

Mitto, refero, do tibi literas, not to your ſelfe, but to you to giue ſome other.

 

Note.

Thoſe Uerbs following haue a diuerſe conſtruction.

Dono tibi hoc munus, dono te hoc munere. {n. p.}

Impertio te plurima ſalute, Impertio tibi plurimam ſalutem.

Aſperſit mihi labem. Aſperſit me labe.

Inſtravit equo penulam, Inſtravit equum penula.

Ad amorem nihil potuit accedere, hoc acceſſit meis malis.

Illud conſtat omnibus. Illud conſtat inter omnes.

Adamas diſſidet magneti, adamas diſſidet cum magnete.

Certat cum illo, certat illi, (græcanicè)

Pugnat duobus, pugnat contra duos.

 

Paſſiue.

1. A Uerbe paſſiue ſometimes governeth a datiue caſe of the doer: as, Tibi fama petatur.

Nulla tuarum audita mihi, nec viſa ſororum.

2. Exoſus, & Peroſus ſignifying paſſiuely governe a datiue caſe: as, exoſus deo, & ſanctis.

Germani Romanis peroſi ſunt.

 

Imperſonall Actiue.

Theſe Imperſonalles governe a Dative Caſe. Accidit, certum eſt, contingit, conſtat, confert, competit, conducit, convenit, placet, diſplicet, dolet, expedit, evenit, liquet, licet, nocet, obeſt, prodeſt, præſtat, patet, ſtat, reſtat, benefit, malefit, ſatisfit, ſufficit, ſepereſt, vacat, fo𝔯 pro otium eſt.

 

Imperſonall Paſſiue.

Uerbes Imperſonalles Neuters of the paſſiue voyce, governe the caſes of their perſonals: as Parcatur ſumptui.

 

By reaſon of Compoſition.

1. Uerbes compounded with ſatis, benè, and malè, governe a Datiue caſe: as, omnibus ſatiſfacio. {N}

2. Uerbes compounded with theſe P𝔯epoſitions, Præ, ad, ante, poſt, ob, in, inter, ſub, de, re, con, fo𝔯 the moſt part governe a Datiue caſe. But Præcedo, præeo, prævinco, præcurro, prævertor, doe ofteneſt governe an Accuſatiue, and præcedo alwayes.

 

Of the Adverbe.

Certaine Adverbes doe governe a Datiue Caſe, like as the nounes whereof they are derived: as, venit obviam illi. Canit ſimiliter huic. Sibi invtiliter vivit.

 

Of the Coniunction.

Coniunctions Copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues, and theſe foure, quàm, niſi, præterquàm, an, couple like caſes, except the Uerbe governeth divers caſes.

 

Of the Interiection.

Theſe Interiections, hei, heû, væ, o𝔯 veh governe a Datiue caſe: as, Hei mihi. Heu miſero mihi. Væ capiti tuo.

 

Of the Accuſatiue Caſe.

The Accuſatiue caſe is

put abſolutely.

 

governed by dependence.

 

Put abſolutely fiue wayes.

1. The meaſure of length, b𝔯eadth, o𝔯 thickneſſe of any thing is moſt commonly put in the Accuſatiue caſe after Adiectiues: as, turris alta centum pedes. Arbor lata tres digitos, liber craſſus tres pollices.

2. Nounes that betoken continually tearme of tyme, without ceaſing, o𝔯 intermiſſion, anſwering to (how long) are put in the Accuſatiue caſe without a p𝔯epoſition: as, Annos ferè quadraginta quinque fæliciter regnavit Eliza. {n. p.}

 

Allæôſis.

Likewiſe we ſay, Promitto in diem. Commodo in menſem. Annos ad quinquaginta natus, per tres annos ſtudui. Ad tertium calendas, vel calendarum.

3. The ſpace of place is commonly put in the Accuſatiue caſe: as, Pedem hinc ne diſceſſeris. Iam mille paſſus proceſſeram. Abeſt bidui. Spatium, o𝔯 iter, is vnderſtood by Ellipſis.

4. P𝔯oper names of great places, as Countryes, and Iles are vſed with a p𝔯epoſition: as, veni per Galliam in Italiam.

5. The p𝔯oper name of a place, anſwering to (whither) by the ſigne to, is put in the Accuſatiue caſe: as, Eo Romam.

 

Note.

Domus and Rus doe follow the conſtruction of p𝔯oper names: as, Ego Rus ibo. Domum redeo.

 

Note.

If the place be neere by, the p𝔯epoſition ad, may be exp𝔯eſſed: as, Ad Genevam pervenit.

 

Gouerned by Dependence.

The Accuſatiue is

gouerned by

dependence of the

Subſtantiue.

 

Adiectiue.

 

Uerbe, wͭ his 

Partic.
Adverbe. Gerunds.

 

Supines.

Coniunction.

 

P𝔯epoſition.

 

Interiection.

 

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

When two Subſtantiues come together belonging to one thing, they are put both in one caſe: as, Pater meus vit, amat me puerum.

 

Of the Adiectiue. {N 2}

1. All Nounes Adiectiues ſignifying any p𝔯opertie, o𝔯 paſſion, may gouerne an Accuſatiue of the place, where the p𝔯opertie is: as, æger pedes, Saucius frontem.

2. Theſe Adiectiues, natus, commodus, incommodus, vtilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, gouerne an Accuſatiue caſe with a P𝔯epoſition: as, natus ad gloriam. Ad nullam rem vtilis.

3. The Gerund in Dum is vſed after Adiectiues with theſe p𝔯epoſitions, ad, ob, propter, circa: as, hæc ad iudicandum ſunt facillima.

4. Nounes of nomber gouerne an Accuſatiue caſe with theſe p𝔯epoſitions, inter, ante. as primus ibi inter omnes.

 

Of the Verbe.

The Accuſatiue caſe

Subſtantiue.

Perſ.

is gouerned of the verbe

Adiectiue.

Impe.

 

Verbe Subſtantiue.

The Uerbe eſſe will haue an Accuſatiue after him alway, when it hath one befo𝔯e it: as, omnes fontes eſſe gelidiores. Otherwiſe it may haue ſuch caſe after it as it hath befo𝔯e it, that is, ſuch caſe as the verbe afo𝔯e going doth gouerne: as Expedit bonas eſſe vobis, o𝔯 bonis.

Nobis non licet eſſe tam diſertis, o𝔯 diſertos.

Quo mihi commiſſo non licet eſſe piam.

Ovid. Sed nocet eſſe deum.

 

Verbe Adiectiue Perſ.

Uerbes tranſitiues of what kind ſoeuer, whether they be actiue, common, o𝔯 deponent gouerne an Accuſatiue caſe: as, Percontatorem fugito, ſtudium {n. p.} quibus arva tueri.

Inprimis venerare deum. Aper agros depopulatur.

2. Uerbes Neuters, whoſe action doth paſſe into a wo𝔯d of their owne ſignification, o𝔯 of a neere ſignification do cauſe it to be the Accuſatiue caſe: as, vivere vitam. longam ire viam. Duram ſervire ſeruitutem. Dormire ſomnum. Bibere vinum. Currere ſtadium.

3. The Infinitiue moode gouerneth befo𝔯e him elegantly an Accuſatiue caſe, with this Engliſh, that, befo𝔯e it, which being Latined by quòd o𝔯, vt, cauſeth the Accuſatiue to be turned into the Nominatiue, and the Infinitiue into ſome other: as Rumor eſt meum gnatum amare, o𝔯, quòd meus, gnatus amat. Iubeo te abire, o𝔯, vt abeas.

4. Uerbes paſſiues, and Neuters abſolute ſignifying any p𝔯operty, o𝔯 paſſion, may gouerne an Accuſatiue caſe of the place, where the p𝔯opertie, o𝔯 paſſion is: as, doleo caput. Candet dentes. Rubet capillos. truncatus membra bipenni.

Effuſas laniata comas, contuſaque pectus.

5. Uerbs of asking teaching and araying gouerne two Accuſatiue caſes, one of the perſon, and another of the thing, of which ſo𝔯t are doceo, erudio, moneo, celo, conſulo, rogo, interrogo, poſco, oro, flagito, hortor, exigo, facio, præſto, voco, dico, appello, nuncupo: as, Doceo te literas. Conſulo te hanc rem.præſta te virum. Rogo te pecuniam. Quod te iamdudum hortor. exuo me gladium.

6. Theſe Uerbs tempero, and moderor do ſometimes gouerne an Accuſatiue Caſe Metuo, timeo, formido, caveo te, ne mihi noceas, Conſulo te, i. peto a te conſilium.

Likewiſe theſe haue an Accuſatiue Caſe with a {N 3} P𝔯epoſition: conſulo in te i. ſtatuo. Refero ad te. i. to you alone, o𝔯 eſpecially. Refero ad Senatum, i. propono, ſcribo. Do ad te literas. i. to your ſelfe. Mirto ad te i. to you alone. Celo tibi rem, celo te de hac re Induo te tunica, induo tibi tunicam.

7. Valeo, gouerneth ſometimes an Accuſatiue caſe: as, Denarij dicti, quod denos æris valebant.

8. Reminiſcor, obliviſcor, recordor, memini gouerne ſometime an accuſatiue caſe: as, reminiſcor, lectionem. Recordor puëritiam. Likewiſe memini de hac re, de armis, de te, i. mentionem facio.

9. Uerbs of Comparing gouerne an Accuſatiue ſometimes with a p𝔯epoſition: as, Si ad eum comparatur nihil eſt.

10. Certaine verbes that ſignifie p𝔯ofite, o𝔯 diſp𝔯ofite, governe an Accuſatiue caſe: as, vnum ſtudetis omnes. Feſſum quies plurimum iuvat. But commonly with a p𝔯epoſition: as, Nihil curant præterquàm, quæ ad ventris victum conducunt Epicuri de grege porci.

In hæc ſtudia incumbite. Natura plus ad eloquentiam conducit, quàm doctrina.

11. Certaine verbes compounded with theſe p𝔯epoſitions, præ, ad, con, ſub, poſt, ante, doe ſometimes governe an Accuſatiue caſe: as, Præſtat ingenio alius alium.

12. The Accuſatiue caſe of the Gerund, is vſed after participles of the p𝔯eſent tenſe, and verbes eſpecially mooving to a place, with theſe p𝔯epoſitions, ad, ob, propter, inter, ante, & circa: as,

Cantabrigiam conceſſi ad capiendum ingenij cultum.

13. The Accuſatiue caſe of the Gerund, o𝔯 gerundiue {n. p.} is elegãtly vſed without eſſe, after theſe verbs, puto, exiſtimo, cenſeo, loco, mando, curo, trado, habeo, video, dico, intelligo, arbitror, ſuſpicio, 𝔈c. Exiſtimo hanc rem tractandam.

Putavi ad te ſcribendum. Multa intelligo ſubeunda pericula. Hoc onus a me reportandum ſuſcepi.

14. Exoſus, peroſus, & pertæſus, having an actiue ſignification, doe governe an Accuſatiue caſe: as, Exoſus ſævitiam, hating crueltie. Vitam pertæſus. Immundam ſegnitiem peroſæ.

15. The Accuſatiue is ſometimes governed of Uerbes poetically, and figuratiuely: as, Verg.

Nec vox hominem ſonat, ô dea certè.

Qui Curios ſimulant, & Bacchanalia vivunt.

Paſtillos Rufillus olet, Gorgonius hircum. O𝔯 rather it is Enallage.

 

Imperſonall.

Theſe Imperſonals iuvat, decet, delectat, oportet, doe governe an Accuſatiue caſe: as, Me iuvat. Me oportet.

2. Attinet, pertinet, ſpectat, governe an Accuſatiue caſe with a P𝔯epoſition: as, Nihil ad me attinet. Spectat ad omnes benè vivere.

3. Pænitet, tædet, miſeret, miſereſcit, pudet, piget, governe an Accuſatiue caſe with a Genetiue: as, pænitet me anteactæ vitæ. Miſeret metui, 𝔈c.

 

Of the Adverbe.

Certaine Adverbes governe an Accuſatiue caſe, like the wo𝔯ds whereof they are derived: as, propiùs vrbem, proximè caſtra. So cedo, and amabo: as, amabò te. Cedò quemvis arbitrum. Cedò dextram.

2. En, & Ecce, of vpb𝔯aiding governe an Accuſatiue caſe onely: as, En habitum. En animum, & mentem. {N 4}

 

Of the Coniunction.

Coniunctions copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues, 𝔈 theſe foure, quàm, niſi. præterquàm, an, couple like Caſes: as, Socrates docuit Xenophontem, & Platonem.

 

Of the Præpoſition.

1. The Accuſatiue is governed of ſuch p𝔯epoſitions as doe ſerue to the ſame: as in Etymologie.

2. P𝔯epoſitions in compoſition governe an Accuſatiue caſe, which they governe in appoſition: as, Prætereo te inſalutatum. Adibo templum.

3. Uerbes compounded with a, ab, ad, con, de, e, ex, rehearſe the ſame againe being ioyned to their caſe by appoſition: as, In rempub. incumbe. Poſtquam exceſſit ex Ephebis.

4. In, fo𝔯 erga, contra, and ad, ſignifying to, and into.

Sub, fo𝔯 ad, per, antê.

Super, fo𝔯 vltra, doe governe an Accuſatiue caſe.

5. The Accuſatiue caſe of the Gerund is governed of inter, and ante, inſtead of a noune Subſtantiue: as, inter cænandum. Ante damnandum.

 

Of the Interiection.

Theſe Interiections, ô, heû, prôh, governe an Accuſatiue caſe: as, me miſerum, ô is concealed by Ellipſis. Heû ſtirpem inviſam. Proh dêum, atque hominum fidem.

 

Of the Vocatiue caſe.

THe Uocatiue caſe is governed of the Interiections ô, o𝔯 prôh, moſt commonly concealed: as, Verg. O formoſe puer nimiùm ne crede colori.

Prôh ſancte Iupiter. {n. p.}

The government of the Ablatiue caſe.

The Ablat. caſe is

Put Abſolutely.

 

Governed by dependence.

 

1. Put Abſolutely.

1. Wo𝔯ds of any quality, o𝔯 p𝔯opertie, to the p𝔯aiſe, o𝔯 diſp𝔯aiſe of thing are put in the Ablatiue caſe abſolutely after a Noune Subſtantiue, o𝔯 the Uerbs Subſtantiues Sum, forem, exiſto: as, hoc ego ſum animo.

2. The meaſure of length, b𝔯eadth, o𝔯 thicknes of any thing is put after Adiectiues ſometimes in the Ablatiue caſe: as, liber craſſus tribus pollicibus.

3. Wo𝔯ds ſignifying, part of time, anſwering to when, are put Abſolutely in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Nocte Vigilas, luce dormis.

4. Wo𝔯ds ſignifying continuance of time, are ſometimes put in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Imperavit triennio,

Likewiſe we ſay, In paucis diebus. de die, de nocte.

5. The ſpace of place is ſometimes put in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Abeſt bidui. Spatio, o𝔯 itinere is concealed.

Abeſt ab vrbe quingentis millibus paſſuum.

6. Proper names of great places, as of countries and Iles, are put with a p𝔯epoſition after verbs ſignifying moouing o𝔯 action in a place, to a place from a place, o𝔯 by a place: as, vivo in Anglia. Proficiſcor ex vrbe.

7. The p𝔯oper name of a place being of the plurall nomber, o𝔯 third declenſon, anſwering to the queſtion made by where is often put in the Ablatiue caſe, as. Militavit Carthagine. Athenis natus {n. p.} eſt. Rure is likewiſe vſed.

8. The p𝔯oper name of a place, with theſe ſignes from, o𝔯 by, is put in the Ablatiue caſe, either without a p𝔯epoſition, o𝔯 with one: as diſceſſit londino, vel per londinum Contabrigiam. Eboraco, vel per Eboracum profecturus ſum iter.

 

Note.

Domus, and Rus are likewiſe vſed, but without a p𝔯epoſition: as, Abijt domo. Rure reuerſus eſt.

9. A Noune o𝔯 p𝔯onoune Subſtantiue comming with a participle, exp𝔯eſſed, o𝔯 vnderſtood, is put abſolutely after verbs in the Ablatiue caſe, as, Rege veniente hoſtes fugerunt.

Audito rege Doroborniam proficiſci. Me impulſore fecit. Salvo honore.

 

Note.

Where no participle is exp𝔯eſſed (exiſtente, which ſignifieth being, is vnderſtoode)

 

Note.

The Participle is reſolued into the Uerbe, by theſe wo𝔯ds, Dum, quum, quando, ſi, quanquàm, poſtquàm, &c. as, Dum veniret rex. Poſtquam audiretur regem Doroborniam proficiſci.

The Ablatiue caſe is gouerned by dependence of the

Subſtantiue.

 

Adiectiue.

 

Uerbe, with his

Participle.

Aduerbe.

Gerunds.

 

Supines.

 

 

Coniunction.

 

P𝔯epoſition.

 

 

Of the Subſtantiue.

1. When two Subſtantiues come together belonging to the ſame thing, they ſhalbe put both in {n. p.} one caſe: as, me impulſore id fecit.

2. Opus, and vſus ſignifying need o𝔯 vſe gouerne an Ablatiue caſe: as, Opus eſt præparato, they muſt needes make haſt. Viginti minis vſus eſt filio.

3. The fo𝔯me, o𝔯 manner of a thing is put after Subſtantiues in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Nomine Parnaſſus.

Sum tibi natura parens, præceptor conſilijs.

 

Of the Adiectiue.

The Adiectiue gouernes an

Signification.

Ablatiue by reaſon of

Compariſon.

 

By reaſon of Signification.

1. All Nounes Adiectiues gouerne an Ablatiue caſe ſignifying the inſtrument, cauſe, o𝔯 manner of doing: as curvus ſenectute. Pallidus ira.

2. The Ablatiue caſe of the gerund is vſed without a p𝔯epoſition after Adiectiues ſignifying the cauſe, o𝔯 maner of doing, with theſe ſignes, of with, in, by: as, Incurvus ſeneſcendo. Metuendo trepidus. Defeſſus ambulando. O𝔯 elſe with one of theſe p𝔯epoſitions, a, ab, de, è, ex, cum, in, as, Deterrent a bibendo. Ab amando, Cogitat de edendo.

3. The fo𝔯me o𝔯 maner of a thing is put after Adiectiues in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Egregius forma.

Trojanus Origine Cæſar. Oculo invtilis vno. Facies miris modis pallida.

4. Adiectiues ſignifying fullnes, emptines, plenty, o𝔯 wanting, doe gouerne moſt commonly an Ablatiue caſe: as, Copijs abundans. crura thimo plena, amor melle, & felle eſt ſæcundiſſimus: {n. p.}

5. Nounes Partitiues, gouerne an Ablatiue caſe with theſe P𝔯epoſitions, E, de, ex,: as, eſt deus è vobis alter. Solus de ſuperis. Vnus ex illis.

6. Nounes of Number in ſome ſence governe an Ablatiue caſe with a p𝔯epoſition: as, Primus ab Hercule. A jove tertius Aiax.

7. Adiectiues of diverſitie governe an Ablatiue caſe with a P𝔯epoſition: as, Alter ab illo. Aliud ab hoc. Diverſus ab iſto.

8. Dignus, indignus, præditus, captus, contentus, fretus, extorris, governe an Ablatiue caſe: as, Dignus honore. Virtute præditus. Captus oculis. Paucis contentus. Tuo iudicio fretus.

9. Comunis, immunis, alienus, doe ſometimes governe an Ablative caſe with a p𝔯epoſition: as, hoc mihi tecum commune eſt. Immunes ab illis malis ſumus. Non alienus a Scevolæ ſtudijs.

10. All Adiectiues ſignifying any paſſion, o𝔯 p𝔯opertie doe governe an Ablatiue caſe, ſignifying the place, where the p𝔯opertie, o𝔯 paſſion is: as, æger pedibus, ſaucius fronte.

 

By reaſon of Compariſon.

Adiectiues of the Comparatiue degree, having than, o𝔯 by, after them, cauſe the wo𝔯d following to be the Ablatiue caſe: as,

Vilius argentum eſt auro, virtutibus aurum. i. quàm aurum, quàm virtutes. Vno pede altior.

 

Of the Verbe.

The Ablatiue caſe is governed of the Uerbe

Signification.

by reaſon of

Compoſition.

 

By reaſon of Signification.

1. All verbes governe an Ablatiue caſe of the Inſtrument, with the ſigne (with) befo𝔯e it: as, ferit, cum gladio. {n. p.}

2. Likewiſe all verbes governe an Ablatiue caſe of the cauſe, o𝔯 of the maner of doing, and that either without a p𝔯epoſition moſt commonly, and ſometimes with one: as, Vehementer ira excanduit. Metu frangitur. Mira celeritate rem peregit. Baccharis præ ebrietate. Summa cum humanitate tractavit hominem.

3. The Ablatiue caſe of the Gerund is in like maner governed: as, ſcribendo diſces ſcribere: and the gerundiue with his Subſtantiues: as, legendis veteribus proficis.

4. Uerbes of accuſing, condemning, warning, purging, quiting, doe ſometimes governe an Ablatiue caſe of the crime, and that eyther without a p𝔯epoſition, o𝔯 with one: as, Si in me inquus es iudex, condemnabo ego eodem te crimine.

5. Vterque, nullus, alter, vter, neuter, alius, ambo, 𝔈 the ſuperlatiue degree are governed of ſuch verbes in the Ablatiue caſe, eyther with a p𝔯epoſition, o𝔯 without one: as, Accuſas me homicidij, vel furti, an vtroque, ſive de vtroque.

Ambobus, vel de ambobus. Neutro, vel de neutro.

De plurimis ſimul accuſaris.

6. Potior, and æſtimo doe oftentimes governe an Ablatiue caſe: as, Potior voto. Magno vbique virtus æſtimanda eſt.

7. Theſe verbes, vtor, abutor, fruor, fungor, nitor, epulor, dignor, fruiſcor, veſcor, victito, vivo, gaudeo, lætor, glorior, delector, muto, ſuperſedeo, munero, communico, impertio, impertior, proſequor, afficio, &c.

8. Uerbes that haue the fo𝔯ce of compariſon, and exceeding, doe governe an Ablatiue caſe ſignifying the meaſure of exceeding: as, Deforme ex ſtimabat, quos dignitate præſtaret, ab ijs virtutibus ſuperari. {n. p.} Præfero hunc multis gradibus.

9. Mereor, with theſe Adverbes, benè, malè, meliùs, peius, optimè, peſſimè, governe an Ablatiue caſe with a p𝔯epoſition: as, De me nunquam bene meritus es.

10. Uerbes of plentie, o𝔯 ſcarcenes, filling, emptying, loading, with divers ſuch like, moſt commonly governe an Ablatiue caſe: as, Abundare præceptis. Carere virtute. Spoliavit me bonis omnibus. Levabo te hoc onere.

Such like verbes, are expleo, onero, exinanio, vacuo, abundo, egeo, indigeo, expedio, fraudo, orbo, interdico, viduo, abſtineo, emungo, diſcrepo, privo, &c.

11. Uerbes of buying, ſelling, valuing, o𝔯 p𝔯iʒing doe governe an Ablatiue caſe: as, Ædes centum minis revendit. Emit Paullulo. Multo ſanguine, ac vulneribus ea victoria ſtetit.

12. Vili, paulo, minimo, magno, nimio, dimidio, duplo, are vſed often without Subſtantiues in the Ablatiue caſe: as, Redime te captum quàm queas minimo. Vili venit triticum.

13. Uerbes of comparing governe an Ablatiue with a p𝔯epoſition: as, Comparo Vergilium cum Homero.

14. Polleo alwayes, and Valeo moſt commonly governes an Ablatiue caſe of the price: as, Ne obolo valet.

Ingenio pollet, cui vim natura negavit.

15. Uerbs of receiuing, diſtance, o𝔯 taking away gouerne an Ablatiue caſe: with theſe p𝔯epoſitions a, ab, e, ex, o𝔯 de: as, Accepit literas a Petro.

16. Uerbs Neuters Abſolute do often gouerne an Ablatiue caſe of their owne, o𝔯 of a neere ſignification: as
Diû videor vita vivere. Ire recta via.
{n. p.} morte obijt repentina.

17. Uerbs of Araying gouerning two Accuſatiue caſes do ſometimes change one of them into an Ablatiue: as, Induo te tunica.

18. Uerbs of asking gouerning two Accuſatiues, change one of them into an Ablatiue with a P𝔯epoſition: as.

Ipſum obteſtemur, veniamque oremus ab ipſo.

Iſtam ſuſpitionem ex illis quære.

19. All Uerbs Neuters ſignifying any paſſion, o𝔯 p𝔯operties, doe gouerne an Ablatiue caſe ſignifying the place, where the p𝔯opertie is: as, Doleo capite. Ægrotat animo, magis quam corpore.

 

Paſſiue.

A Uerbe Paſſiue gouerneth an Ablatiue caſe of the Doer with a p𝔯epoſition, exp𝔯eſſed moſt commonly: as, Vergilius legitur a me.

2. All other paſſiues gouerne ſuch caſes, as their actiues doe: as, Accuſaris a me furti, Habeberis Ludibrio. Privaberis magiſtratu, Dedoceberis a me iſtos mores.

3. Vapulo, væneo, liceo, exulo, fio, Neuters of the paſſiue ſignification, haue the Paſſiue conſtruction: as, a præceptore vapulabis. Ab hoſte vænire. Quid fiet ab illo.

Virtus parvo pretio licet omnibus.

4. Natus, prognatus, ſatus, cretus, creatus, ortus, editus, gouerne an Ablatiue caſe: as; bona bonis prognata parentibus. Sate ſanguine divum. Quo ſanguine cretus, Venus orta mari. Terra editus.

 

Imperſonall. {n. p.}

A Uerbe Imperſonall paſſiue hath after him an Ablatiue caſe of all perſons ſingular and plurall with a p𝔯epoſition ſometimes exp𝔯eſſed, but moſt commonly vnderſtood: as, quid agitur? ſtatur. In ignem poſita eſt, ſtetur, i. a, me, te, illo, nobis, vobis, illis. where it might haue been made by the actiue, as, Quid agis? ſto. In ignem poſita eſt, flent.

 

By reaſon of Compoſition.

Moſt Uerbes with this ſigne from, compounded with re, and ſe, doe gouerne an Ablatiue caſe: as, Redit venatu.

2. A verbe compound ſometime gouerneth an Ablatiue caſe of the P𝔯epoſition, that is compounded with all: as exeo domo. Detrudunt naves ſcopulo.

 

Of the Adverbe.

Adverbs of the Comparatiue and Superlatiue degree gouerne ſuch caſe, as the wo𝔯des that they come of: as, propiùs illo.

Omnibus gemmis granum hordei malim. where gemmis is gouerned of 150magis in Compoſition.

 

Of the Coniunction.

Coniunctions Copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues, with theſe foure, quam, niſi, præterquàm, an, coople like Caſes except the verbe doth gouerne diuerſe caſes.

 

Of the Præpoſition.

The Ablatiue Caſe is gouerned of P𝔯epoſitions ſeruing to the Ablatiue caſe, as, in Etimologie. {n. p.}

2. The P𝔯epoſition, in, and diuerſe others are not exp𝔯eſſed but vnderſtood often by Ellipſis: as Habeo te loco parentis, i, in loco. Roſtro cadit eſca remiſſo, i, a roſtro.

Apparuit illi humana ſpecie, i. ſub humana ſpecie.

Id tempus creatus eſt conſul, i, per id tempus.

Id Verò ſeriò triumphat, i. propter id.

 

The Regiment of a Verbe.

THe Regiment of a Uerbe is, whereby the Infinitiue moode of a verbe is ſaid to be gouerned͘.

 

Uerbe Abſolute

In the Infinitiue moode are

Gerunds.

to be conſidered the.

Supines.

 

Participles.

 

It is

put Abſolutely.

 

Gouerned by depende͂ce on an other wo𝔯d

 

Put Abſolutely.

 

Of the Verbe Abſolute.

The Infinitiue moode Abſolute is put after nounes Subſtantiues poëtically, in ſtead of the Genetiue caſe of the Gerund: as, ſtudium quibus arva tuëri, fo𝔯 tuëndi.

Tempus erat curva ſegetes incidere falce. Fo𝔯 incîdendi.

2. The Infinitiue moode is conſtrued ſometimes with a Subſtantiue in ſtead of the p𝔯eterimperfect tenſe of the Indicatiue moode ſingular, 𝔈 plurall: {O} as, Agere gratias, fo𝔯 agebat.

Omnes omnia bona dicere, & laudare fortunas meas, &c.

Omnes invidere mihi, & mordere clanculùm, ego autem flocci pendere.

3. The Infinitiue mood is put after certaine Adiectiues: as, Audax omnia perpeti: dignus amari. Facile fieri.

Likewiſe in ſtead of the Gerund in di: as, peritus medicari.

 

Of the Gerund.

The Gerund in Dum hath an abſolute conſtruction: as, Vlcera medicamentis curandum, o𝔯 curare.

 

Of the firſt Supine.

1. The firſt ſupine is commonly put after verbes, and participles, that ſignifie mooving to a place: as, eo cubitum. Venio viſum.

2. It is ſometimes put after other Uerbes: as, Coctum ego, non vapulatum, conductus ſum, Do vænum. Do filiam nuptum.

 

Note.

It ſignifieth paſſiuely in

Neutropaſſiues.

 

Being conſtrued with 151*iri, and with eſt, vſed

 

imperſonally.

 

Note.

The Poëts doe change this ſupine into the verbe abſolute by Allæôſis: as, Eo viſere, Vado vidêre.

 

Of the latter Supine.

The latter Supine is put after nounes Adiectiues: as, Facile factu. Turpe dictu. Dignum ſpectatu. Which ſupine may be turned into the infinitiue abſolute: as, turpe dici, dignum ſpectari.

 

Of the future in Rus.

The participle of the Future in Rus is vſed after Uerbes mooving to a place, agreeing with the {n. p.} Subſtantiue afo𝔯egoing: as, Galli venerunt legionem oppugnaturi.

 

Governed by Dependence.

The Infinitiue moode is

Uerbe.

governed by dependence of a

Coniunction.

 

Of a Verbe.

The Infinitiue moode is gouerned of diuerſe Uerbes, which being very common, I leaue to common obſeruation.

 

Note.

The Infinitiue mood is put ſometimes abſolutely, the fo𝔯mer verbe being concealed by Ellipſis: as, Hæccine fieri flagitia? ſupple decet, oportet, par eſt, æquum eſt, aut aliquid ſimile. Ter.

Adeòne homines ex amore immutarier, vt non cognoſcas eundem eſſe, ſupple poſſibile eſt.

 

Of a Coniunction.

Coniunctions Copulatiues, and Diſiunctiues, and theſe foure quàm, niſi, præterquàm, an, couple like moodes and tenſes: as, Petrus, & Iohannes præcabantur, & decebant.

 

Note.

Theſe Coniunctions doe ſometimes couple divers moodes and tenſes: as, Et habetur, & referetur tibi a me gratia. {O 2}

 

152aHelleniſmus, or Græciſmus.

1. OVid. Dum novus eſt, etiam cæpto pugnemus amori, pro cum amore. So Aristoph. ὀυ μαχο͂υμα? σοι. Frigida pugnabant calidas, humentia ſucis, Ovid.

2. Hor. Deſine curarum, fo𝔯 a curis. Iſoc. λϰ͂γε τ? ϖόνων.

3. Hor. Alium ſapiente, bonoque, fo𝔯 a ſapiente. ἀλλὸν σοφ?

4. Ter. Vt vobis decet, fo𝔯 vos. ϖςέπ? ὑμιν.

5. Plin. Canum degeneres caudam ſub alvum reflectunt, fo𝔯 canes. Nigræ lanarum nullum colorem bibunt, fo𝔯 lanæ. Iſoc. τὰ ϰαλὰξώων. σω̅? δ??

6. Vt, ſignifying that, o𝔯 to the end, agreeth to the Infinitiue, in ſtead of the Subiunctiue. Perf. expectore lævo excutias guttas lætari præterpidum cor, fo𝔯, vt lætetur. Verg. Peſtis acerba boum, pecorique aſpergere virus, fo𝔯, vt aſpergas. Iſoc. ὥςεϖολλ?ς. Hor. Vt melius, quicquid erit, pati, fo𝔯 patiaris.

7. Verg. Expleri nequit mentem. Os, humeroſque deo ſimilis. Nuda genu. Faciem mutatus, & ora, fo𝔯 ſecundum mentem, &c. Iſoc. τἀ τῶυ τςόπν ϰθϰ σϖα??, i. ϰα?, So, cætera lætus. {n. p.} Cætera ſimilis, &c.

8. Athenas miſſus eſt erudiendi cauſa, fo𝔯 ad Athenas. Aθ ?? α?? quò, ποί.

9. Deceſſit Athenis, fo𝔯 ab Athenis. Aθ? ϰθεν? Vnde, ϖοθεν.

10. Carthagini, o𝔯 Carthagine, o𝔯 Athenis natus eſt. So Romæ, Londini, &c. fo𝔯 apud Carthaginem, Romam, & c. Aθ?ϰσι? vbi, πōυ.

11. Ɛſt, fo𝔯 licet. Verg. Cernere erat, fo𝔯 licebat. Gell. Vt multos videre eſt pecuniæ cupidos. Plin. De moribus benè ſperare eſt. So the Greekes vſe ?? fo𝔯 ??. Demoſt. ?? fo𝔯 ??. {O 3}

 

Of Proſodie, or Punctuation.

THe Accidents of Syntaxis are 153* P𝔯oſodie, o𝔯 Punctuation, and Compoſition o𝔯 Coſtruing.

P𝔯oſodie is, whereby Sentences conſiſting of wo𝔯ds conſtrued are rightly diſtinguiſhed, 𝔈 p𝔯onounced.

A Sentence is Imperfect, o𝔯 perfect.

154An Imperfect ſentence doth not Abſolue a ſence by it ſelfe.

It is either a p𝔯oper member of a ſpeach, o𝔯 a parentheſis.

The members of a ſpeech are diſtinguiſhed by a comma, o𝔯 a colon.

155A Comma, is a ſho𝔯t member of a ſentence p𝔯onounced with a little pauſe, and without b𝔯eathing, thus marked (,) diſtinctio.

156A Colon is a chiefe member, abſoluing a mo𝔯e perfect ſence wherby a perfect ſentence is diſtinguiſhed acco𝔯ding to the p𝔯incipall parts: It ſuſpendeth o𝔯 ſtayeth the b𝔯eath, either taken, o𝔯 continued with a longer pauſe, and it is 157Imperfect, o𝔯 perfect.

The Imperfect is thus marked (;) Subdiſtinctio,

The perfect thus (:) media diſtinctio.

The 158Parentheſis is an intermingled ſentence, not of neceſſitie, but fo𝔯 perſpicuitie, o𝔯 ſome other reſpect, this noted ( )

It muſt be ſho𝔯t, and p𝔯onounced with ſuch a {n. p.} tone, o𝔯 p𝔯onunciation, 159as it may be diſcerned from the p𝔯oper parts of the ſentence.

A perfect ſentence, o𝔯 160period includeth a perfect ſence.

It is begun therefo𝔯e with a capitall letter, and endeth with ſuch a pauſe, as the hearer may revolue in minde the ſumme of the whole period. perfecta, & plena diſtinctio.

It is ſimple and directly p𝔯opounded, and noted with a full point thus (.).

It is alſo p𝔯opounded 161* indirectly, that is, by way of Interrogation, of Admiration, and Exclamation.

The fo𝔯mer is called an 162Interrogatiue ſentence It is thus noted (?)

The ſecond may be called an 163Admiratiue ſentence, It is thus noted (!).

To thoſe adde the points, wherby wo𝔯ds are noted, they are th𝔯ee.

A 164coniunctiue, noting the Compoſition of wo𝔯ds which are compounded of whole wo𝔯ds, as Quæcunque, All-ſeeing.

A 165Diuiſiue noting the diuiſion of Syllables placed in the toppe of the Syllable diuided: as, poëta, Nereïdes. Euolüiſſe.

166Apoſtrophus noting the cutting off of a vowell from the ende of a wo𝔯d, thus noted in the toppe, mult’ ille fo𝔯 multum ille. Tanton’ mé, fo𝔯 tantone me. {O 4}

 

Of a Periode.

FO𝔯 the right ioyning of wo𝔯ds and clauſes in conſtruction, it is neceſſarie firſt to know what a periode is, with the kinds, and parts thereof, ſo farre fo𝔯th as concerneth this purpoſe.

A periode is a perfect ſentence in a ſpeach.

It is eyther continued, o𝔯 Diſioyned.

The continued periode is abſolved without diſtinction of parts: as,

Nemo mortalium omnibus horis ſapit.

Ter. Magnas verò agere gratias Thais mihi?

O quantum in rebus inane!

The Diſcontinued hath diſtinction of parts.

It is either ſimple o𝔯 mixt.

The ſimple is parted into members, o𝔯 particles by clauſes.

The fo𝔯mer is parted by one o𝔯 mo𝔯e p𝔯incipall members, which are poynted with Colon perfect, o𝔯 imperfect: as, Cic.

Mors honeſta ſæpè vitam quoque turpem exornat: vita turpis ne morti quidem honeſtæ locum relinquit. idem.

Vtilius eſt abſolvi innocentem; quàm nocentem cauſam non dicere.

The ſimple is particled alſo by clauſes imperfect, o𝔯 perfect.

An imperfect clauſe is, when a caſe true o𝔯 feigned having 167*many wo𝔯ds depending on it, is parted from the verbe, that it commeth befo𝔯e, o𝔯 from the wo𝔯d that it governeth, is governed of, o𝔯 agreeth with, with a Comma 168*: as, {n. p.}

Stomachus calore deſtitutus; officio coquendi malè fungitur.

Plurima pro patria, pro ſe, pro principe dicunt.

Cic. Dixit Q. Tadius, homo familiariſsimus patris iſtius.

Credere in deum, ſatis eſt ad beatam vitam.

Colui te, clarisſimo genere ortum.

Iam inde a prima adoleſcentia, patris adductus exemplo, bonarum literarum ſtudijs incubuit.

Perfect clauſes are of th𝔯ee ſo𝔯ts.

Firſt,169 when divers parts comming togeather are concluded all vnder one Uerbe, adiectiue, o𝔯 ſome other wo𝔯d, and are particled each from other with a Comma: as,

Nihil te nocturnum præſidium palatij, nihil vrbis vigiliæ, nihil timor populi, nihil concurſus bonorum omnium, nihil hic munitiſſimus habendi ſenatus locus, nihil horum ora, vultuſque moverunt?

Plenos omni iniquitate, malitia, dolo, ſcornations, avaritia, contentione, &c.170

De eorum deſiderio, luctu, querelis, quotidiè tecum ſimul audiebam. Such may be called Ƶeugmaticall clauſes.

Secondly,171 when the whole is firſt repeated, and then diſtinguiſhed into his parts, which are parted from the whole, and each from other, with a comma: as, populus, alij in delicijs, alij in penuria, vivit.

Thirdly, when many members come togeather, with a p𝔯oper verbe, being parted each from other with a comma, becauſe the coniunction is 172* vnderſtood: as, Verg.

Ferte citi flammas, date vela, impellite remos.

Diligentia comparat divitias, negligentia corrumpit animum.

Rem pub. radicitus evertiſti, civitatem funditùs {n. p.} dejeciſti. Such may be called dialyticall clauſes.

 

Of the mixt Periode.

Mo𝔯eover the diſcontinued periode, beſides thoſe members, and clauſes, is mixed with other particles, and may therefo𝔯e be called a mixt periode.

It ſtandeth of two ſentẽces, viʒ the

P𝔯incipall,

 

explanatiue 173*

The p𝔯incipall ſetteth downe the thing chiefely entended.

The explanatiue ſerueth to perfect the p𝔯incipall, with his parts, and is therefo𝔯e diverſly ioyned, and intermixed with them.

The explanatiue is eyther a p𝔯oper member of the p𝔯incipall, o𝔯 an outward particle adioyned vnto it.

The outward particle is a Parentheſis, o𝔯 wo𝔯d, in ſome ſo𝔯t of like nature.

The parentheſis is a particle pointed with two halfe circles, excluding it from the p𝔯incipall, having the conſtruction whole within it ſelfe: as,

Princeps (quia bella miniantur

Hoſtes (militibus vrbem præmunit, & armis.

Wo𝔯ds having the fo𝔯ce of a Parentheſis are of two ſo𝔯ts.

Firſt, wo𝔯ds of calling, naming, o𝔯 ſpeaking to, in the Uocatiue caſe: they are ſevered from the wo𝔯ds following with another: as,

Debeo tibi, vir ornatisſime, tot iam nominibus, prorſus, vt non videam, qui ſolvendo eſſe poſſum.

Credo ego vos, Iudices, mirari. &c.

Secondly, they are notes of explication 𝔈c. of which ſo𝔯t are theſe, 𝔈 ſuch like, id eſt, quod eſt, hoc eſt, ſcilicet, quaſi dicas, ſic, ita, vt eſt, par eſt, æquum {n. p.} eſt, ait, inquit, idque hinc eſt, ita ſit, primum, deinde, præterea, his de cauſis, huc accedit. &c. cic.

Imò, inquit, abs te ſatis accipiam.

Ego cum Patavij, hoc eſt, propè in conſpectu meo ſis, non accurram ad te?

Ex quo ſit, vt ager Arpinas Arpinatium dicatur.

Deinde, vt communibus vtatur pro communibus.

The p𝔯oper member o𝔯 particle, of the p𝔯incipall is Relatiue, o𝔯 Coniunctiue.

The Relatiue particle explaneth the p𝔯incipall, o𝔯 his parts with the 174* P𝔯onoune Relatiue, with wo𝔯ds of a *175 Relatiue nature, o𝔯 with wo𝔯ds, that may be reſolued by a Relatiue.

It is particled from the p𝔯ecedent part of the p𝔯incipall, moſt commonly with a comma, and ſometime with a colon: as, Cic.

Ego potiſſimum ſurrexi, qui neque ætate, neque ingenio, ſimi cum ijs, qui ſedeant comparandus.

Marc. Craſſ. negabat vllam pecuniam ſatis eſſe ei, qui in rep. princeps eſſe vellet, cuius fructibus exercitum alere non poſſet.

Wo𝔯ds of a Relatiue nature are, qualis, quantus, quot, quatenùs, quàm, quò, quantò, vbi, vnde. &c. Whoſe antecedents are moſt commonly vnderſtood by Anacolumthus: as

Et, quantum in ipſo eſt, diſturbat vitæ ſocietatem.

Non pol, qui quenquam plus amem aut diligam, èo feci.

Sive adeò digna res eſt, vbi nervos intendas tuos.

Wo𝔯ds, that may be reſolued by a Relatiue: Ter.

Ibi tum matri paruolam puellam dono quidam mercator dedit, ex Attica hinc abreptam, i. quæ abrepta fuit.

Dixit Q. Tadius, homo familiariſſimus patris {n. p.} iſtius, i. qui erat &c.

The Coniunctiue particle explaneth the p𝔯incipall, and his parts, with certaine Coniunctions, and Adverbs, o𝔯 with wo𝔯ds that may be reſolued by the ſame: as,

Fauſte, precor, gelida quando pecus omne ſub vmbra

Ruminat, antiquos paulum recitemus amores.

O Thais, Thais, vtinam eſſet mihi pars æqua amoris tecum, ac pariter fieret, vt, aut hoc tibi doleret itidem, vt mihi dolet, aut ego abs te factum nihili, penderem.

Wo𝔯ds that may be reſolued by a Coniunction, 𝔈c.

Rege veniente, hoſtes fugerunt, i. Dum, cum, poſtquam &c, veniret rex.

Colui te, clariſſimo genere ortum, i. quia ortus es, &c.

The Explanatiue ſentence is alſo

Continued.

 

 

parted into members.

 

 

particled by clauſes.

 

 

mixt of

P𝔯incipalls.

 

 

Explanatiues

The Affection of explanatiue ſentence is their placinge.

They are placed ſometimes befo𝔯e the p𝔯incipall o𝔯 his parts, ſometimes after, ſometimes in the middle.

Quibus in rebus ipſi intereſſe non poſſumus in his operæ noſtre vicaria fides amicorum ſupponitur.

Qui mihi diſcipulos, puër, es, cupis atque doceri,

Huc ades, hæc animo concipe dicta tuo.

Quot capita, tot ſenſus.

At tu, fineſti ne ſim tibi muneris autor,

Nate caue: Dum reſque ſinit, tua corrige vota. {n. p.}

 

A Table of the Periode.

A periode is

Continued.

 

 

 

 

 

Diſioyned. 

Simple

Parted into members.

 

 

 

 

Particled by clauſes

Imper.

 

 

   

 

Perfect

Zeugmaticall.

 

 

 

   

Prolepticall.

 

 

 

 

 

Dialyticall.

 

Mixt which ſtand of ſentences,

Principall

 

 

 

 

Explanatiue,

a

Proper member

Relat. which explaneth

By the Pronoune Relat. Words of like nature.

 

 

 

Coniunctiue which explaneth by Coniunction, and certaine Adverbs. Words, that may be reſolued by the ſame.

 

 

Outward particle

Parentheſis.

 

 

 

 

words of like nature Words of calling or ſpeaking to

 

 

 

 

Of explication, tranſition, &c.

{n. p.}

 

Of Construing.

COmpoſition, o𝔯 Conſtruing is, whereby wo𝔯ds 𝔈 clauſes Rheto𝔯ically diſpoſed, in a periode, are reduced into a Grammaticall placing o𝔯 o𝔯der

In Grammaticall conſtruing, firſt of all the Nominatiue Caſe is placed befo𝔯e, whether it be true o𝔯 feigned, and the verbe in the ſecond place.

It is either put alone, o𝔯 hath other wo𝔯ds depending on it.

 

The Nom. put alone.

Omnia vincit amor, & nos cedamus amori.

Grammatically, Amor vincit omnia, &c.

In deum credere, ſatis eſt ad beatam vitam. Gram.

Credere in deum, eſt ſatis, &c.

 

Exception. 1.

IF either a queſtion be aſked, o𝔯 the Uerbe of the Imperatiue moode, then either the verbe, o𝔯 the ſigne of the Uerbe is put in the firſt place: as Ter.

Vbi ſcelus eſt, qui me perdidit? where is the varlet, that hath vndone me?

Venit ne rex? Doth the king come?

Ama tu, loue thou. Amato ille, let him loue.

 

Exception 2.

Likewiſe, when this ſigne, it, o𝔯 there, commeth {n. p.} befo𝔯e the Engliſh of the Uerbe: as,

Eſt liber meus, It is my Booke. Venit ad me quidam, there came one to me.

 

Note.

If the Uerbe be imperſonall, the ſigne it, o𝔯 there, ſupplieth the roome of the Nominatiue caſe: as, oportet me legere Vergilium, it behooveth mee to read Uergill.

 

The Nom. with other words.

THe Nominatiue caſe hath depending on it.176

1. Sometimes an Adiectiue onely: as,

Blandi homines ſæpè fallunt.

2. Sometimes beſides the Adiectiue another Subſtantiue: as,

Pater meus vir amat me puerum.

Spes impunitatis, eſt pecandi illecebra.

3. Sometimes *177 many caſes, and * wo𝔯ds, that is, when an Adiectiue, o𝔯 participle agreeing with the Nominatiue doth governe other caſes after it, with their Adiectiues, Adverbes, and p𝔯epoſition, with their caſuall wo𝔯ds: as, Ovid.

Eſt via ſublimis cælo manifeſta ſereno.

Voce novæ captus cuſtos Iunonis artis, Argus ait, 𝔈c.

Ille ſummum fidei toties amiſſæ incommodum ſatis expertus, 𝔈c.

 

Of the Verbe.

The Uerbe is either put alone, o𝔯 hath other wo𝔯ds depending on it.

Put alone.

Homo ridet. Tu dives ludis. Ego pauper laboro.

With other wo𝔯ds. {n. p.}

The Uerbe hath depending on it.

1. Sometimes an *178 Adverbe: as, Libenter diſce. Haud congruè loqueris.

2. Sometimes beſides the Adverbe an Infinitiue moode: as, diû taceri non poteſt.

3. The Uerbe, o𝔯 his Infinitiue doe moſt commonly governe an Accuſatiue after them, becauſe moſt Uerbes be tranſitiue,

Percontatorem fugito.

 

Note.

The Accuſatiue with this engliſh (that) is placed befo𝔯e the Infinitiue moode in conſtruing, becauſe they ſupplie the place of the nominatiue caſe, and the verbe finite: as,

Gaudeo te benè valere. I am glad that thou art well.

4. Sometimes the Uerbe hath diverſe caſes with their Adiectiues, and Adverbes immediately depending on it: as,

Adſpicit hunc Pentheus oculis.

Speras hoc tibi laudi fore.

Dedit veſtem purpuream mihi non poſcenti pignori ſua ſponte, te præſente, propria manu.

 

Note.

The Accuſatiue in Conſtruing is, next after the Adverbe, placed immediately after the verbe, and then the *179 Datiue, laſtly the Ablatiue: But the genetiue, and the caſe by appoſition next after their fo𝔯mer Subſtantiues.

5. Sometimes it hath many *180 caſes, o𝔯 wo𝔯ds depending on it, that is, when an Adiectiue, o𝔯 participle agreeing with the Accuſatiue, doe governe other caſes after them, with their Adiectiues, Adverbs, and p𝔯epoſitions, with their caſuall wo𝔯ds: as, Ille per Aonias fama celeberrimus vrbes. {n. p.}

Irreprehenſa dabat populo reſponſa petenti. Ovid. Nam duo magnorum viridi coëuntia ſylva.

Corpora ſerpentum baculi violaverat ictu.

ignemque vomentes

Ambroſiæ ſucco ſaturos præſepibus altis

Quadrupedes ducunt.

Ille ſummum toties violatæ fidei incommodum ſatis expertus, dedit mihi non poſcenti quicquam ominò veſtem purpuream pignori ſponte ſua, te præſente, propria manu.

 

Grammatically.

Ille expertus ſatis ſummum incommodum fidei vïolatæ toties, dedit purpuream veſtem ſponte ſua mihi non poſcenti quicquam omninò pignori propria manu, te præſente.

 

The Conſtruing of words in a mixt Periode.

IN a mixt Periode the p𝔯incipall ſentence, and his parts, muſt be ſeparated from the Explanatiue, and the explanatiues each from other, obſerving well what part, o𝔯 parts of the p𝔯incipall, o𝔯 of themſelues they explaine, and then place them all in o𝔯der, as is afo𝔯eſayd.

 

Of the Parentheſis.

The p𝔯oper members of the periode muſt be ſeperated from the parentheſis, and grammatically placed: as,

Princeps (quia bella miniantur.

Hoſtes) militibus vrbem præmunit, & armis.

Princeps præmunit vrbem militibus, & armis (quia hoſtes miniantur bella.

Wo𝔯ds of calling, o𝔯 ſpeaking to, are conſtrued in the firſt place: as,

Magnum eſt hoc, vir ornatiſſime, humanitatis, & amoris tui in me argumentum. {P}

Vir ornatiſſime, hoc eſt magnum argumentum humanitatis, & amoris tui in me.

Wo𝔯ds of explication 𝔈c are in conſtruing placed next after the wo𝔯ds that they exp𝔯eſſe.

 

Of Relatiue Particle, or Clauſe.

THe Antecedent, o𝔯 p𝔯incipall member must be firſt ſeparated from it, and the wo𝔯ds Grammatically placed, then in like ſo𝔯t the Relatiue particle: as,

Ita, quod mihi conſuëvit in cæteris cauſſis adiumento eſſe, in quoque in hac cauſa deficit. Gram.

Ita, id deficit quoque in hac cauſa, quod conſuëvit eſſe mihi adiumento in cæteris cauſſis.

Hoc tibi perſuaſum eſſe cupio, quæcunque a vetere neceſſitudine expectari officia ſolent, ea tibi, a me, ſiqua tui dabitur facultas ornandi, præſtò ſemper futura.

Cupio hoc perſuaſum eſſe tibi, ea officia futura ſemper præſto tibi a me, quæcunque ſolent expectari a veteri neceſſitudine, ſiqua facultas ornandi tui dabitur.

When the Relatiue may be engliſhed by what as it goes befo𝔯e the Antecedent, ſo is it alſo conſtrued befo𝔯e it: as, Cic.

Forſitan quæratis, qui ſit iſte terror & quæ tanta formido, quæ tot, ac tantos viros impediat, &c. Peraduenture you may demand, what that terro𝔯 may be, 𝔈c.

Quæ duæ res in civitate plurium ùni poſſunt, eæ contra nos ambæ faciunt hoc tempore. What two things can moſt p𝔯euaile in a Cittie, 𝔈c.

Note.

Where-note that in conſtruing the wo𝔯ds of the Relatiue Particle, the Relatiue of what caſe {n. p.} ſoeuer, muſt be placed befo𝔯e. If it be the Genetiue caſe, the other Subſtantiue whereof it dependeth is moſt conueniently *181 ioyned with it; And what wo𝔯ds ſoeuer depend on the Relatiue, they are placed in conſtruing befo𝔯e the Nom. and the verbe: as,

Fælix, quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum,

Princeps non eſt, cuius fructibus exercitus ali non poteſt. &c.

Quem in carcerem coniectum, & compedibus devinctum plangebant omnes.182 Cuius patriam Priënem cum cepiſſet hoſtis, &c.

 

Of the Coniunctiue Particle.

THe P𝔯incipall member, o𝔯 clauſe muſt be ſeparated from it, and the wo𝔯ds Grammatically placed, then in like ſo𝔯t place the wo𝔯ds of the Coniunctiue Particle: as, Ter.

Ait, fidem habeat, ſe præpoſitum iri tibi apud me, ac non id metuat, ne, vbi acceperim, ſeſe relinquam, velle ſe illam mihi dare. Gram.

Ait ſe velle dare illam mihi, ſi habeat fidem, ſe præpoſitum iri tibi apud me, ac non metuat id, ne relinquam ſeſe, vbi acceperim.

Ovid. Tunc etiam quæ me ſubiectis excipit vndis,

Ne ferar in præceps, Tethis ſolet ipſa vereri.

The p𝔯incipall ſentence,

Tunc etiam Tethis ipſa ſolet vereri, whoſe parts are explained.

Tunc etiam Tethys ipsa, quæ excipit me vndis ſubiectis,

Solet vereri, ne ferar in præceps.

 

Note.

In Copulatiue, and Diſiunctiue Particles, the firſt copulatiue, o𝔯 Diſiunctiue is conſtrued in {P 2} the firſt place, then the other: as, ovid.

A dextra, læuaque dies, & menſis, & annus,

Sæculaque, & poſitæ ſpatijs æqualibus horæ.

 

Note.

The Copulatiue, and Diſiunctiue ſometimes redound by Polyſyndeton183: as,

Athamaſque, Thoaſque, Pelideſque,

Aut face, aut, ſi non vis, tace.

Aut ſedeat, aut abeat.

 

Examples, in mixt Periods.

184OPtarem equidem, vt hæ populares tempeſtates et ſeditionum procellæ, quibus patria noſtra (tempore Edovardi regis Sexti) ſordidiſſimorum hominũ ſcelere, & perfidia perculſa, et afflicta fuit, aut nunquam contigeſſent, aut (ſi fieri poſſit) illa memoria penitus ex omnium mentibus excinderetur.

 

The Reſolution of the Periode And Conſtruction of the wordes.

The p𝔯incipall member.

Optarem equidem, explained by the

Coniunctiue Particle,

Vt hæ populares tempestates, & procellę ſeditionũ, Quibus, 𝔈c.

The firſt part of this Explanat. viʒ the Nominat. with his dependents, is explained by the

Copulatiue Particle,

{Et procellæ ſeditionum} 𝔈 both are explained by the

Relatiue Particle,

Quibus patria noſtra percuſſa, & afflicta fuit ſcelere. et perfidia ſordidiſſimorum hominum.

The firſt part hereof, i. the Nominat. with his dependents, is explaned by the

Copulatiue particle Ƶeugmatically,

{Et afflicta fuit} {n. p.}

The ſecond part (ſcelere) is explained by the

Copulatiue Ƶeugmatically,

Et perfidia perditisſimotum hominum} and both are explained by the

Parentheſis.

{Tempore Edvardi regis ſexti}

The ſecond part of the p𝔯incipall explanatiue, i. the Uerbe with his Dependents (aut contigeſſent nunquam) is explaned by the

Coniunctiue particle,

{Aut memoria illarũ excinderetur penitùs ex mentibus omnium} which is explaned by the

Parentheſis,

{Si poſſet fieri}

 

Reſolution, and Conſtruction.

SEd, quoniam præterita mutari non poſſunt, vt185 hæc macula proditionis a pernicioſisſimis civibus patriæ noſtrę impreſſa, altiùs inſedit in populi Norfolcienſis nomine, ad memoriam ſceleris ſempiternam infixa, quàm vt penitùs deleri, aut prorſus extirpari queat: facilè patior oblatam mihi hanc huius hiſtoriolæ conſcribendæ facultatem, vt omnes intelligant, quibus initijs hi tanti tumultus excitati ſunt, ac qua tandem virtute compresſi: penituſque perſpiciant vulnera illa, ac ſeditionum ſcelera, partiæ noſtræ, non a bonis viris, et fortibus inflicta, ſed a deſperatorum hominum flagitioſiſſimis gregibus inuſta fuiſſe.

The p𝔯incipall ſentence, Continued.

Sed patior facilè hanc facultatem ſcribendi huius hiſtoriolæ oblatam mihi,

The firſt part186 hereof (ſed) is explained by the

Coniunctiue partic. cauſall,

(Quoniam præterita non poſſunt mutari) which is explaned by the {P 3}

Copulat. Partic. ſtanding of two imperfect clauſes.

1. Et hæc macula proditionis impreſſa patriæ noſtræ civibus pernicioſiſſimis, inſedit altiùs in nomine populi Norfolcienſis,

2. Infixa ad memoriam ſempiternam ſceleris (which are explaned by the

Redditiues partic. Ƶeugmat.

(Quàm vt queat deleri penitùs) which is further explaned by the

Diſiunctiue particle,

(Aut extirpari prorſus)

187The ſecond part hereof (facilè patior, &c.) is explaned

1. By the cauſall partic.

(Vt omnes intelligãt initia) which is explan. by the

Relatiue particle,

(Quibus initijs hi tanti tumultus excitati ſunt) and this by the

Copulat. Partic.

(Ac qua virtute compresſi tandem)

2. By the Copulat. Particle,

(Perſpiciantque penitùs illa vulnera) which is explaned by the

Copulat. partic. Ƶeugmat. an imperfect clauſe,

(Ac ſcelera ſeditionum, inflicta fuiſſe patriæ noſtræ) explaned

1. By the Adverbe of denying,

(Non a bonis viris) which is explaned by the

Copulat. Partic.

(Et fortbius)

2. By Diſcretiue partic.

Sed inuſta a gregibus flagitioſiſsimis deſperatorum hominum. {n. p.}

188Itaque, cum perdilectus, & fidelis noſter fanulus Alexander Ienkinſon, qui literas noſtras perfert, cum bona venia, favore, & gratia noſtra, hoc Angliæ noſtræ regnum excedere. & in Perſiam vſque, veſtraſque alias ditiones (dei benignitate) penetrare conſtituërit: Hoc illîus inſtitutum perlaudabile quidẽ, grato noſtro fauore perſequi, & promouere ſtuduimus: id quod eò libentius facimus, quoniam hoc eius propoſitum, ex honeſto ſtudio commercij conſtituendi potiſſimùm, cum veſtris ſubditis, alijſque peregrinis hominibus, ad regna veſtra confluentibus, omnino exortum ſit.

 

The p𝔯incipall ſentence Particled with imperfect clauſes.

Itaque tum ſtuduimus perſequi hoc inſtitutum illîus, per laudabile quidem, grato noſtro favore.

 

189The firſt part (Itaque tum) is explained by the Relatiue Particle (cùm perdilectus, & fidelis &c.)

The firſt part whereof, viz. the Nom. with his dependents being an imperfect clauſe.

Cùm Alexander Ienkinſon noſter perdilect famulus) is exp. by.

The Copulat. Part.

(Et fidelis) and both are explained by the

Relatiue partic.

(Qui perfert noſtras literas)

The Second part, viz. the verbe Zeugmat. with his dependents.

(Conſtituerit excedere hoc regnum noſtræ Angliæ) which is partic. With two imperfect clauſes.

1. Cum bona venia)

2. Favore, Zeugmat) which are explained by the

Copulatiue {P 4}

(Et gratia noſtra) and then explaned by the

Copulat. Partic.

(Et penetrare vſque in Perſiam) which is alſo explan. By the

Copulatiue.

(Veſtraſque alias ditiones) which are explaned by the

Parentheſis

(benignitate dei)

190The Second part of the P𝔯incipall,

(Studuimus perſequi) which is explaned by the

Copulatiue,

(Et promovére)

191The third part of the P𝔯incipall

(Hoc inſtitutum illîus perlaudabile quidem, noſtro grato favore, both which parts are explaned by the.

Relatiue.

(id quod nos facimus èo libentiùs) which is explaned by the

Cauſall part being particled with imperfect clauſes,

Quoniam hoc eius propoſitum exortum ſit omninò.

Ex honeſto ſtudio conſtituendi commercij potiſſimàm,

Cum veſtris ſubditis,) which is explaned by the

Copulatiue partic.

(Alijſque peregrinis hominibus,) particled with an imperfect clauſe,

(Confluentibus ad veſtra regna.

 

Tyreſias (vt refert Ovidius, ni fallor) iter illâc, ſic ſors tulit, cuius (licet vates) ignarus erat, habiturus, violaverat, quanta vi patuit, duo corpora {n. p.} magnorum ſerpentum, nigro tumida veneno, eoquē mortifero, quale eſt omnium in regionibus, quæ ſitæ ſunt in occidentalibus mundi plagis, coëuntia, ſicut et cætera animantia verno tempore coëunt, viridi ſylva, quæ graminoſa fuit, ac arbuſtis, fruticibis, vepribuſque plena.

The P𝔯incipall ſentence particled with imperfect clauſes.

Tyreſias habiturus iter illâc, violaverat duo corpora magnorum ſerpentum, nigro tumida veneno, coëuntia viridi Sylva.

192The 1. part hereof

Tyreſias habiturus iter illâc) is explaned by the

Coniunctiue partic. Adverb.

(Sic ſors tulit) which is explaned by the

Relatiue part.

(Cuius erat ignarus) which is explaned by the

Parentheſis

(Licet vates)

193The Second part.

(Violaverat) is explained by the

Relatiue partic.

(Quanta vi potuit)

194The Third part.

Duo Corpora magnorum ſerpentum, tumida nigro veneno) exp. by the

Copulatiue part.

(Eoque mortifero) explaned by the

Relatiue part

(quale eſt omnium ſerpentum in regionibus) explan. by the

Relat. Part.

(Quæ ſita ſunt in occidentatibus mundi)

195The Fourth part.

(Coëuntia) explaned by the {n. p.}

Coniunct. Part. Adverbe.

(ſicut erat cætera animantia coëunt verno tempore)

196The firſt part.

(Viridi ſylua) explaned.

1. By the Relat part.

(Quæ graminoſa fuit)

2. By the Cop. Part which ſtands of two perfect clauſes Zeug.

(Ac plena arbuſis, fruticibus) explaned by the

Copulatiue partic.

(Vepribuſque) All which parts are explaned by the

Parentheſis

(Vt refert Ovidius) explaned by the

Exceptiue part. (Nifallor)

 

Quare, cùm tibi maximas ago gratias, quòd ad me ſcripſeris, quodque mihi haud paullo plus, quàm agnoſcere debeam, tribuere videaris: quippe cùm ea referas ad iudicium meum, quorum ego te, ſi arbitrij mei res eſſet, Ariſtarchum libenter conſtituerem: tum verò ſic velim exiſtimes, ſiquis eſt, qui tuæ laudi faueat, qui tuam præſtantem doctrinam in ore habeat, qui denique tuâ cauſſâ ſumma et cupiat, et curet, eum eſſe me daturumque operam, vt animum aliquando res ipſa declaret.

 

The principall ſentence, Dialyticall.

(Quare cùm ago maximas gratias tibi) exp. by the

Cauſall particle,

(Quòd ſcripſeris ad me) explaned by the

Copulat. Partic.

(Quodque videaris tribuere mihi plus haud paulo) explaned

1. By the Electiue partic.

(Quàm debeam agnoſcere) {n. p.}

2. By the Cauſall partic.

(Quippe cùm referas ad meum iudicium ea) explaned by the

Relatiue partic.

(Quorum Ariſtarchum ego conſtituerem libenter te) explaned by the

Exceptiue particle,

(Si eſſet res mei arbitrij)

The ſecond Copulat. partic. Explaning the p𝔯incipall, is an Imperfect clauſe,

(Tum verò velim exiſtimes ſic, me eſſe cum) explaned

1. By the Conditionall partic.

(Si quis eſt) explaned by

3 Relatiue perfect clauſes,

(Qui faveat tuæ laudi)

(Qui habeat tuam præſtantem doctrinam in ore)

(Qui denique cupiat) explaned by the

Copulat. partic.

(Et curet omnia ſumma tuâ cauſâ,

2. By the Copulatiue,

(Daturum que operam) explaned by

The Cauſall, o𝔯 perfectiue partic.

(Vt res ipſa declaret aliquando animum.

 

SEd profectò, ſi me putas ab in eunte ætate ijs artibus, ac ſtudijs non mediocriter eſse delectatum, quibus ad humanitatem animus excolitur: æquiorem te mihi eſse oportet, nec ſuſpicari, quia rariùs ad te ſcribam, non ideò me tibi, quas debeo, gratias habere, nec diligere, et amplecti diligentiam, Induſtriamque tuam, quam quotidiè locas in antiquitate colligenda cuius ego maiorem officij partem libenter acceptam refero benevolentiæ erga me tuæ.

 

The p𝔯incipall Sentence. {n. p.}

(Sed profectò oportet te æquiorem eſse mihi) expl.

1. By the Conditionall partic.

(Si putas me non delectatum eſse mediocriter ab ineunte ætate ijs artibus) which is explaned by the

Copulat. partic.

(Ac ſtudijs) which are explaned by the

Relatiue partic.

(Quib. animus excolitur ad humanitatem)

2. By the Copulat. part.

(Nec ſuſpicari me non habere ideò gratias tibi) whoſe parts are explaned

The 1. part,

(Nec ſuſpicari) explaned by

Cauſall partic.

(Quia ſcribam rariùs ad te)

The 2 part.

(Me non habere ideò gratias tibi) explaned

1. By the Relatiue,

(Quas debeo)

2. By the Copulat.

(Nec diligere diligentiam tuam) whoſe parts are explaned,

The 1. part,

(Nec diligere) explaned by the

Copulatiue partic.

(& amplecti)

The 2. part.

(Diligentiam) explaned by the

Copulat. Partic.

(Induſtriamque tuam) explaned by the

Relatiue particle,

(Quam locas quotidiè in colligenda antiquitate) all which are explaned

By the Relatiue partic.

(Maiorem partem cuius officij ego refero libenter {n. p.} acceptam benevolentiæ tuæ erga me.

 

Valla. Cardinals, from whence other numbers are derived,

VNum, duo, tria, quatuor, quinque, ſex, ſeptem, octo, novem, decem, vndecim, duodecim, tredecim, quatuordecim, quindecim, ſexdecim, o𝔯 ſedecim, ſeptendecim, octodecim, o𝔯 duodeviginti, novendecim, o𝔯 vndeviginti, viginti Vnum & viginti, Duo & viginti, ( and ſo to 197* an hund𝔯ed, ſetting the leſſer number befo𝔯e, with the Copulatiue) otherwiſe, viginti vnum, viginti duo, 𝔈c. Triginta, triginta vnum, triginta duo, 𝔈c. Quadraginta, quinquaginta, ſexaginta, ſeptuaginta, octoginta, nonaginta, centum. Bis centum, ter centum, &c, o𝔯 Ducenti, æ, a, Trecenti, æ, a, quadringinta, quinginta, ſexinginta, o𝔯 ſexcenta, ſeptinginta, octinginta, noninginta, o𝔯 nonginta, mille. Duo millia, tria millia, &c. triginta millia, quadraginta millia, &c. Centum millia, bis centum millia, &c. Mille millium.

 

Ordinals, whereby things are numbred according to their order.

PRimus, ſecundus, tertius, quartus, quintus, ſextus, ſeptimus, octavus, nonus, decimus, vndecimus, duodecimus, decimus tertius, decimus quartus, decimus quintus, decimus ſextus, decimus ſeptimus, decimus octavus, decimus nonus, viceſsimus, & vigesſimus. Vicesſimus primus, vivesſimus ſecundus, &c. Tricesſimus, quadragesſimus, quinquagesſimus, ſexageſſimus, ſeptuageſſimus, octogesſimus, nonagesſimus, centesſimus, primus, ſecundus, &c. & Tricesſimus, 𝔈c. quadragesſimus, & quinquagesſimus, 𝔈c. Ducentiſſimus, trecentesſimus, quadringenteſſimus, ſexecentesſimus, ſeptingentesſimus, octingenteſsimus, {n. p.} noningentesſimus, millesſimus. Millesſimus primus, ſecundus, 𝔈c. Millesſimus centesſimus, ducentesſimus, &c.

 

Numbring of things according to time.

Semel, bis, ter, quater, quinquies, Sexies, septes, octies, Novies, decies, vndecies, duodecies, tredecies, quatuordecies, quindecies, ſexdecies, decies ſepties, decies octies, decies novies, vicies. Tricies, quadragies, quinquagies, ſexagies, ſeptuagies, octogies, nonagies, centies. Ducenties, trecenties, quadringenties, quingenties, ſexcenties, ſeptingenties, octingenties, nongenties, millies, ſemel millies, bis millies, &c. decies millies, vicies, tricies, &c.

 

Diſtributiue numbers, noting the partition of things.

SInguli, bini, terni, quaterni, quini, ſeni, septeni, octoni, noveni, deni, vndemi, duodeni, ternideni, quaternideni, quinideni, ſenideni, ſeptendeni, octonideni, novenideni, viceni, viceni ſinguli, &c.

Triceni, quadrageni, quinquageni, ſexageni, ſeptuageni, octogeni, nongeni, vel nonageni, centeni. Duceni, triceni, quadringeni, quingeni, ſexceni, ſextingeni, octingeni, noningeni, put fo𝔯 ducenteni, &c.

In p𝔯oſe theſe are vſed moſt commonly in the plurall nomber. In verſe they are vſed often in the ſingular.

Numbers in arius, note not the multiplication of themſelues but the nomber of other things not named: as, Centenarius lapis, not an hund𝔯eth fold, o𝔯 dooble, but of an hund𝔯eth pound waight. Homo Centenarius, not an hund𝔯eth fold but an hund𝔯eth yeares.

Primarius, binarius, ternarius, quaternarius, quinarius, ſenarius, ſeptenarius, octonarius, novenarius, {n. p.} denarius, vndenarius, duodenarius, tredenarius, quaterdenarius, quindenarius, ſedenarius, ſeptendenarius, octodenarius, novendenarius, vicenarius, tricenarius, &c. quadragenarius, &c. quinquagenarius, &c. ſexagenarius &c. ſeptuagenarius, &c, octogenarius, &c. nonagenariùs, &c. Centenarius. Ducentenarius, &c. trecentenarius, &c. quadringenarius, &c. quingenarius, &c. ſeptingentarius &c. octingenarius, &c noningenarius, &c. millenarius.

 

Liber & Autor ad Lectorem.

IGnotum (lector) vultu dignore ſereno,

Nec dubia rugas nectito fronte caras.

Ipſe fui quondam labyrinthus, corpus opacum,

Attica quo pubes ſæpè ſepulta fuit,

Flexibus ambiguis, varijs anfractibus illam,

Detinui, nulla noverat arte viam.

Nunc poſtquàm logici ductu Minoia fili,

Eruit e tenebris, vndique porta patet.

Sum domus, haud carcer. Non eſt, hîc ſudor, & angor,

Laſcivire licet, qua laboraſtis ad hûc.

Scande puër, facile eſt, facile eſt aſcende puelle,

Non tibi nodus adeſt, nec tibi dumus obeſt.

De viridî fuſim ſtillant hac ilice mella,

Quælibet & pomis pendula virga gemit.

Hoc capias horto calathis tibi lilia plenis,

Suaves hinc violas, carpe, puelle, roſas.

Artis ad oceanum libeat penetrare refuſum?

Nil te Mæandrum poſſe juvare putes.

Effluit, et refluit, redit, it, ſinuante Colubro

Torquetur, ſpiris voluitur inque fuis.

Neve petas Ararim, dubio quæ flumine fertur,

Lento progreſſu ſtare videtur Arar.

Porrigor in rectum, rectà protendor in æquor,

Ceu rapidus Rhodanus provehor amne meo. {n. p.}

Remige non opus eſt, propria namque arte ferere,

Ars mea natura eſt, detrahe vela noto.

Qui me non vectus longis erroribus actus,

Alliſus ſcopulis exul ab arte fuit.

Arſque probatur iners, quæ non comitante Minervæ

Traditur, at cerebro pendeat orſa ſuo.

Grammaticus verè non eſt, ſed grammaticaſter,

Naturæ ignorans haurier omne penu.

Linacer eſt noſtras clarus, clariſſimus atqui

Lilius eſt uoſtras, laurea ſerta gerat.

Si tibi profuerim, nihil eſt plus ipſe quod opto,

Hæc operæ ſpero præmiæ dignæ meæ.

Ventoſam ſtolidè laudem non aucupor ullam,

Certamen ſophiæ ſtultius eſſe reor.

Adjecit ſtimulos mihi nec ſpes dira lucelli,

Pſyttachus hinc cæpit diſcere χαἶρε ſuum.

Quod mihi compertum eſt, quodque experientia certa

Comprobat hîc doceo jam meliore viâ

Invidiæ non ſum correptus tabe veneni,

Nec mea contorquet viſcera livor iners.

Non proſunt domino, quæ fiunt omnibus artes

Communes, artis ſæpe profeſſor ait.

At Θεομίμεῖϑαι doctos dice, reſonoque

Regedo cogi, lege deique regi.

Hac ſum confiteor ſola ratione coactus

Tradere typis, quæ commoda certa ferant.

Si quid tu melius cognoſcas optime lector,

Et me participies antipelargus eris.

Molle meum pectus fera ne pertentet Erinnys,

Nec noceant linquæ lurida tela malæ.

Non mihi ſum ſoli natus ſed vt omnibus eſſem

Vtilis, auxilij debita ſolvo mej.

Siquid profuërim, mihi perdilecta juventus,

Gaudeo: tune animo percipe grata pari.

FINIS.

1 Proſodie of a letter.

2 Proſodye of Syllables.

3 a.

4 b. c.

5 d. t. e.

6 i.

7 l.

8 n.

9 o.

10r.

11 As.

12 Es.

13 Is.

14 Eis.

15 Is.

16 Os.

17 Vs.

18 Ous.

19 v.

20 a. b. c. d.

21 e.

22 f.

23 g.

24 h.

25 i.

26 k.

27 l.

28 m.

29 n.

30 o.

31 p.

32 q.

33 r. s.

34 a.

35 b. c.

36 d.

37 e.

38 f. g. h.

39 i. k.

40 l.

41 m.

42 n. o.

43 p.

44 q. r. s.

45 t. u.

46 x. y.

47 ʒ˙

48 a. b. c.

49 d. e.

50 Caſus dicitur quia pereum vovarie cadit.

51 Obliquus de, quia obliquatur in contexturam aliorum verborum.

52 im.

53 im, and em.

54 i.

55 e, i.

56 a fo𝔯 the moſt part.

57 Solito, vſed alway after Comparatiues: as plus ſolito.

58 a which it as ſignifieth

59 a Relatiues of quantitie, and qualitie.

60 Perſona, i, perſe vna.

61 verbum, i, verum, bonum.

62 a. eteroenergetica.

63 b. eteropathetica.

64 c. auto energetica

65 d. Idiopathe.

66 e. Autoenergeticon

67 f. Idiopathe.

68 Of potis and Sum.

69 Of non, and volo.

70 Of magis, and volo.

71 It hath the paſsiue onely in compoſition: as, efficior, 𝔈c. not facior, which is ſupplied by fio.

72 Ordior, orſus, to begin: Operior, experior, comperior, reperior, pertus.

73 * Reduplication, o𝔯 augment.

74 a dimicatum.

75 b parſum.

76 c diſpeſcitum.

77 d Diſcitum.

78 e compeſcitum

79 f, poſcitum.

80 g, liſtum.

81 h, lutum.

82 Ovat.

83 Dejeco,

84 pejero.

85 inquam.

86 memento.

87 faxo.

88 forem.

89 quæſo.

90 auſim.

91 aio.

92 ſalve.

93 cedo.

94 infit.

95 odi.

96 cæpi.

97 memini.

98 novi.

99 Anaſtrophe.

100 Epentheſis.

101 Paragogie.

102 veteres sæpe geminabāt ſſ.

103 Syncope.

104 Apocope.

105 Optumus. Volgus. Paſſes, Arbos, &c.

106 Si, fo𝔯 An Ter, eſtne intus, ſi ſit, rogas: Helleniſmus. Niſi fo𝔯 ſed Ter Neſcio, niſi, mihi deos ſatis ſcio fuiſſe iratos &c. Helleniſmus.

107 * Magis aucte.

108 Antiptôſis.

109 Syntheſis.

110 Syllepſis.

111 Syntheſis.

112 Prolepſis.

113 Zeugma.

114 Protozeugma. Melozeugma Hypozeugma

115 P𝔯onoune, o𝔯 Noune indefinite.

116 Interrogatiues and Indefinits agree with the wo𝔯d following: as Cæſar excellentibus ingenijs, quale tuum eſt, delectatur.

117 Antiptôſis.

118 Syllepſis.

119 Anacholũthus.

120 Syntheſis.

121 Syllepſis.

122 Prolepſis.

123 Zeugma.

124 Vbi.

125 Vnde.

126 tàm, quam.

127 Vt.

128 Tantò, quãtò. Multò, longè.

129 Of number.

130 Vt.

131 Donec.

132 Dum.

133 Vt, τελιχιο͂ς.

134 quoad.

135 Ne.

136 Etſi, tametſi, &c.

137 Ne, an, num.

138 Etſi, tametſi. &c.

139 Quamvis.

140 Licet.

141 Cùm.

142 Vt.

143 Ne, an, num.

144 mediate appoſition.

145 immediate appoſition.

146 Place.

147 Place.

148 Humi, domi, &c.

149 Meaſure.

150 Magis Velim.

151 *Of Eo.

152 Greeke conſtruction.

153 P𝔯oſodie of letters and Syllables in Etymologie. Foure degrees of diſtinction in a Periode.

154 1. Diſtinctio.

155 A comma (,)

156 2. Subdiſtinctio.

157 3. Imperfect Colon (;) Perfect Colon (:).

158 Parentheſis ( ).

159 Perfecta diſt.

160 A Period (.)

161 As alſo are the other ſentences.

162 Interrog. point (?)

163 Admirat. point (!)

164 Coniunctiue (-)

165 Diuiſiue ( ̈)

166 Apoſtrophus (’)

167 * fo𝔯 the moſt part.

168 * moſt commonly.

169 ʒeugmatically.

170 Rom. I.

171 By prolepſis. P𝔯olepticall clauſes.

172 By Aſyndeton, i. the defect of the coniunction, called alſo Dialyſis.

173 * Largè ſumpta.

174 * Relatum eſſentiæ.

175 * Quantitatis qualitatis. Loci.

176 The Dependence of the Nom. caſe.

177 Depending all originally of the Nominatiue.

178 * The epithite to the verbe, as the Adiectiue is to the Subſtantiue. The Dependents of the verbe.

179 * And the datiue of the perſon, before the datiue of the thing.

180 * Depending all originally of the verbe.

181 * But conſtrued befo𝔯e it, when his Antecedēt is exp𝔯eſſed: as, Maiorem partem cuius officij refero, &c.

182 Quarũ laudũ gloriã adamaris, &c. cic.

183 When many coniunctions come togeather.

184 Nevilli Ket.???

185 Nev.

186 1. Principall.

187 2. Principall.

188 Asch. Ep:

189 1. Princip.

190 2. P𝔯incip.

191 3. P𝔯incip.

192 1. P𝔯incipall.

193 2. P𝔯incipall.

194 3. P𝔯inc.

195 4. P𝔯incip.

196 5. P𝔯incip.

197 After an hund𝔯ed, the greater number is ſet befo𝔯e howſoeuer.

ToC